JP6881092B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a start port provided on the game board, and the lottery result is displayed as a symbol or the like to be notified in advance. broadcast knowledge it shall are known in the notification manner.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-147965

In such gaming machines, it is required to improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball and a determination means capable of executing a determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means. , A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, it is advantageous to the player. It has a privilege game execution means capable of executing one privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The retention is released by the specific entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the period, the retention means that can retain the game ball that has entered the specific entry means, and the retention means. When the specific area where the game ball can enter and the first privilege game are executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the first privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the second privilege game is given. Is executed, the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed. In this case, the first setting set based on the fact that the game ball is retained by the retention means and the first setting set based on the fact that the game ball is not retained by the retention means are The gaming machine has a setting means capable of setting different second settings, and when the second privilege game in which the first setting is set is executed, the gaming ball is placed in the specific area. When the first effect for showing that the second privilege is granted is executable based on the entry of the ball, and the second privilege game in which the second setting is executed is executed. In addition, a second effect different from the first effect is executed to show that the second privilege is granted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied without the game ball entering the specific area. The second effect is configured to be possible, and the second effect is executed after the specific effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has not entered the specific area is executed, and the gaming machine is , It is possible to set a valid period for determining that the game ball has entered the specific area during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed. It is configured to be able to notify an abnormality based on the fact that a game ball enters outside the valid period .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , there are a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball-entry means, and the determination means. A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an operation of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the target display mode and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means and the first privilege game thereof. It has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and during the period during which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific entry means that allows the game ball to enter, a retention means that can retain the game ball that has entered the specific entry means, and a game ball whose retention is released by the retention means enter the ball. When the possible specific area and the first privilege game are executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the first privilege advantageous to the player is given and the second privilege game is executed. In this case, when the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed, A first setting that is set based on the fact that the game ball is retained by the retention means, and a second setting that is different from the first setting that is set because the game ball is not retained by the retention means. The gaming machine has a setting means that can be set, and the gaming machine has entered the specific area when the second privilege game in which the first setting is set is being executed. Based on this, when the first effect for showing that the second privilege is granted is executably configured and the second privilege game in which the second setting is executed is executed, the specific area Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied without the pachinko ball entering the ball, a second effect different from the first effect for showing that the second privilege is granted is configured to be feasible. The second effect is executed after the specific effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has not entered the specific area is executed, and the game machine has the first privilege. It is possible to set a valid period for determining that the game ball has entered the specific area during the period in which the game or the second privilege game is executed, and the game is played outside the valid period. It is configured to be able to notify an abnormality based on the entry of a technical ball .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block on the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit at the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit at the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove in the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove in the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. (A) is a side view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (c) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the game state and the effect content in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 2 in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 3 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 1 in the first control example. Is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the addition effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time when the additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device is started. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuous effect among the additional effect displayed by the symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuous effect among the additional effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1 control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the jackpot ending screen among the additional effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the jackpot ending screen, and (b) is the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the end of a big hit among the addition effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during high-speed fluctuation of a special symbol after the end of a big hit among the additional effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuous effect among the additional effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during high-speed fluctuation of a special symbol after the end of a big hit among the normal hit effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b). Is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is won among the normal hit effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. , Is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in a battle mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the pre-battle effect among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a battle reach display mode among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the third symbol display in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the battle reach is won among the battle modes displayed by the apparatus. (A) Among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when it was drawn to the battle reach, and (b) is the figure which showed in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of defeating a battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the revival effect of the battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the precursory effect among the suggestion effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the countdown effect among the suggestion effect displayed by a display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the suggestion effect executed within one variation among the suggestion effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion effect executed by a plurality of fluctuations among the suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic description of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots. It is the figure shown, (c) is the figure which showed the ruled content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table schematically, and (d) is the figure which schematically showed the ruled content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the special variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the jackpot transition setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 1 table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table. , (E) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table, and (f) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition table 7, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the regulation content of the table schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the state transition 8 table schematically, (d) is the figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the state transition 9 table. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol reserved ball count counter in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. It is the figure which showed, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the big hit middle production selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the additional number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous effect mode selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous value main selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second continuation value subselection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram explaining the contents of the effect set as the final mode. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the expectation degree selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the expectation degree effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the 1st control example. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation number subtraction process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the addition effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition display processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit post-effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the multiple variation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is the effect addition of the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the transformation pattern table in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is the definition of the title system selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is the figure which showed the content schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the specified content of the title selection table in the effect addition example of the 1st control example schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the accessory operation level selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is an effect setting group in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a change process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a title setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is the regulation content of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, (d). Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition 1 table among the fall state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (e) is the second control. It is a figure which shows typically the specified contents of the fall state transition 2 table among the fall state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the second control example. It is a block diagram. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. It is a figure shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another example of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic description of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table after falling. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the other effect example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the other effect example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) is the fluctuation pattern selection table in the third control example. Of these, it is a figure schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table, and (c) is the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. It is a figure which showed the regulation content of the table schematically, and (d) shows the regulation content of the 2nd deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table of the variation pattern selection table in the 3rd control example schematically. FIG. 6 (e) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a special (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the third control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) to (d) are diagrams in the third control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the variation scenarios 1 to 3 defined in the variation scenario table, respectively. (A) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenarios 4 to 7 defined in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. (A) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenarios 8 to 11 defined in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example, and (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the 2nd continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 3rd continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows typically the electric structure of the display control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value-related command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the final mode command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control device in another control example of 3rd control example, (b) is a block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in another control example of 3rd control example. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the third control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario A1 defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, (b). ) Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit post-variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of the suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of the suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd precursor effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in another example of suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 6 in the additional description of the 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the expectation suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing a display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect described in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing a display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect described in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the V winning apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the V winning apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the movable guide member in 1st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode that does not form a pseudo-ream displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode which is not pseudo-ream displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in A1 Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the variation mode of the pseudo-ream 1 displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the variation mode of the button effect at the time of pseudo-continuous development displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode of the button effect at the time of pseudo-continuous development displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in A1 Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbol stop which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the A1 Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the RAM of the main control unit in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the rule contents in a schematic form. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the ordinary symbol random number table. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule content of the selection table schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the rule content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule content of the selection table schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the rule content of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table in the A1 embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the defined content of the normal variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. Is a diagram schematically showing. , A1 is a figure schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the first embodiment. , It is a figure explaining each hit type and operation content of a hit game in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot scenario table in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit scenario table in the A1 embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a hit scenario a in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a hit scenario b in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit scenario c in the A1 Embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow in the A1 Embodiment. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the time of passing the small hit V in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the small hit V non-passing time in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the time of passing the jackpot V in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the time when the jackpot V is not passed in the A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in A1 Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display data table in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing list in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing, and (c) is the flowchart which shows the chance eye command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V effect command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the sorting apparatus in A2 Embodiment. (A) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the inside of the sorting device B700 according to the A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the Kroon member in the A3 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow path unit in A4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in A4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the small hit V in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the big hit V in the A4 embodiment. Is. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is the roulette display timing when the big hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in A4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition device determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A4th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the V winning apparatus in A5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in A5 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in A5 Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when the first electric accessory 140a is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board can pass through the balls that are fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (expanded state) makes it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 140a and winning the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceable on the base member 410, a right displacement member 420R, and the like. A retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the back side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is converted into a pattern or the like. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of incident light emitted from the LED 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a back base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is driven. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in different modes. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are included in the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , Left driven member 430L and right driven member 430R, carriage member 440, upper left rack 450L and upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide bored at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length dimension such that the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). It is slidably inserted into (see FIGS. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted into the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation about the axis of the connecting hole 422 as the center of rotation) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is supported in a state of being suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. It is provided with a rack gear 452.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper left rack 450R is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 that are rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the first gear 487a is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487e at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. A drive pin 484c projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed is provided.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 to the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484a as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is provided between the base end rails arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are in the state where the leading gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front surface and the right front surface of the base member 410. It is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488a is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488b is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and in a state where the rack gears 488a face each other, they are located between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 in the left-right direction (width direction). , FIG. 19 left and right direction).

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b formed in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) are rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gears 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in the opposite direction (the direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. It is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The upper portion (upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape in front view) of the base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially overlapped on the front side. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly projecting portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 projecting from the back surface of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It is provided with a shaft support hole 494a and a linear drive groove 494c located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is moved from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced to the left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost side (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and are also arranged. The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 are passed, and then the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are shown. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) toward each other until the state (extending position in the first aspect), and the projecting member 485 is raised. In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are formed in a united state (a state in which the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is a sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the projecting member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear trains (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially at the same time from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhang position (overhang position in the first aspect). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) substantially at the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (dolly member 440) is faster than that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1. It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the states shown, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) until the states (retracted positions) shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 are separated from each other, and the protruding member 485. Is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490, the left displacement member 420L rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). As a result, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to produce a surprising effect of the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by translation (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there are some products in which the center of rotation remains constant and the displacement mode is changed by changing only the rotation direction, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also formed differently (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect). The lower end side is the center of rotation), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be greatly changed in the displacement mode, which makes it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

Further, in the first aspect, where the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in the proximity direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the trolley member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the trolley member 440 has the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are rotatably connected, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only a mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the carriage member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force to the 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in all of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each mode, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. (Gears 662 to 664) and the above gear trains (gears 662 to 664) are mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the back base 611 and the facing surfaces of the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter, referred to as “display area”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620 and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of each LED 651 in the irradiation direction passes through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back side of the back surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611a erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An intermediate erection part 611b erected between the erection part 611c, the inner erection part 611a and the outer erection part 611c, and an inner concave groove in an area surrounded by the inner erection part 611b and the inner erection part 611a. Mainly provided with 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the ring-shaped plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611c is erected on the front side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the ring-shaped plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed by surrounding the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axial center of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In the present embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611 are supported. The erection portion 612a, the intermediate erection portion 612b, the outer erection portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulation protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and allows the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch portion 611b1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch portion 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the erection tip surfaces of the intermediate erection portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. To. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the notches 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The notch portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by notching a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a pattern, a pattern, or the like over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 of the side surface on the back surface side, and the end portion of the back surface portion 632 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) to the front side. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back portion 632 extending the back portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1 = θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the cross section is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape, and the bent inside is formed. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and is inclined to the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back side is a virtual angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extending the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. Note that FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the amount of the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the collar C is the inner peripheral side (the left side of FIG. 40 (a)) with the back side (upper side of FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f. It is done in a state of being tilted to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the shaft of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the shaft of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)) so that the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the assembly efficiency was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collars and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by lining the back base 611 from the back side on the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, since the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body and light is incident from its end face (edge), the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), so that the air travels inside the projection plate member 620. Light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light-transmitting material, and thus is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel as well as the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the thickness of the projection plate member 620 can be changed, or the intensity of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 (amount of light) can be increased without increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. By increasing the amount of light, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the heat effect on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in the front direction with the light source A in the front direction (on FIG. 42 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. Since the positions are shifted in the direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 644, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β can be transmitted to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced to the axial side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is emitted. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the heat effect on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount of the misaligned arrangement. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the above-mentioned state (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

FIG. 44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLIVb of FIG. 44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 44 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first block 653 and a second block 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are oriented in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (b) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second block 654 is arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first block 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 on the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). Further, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (a)) from a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposite side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653c, and the protrusion 653c1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (c)) from the bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 in front view is bored in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 Can be fastened.

Insertion holes 653b1,654b1 are bored in the first block 653 and the second block 654 at two positions of the side wall portions 653b and 654b which are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual surface (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second first block 653 is arranged with respect to the first substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both vertical and longitudinal directions with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46 (c)). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, respectively, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined interval between the first block 653 and the second block 654. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the open side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 are provided with a recess on the side surface to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic component or connector mounted on the substrate member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with surrounding displaced members (for example, projection plate member 620). it can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) even in the portion where both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612, in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, each LED 651 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LED 651s being arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (8 in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the labor of arranging the LED 651 can be reduced accordingly.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654, each LED651 Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like can be caused. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 as a desired posture by suppressing the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (the left-right directions of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654c in the second block 654, the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased by that amount. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b on which the fastening hole h is formed is on the side of the first block 653. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 44 and 45, left and right directions). ) Can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening hole h is formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), such longitudinal direction. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front side of the rear base 830 having a rectangular shape in front view, the front base 820 superposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the 860, the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the axes of the opening 831 in which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 is formed to a size that allows the transmission gear 861 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that protrudes to the front side and extends in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back side of the back base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 823 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, respectively, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the back base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with dimensions larger than the dimensions. As a result, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed to protrude on the back side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined interval, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and by meshing with each other in series, the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted via the transmission gears 861 and 862. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protruding portion 863c that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

The tooth portion 863a is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected to the back surface side in a columnar shape, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by being curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotation position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not used.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, so that the pin member 890 can be prevented from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side end of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 in a state where the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851. , The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a state where it can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side, and the protruding distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that substantially coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is below the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side of the connecting member 870 The straight line connecting the connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center), power is supplied to the drive motor 880. This is explained when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is considered to be in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and the structure and control can be adjusted. Since there is no need to complicate the product, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is a rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be combined with the rotational motion centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axial centers and the straight line connecting the axial centers of the gear-side connecting holes 871 of the connecting member 870 and the axial centers of the displacement-side connecting holes 872 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the pushing-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the descending position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

Further, in the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axes of the hole 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In addition, in FIGS. 57A to 57C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the back base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the driving range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the back base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced vertically is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the transmission gear 870 is a force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863, and a force that is stopped by stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880). It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. Note that FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the first position to the second position As the position is displaced, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced in accordance with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force for stopping the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is regulated.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are tilted in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the position where the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 so as to sandwich the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, thereby causing the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, in FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the cross-sectional line is omitted for easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at the time of this is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light applied to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having an irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at a position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by denting it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ added. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65 (c) shows the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that projects toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 formed on the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and penetrating the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. As a result, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface on the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove that is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 come into contact with each other is the opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force thereof. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66B, as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has an influence on the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the light having an irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And patterns can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light emitted to an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first embodiment. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from being displaced with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial side of the projection plate member 3620 through the gap. There was a risk of light leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is caused by the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the dimension of the side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light intensity) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light intensity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68 (b) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is attached to each head of the one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a dimension that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By bringing it into contact with the head of S2, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the LED 651 from being damaged.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated about the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slidably displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the base member 5610 which is formed in a circular shape in the front view and the central portion thereof is opened and the opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and a projection plate member for the driving force of the drive motor 661. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668) for transmitting to the 5620.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in the front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 whose central portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape and the back base 5611, and has substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5) are provided in the internal space formed between the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in the front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view at the center portion. The central opening 5612h, the inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612 m formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612h to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or the pattern of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 which is recessed on the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the protruding surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding portion covers 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion serving as a rotation shaft of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is transferred to a pattern or the like. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by driving the drive motor 661. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) and a horizontally long rectangular rod member facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

As a result, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to advance and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 with the rod member 5625 arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668), and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the slide direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Thereby, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting a protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

Rotating members 5670 are attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged in a direction in which the tip portion on one side is displaced downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. It is arranged at 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where it is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 with respect to the LED 651. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. In addition, in FIG. 74 and FIG. 76, the state in which the back base 5611 is removed is shown. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at substantially the central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612h, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented accordingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 and right), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side in the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the slide direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k which is the rotating axis. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the displacement is such that the amount of light of the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting the LED arranged at another position according to the displacement. Along with this, it is necessary to control the lighting or extinguishing of the LED, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiated body (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, the irradiation range of each irradiated body There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can change the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be transferred to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base 5612 and then the wiring is connected, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so that the process at the time of assembly can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612j to regulate its rotation range.

The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because, as described above, the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 has a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape in front view and a projection plate member partially visibly arranged from an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 that incidents light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose is mainly provided.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing surface between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662-664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view ring-shaped shielding member 6612r is formed on the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. Part 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612r, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 6612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c of the outer edge portion of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a ring shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the front base 6612 having a ring shape. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in the assembled state of the projection unit 6600, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. The player is made to visually recognize through the opening 6612p of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be highlighted (displayed) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In the present embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection region 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. As a result, a plurality of different patterns or patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible region (opening) of the irradiated body is used. From 6612p), the pattern or pattern switching of the irradiated body can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern switching is completed, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated body. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated body with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated body, the irradiated body is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the openings formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmitting material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transparent material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed from the non-transparent material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-transparent material and the layer of the permeable material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear members 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected by the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver foil or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or the pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a sticker is attached, the sticker may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is inserted between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be provided as an intermediary.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transparent material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transparent material having high reflectance can suppress the light emitted by other devices in the game region from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transparent material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from another device is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent a pattern or a pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 when it is incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, and the like. It may be a leaf spring. Examples of the mounting method include a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may slide-displace the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement member 850 is displaced in the gravity direction as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surfaces on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 irradiates other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and is obliquely irradiated from the irradiation surface of the LED 651. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying a pattern or a pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated body.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is projected plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view ring shape. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted at the arrangement position of the LED 651 in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the LED 651 is arranged so that the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the above is irradiated on the side end faces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630.

In addition, the LED 651 is arranged so that the light irradiation surface is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is applied to the front portion 632 of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 is displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the second region and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of the patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface to irradiate the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. It is also possible to irradiate the third region by injecting light from a surface), but there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two regions, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly arranged drive motor and rotated.

In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, by displacing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to operate the change of the shade of the pattern or the display of the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a manner in which two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or the pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or the pattern of each projection plate member 620 in a combined state. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the central side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. In the first control example, an effect (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of a special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 and an effect for showing that a jackpot game is being executed (a production for showing that a jackpot game is being executed ( The jackpot effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) straddling the plurality of jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the entry information is configured to be memorable when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140, and is stored when the jackpot game is executed. It is determined whether or not the ball information has the winning ball entry information, and when it is determined that the jackpot winning ball entry information exists, it is possible to straddle a plurality of jackpot games. A continuous jackpot production is executed.

With this configuration, the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game can suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed. You can get interested in the jackpot production.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to change the content of the jackpot effect based on not only the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed but also the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be done. With such a configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, it is possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and the player can be interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, as a jackpot continuous effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed based on the number of stored ball entry information (number of reserved items) at the time when the jackpot game is executed. ing.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support), the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)), and the time saving state (low probability, with electric support). )), The effect (battle effect) for indicating that the game state is continuing is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

Further, the above-mentioned battle production is composed of a production (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends, and a production (pre-battle production) for determining the production mode of the battle reach. It is configured. With this configuration, when the gaming state that is actually advantageous to the player ends, for example, the battle effect is continued during a period other than the case where the normal jackpot, in which the gaming state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot, is won. Because it can be executed, the player continues to have a feeling of expectation that the gaming state favorable to the player continues and anxiety that makes the player think that the gaming state favorable to the player has ended. You can play the game while holding it.

Further, in this control example, as an effect for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a plurality of effects having different jackpot expectations are executed. As a result, the player can have different expectations for the jackpot depending on which effect is executed. Further, it is possible to display a plurality of expectation suggestion modes that can suggest the expectation of the jackpot step by step in one variation effect, and the expectation suggestion mode is changed during one variation effect. ..

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the expected degree variable suggestion effect that suggests to the player is executed by adding up the amounts that the plurality of expected degree suggestion modes change stepwise during one variable effect. ing. With this configuration, it is possible for the player who has grasped the production content of the expected degree variable suggestion effect to play the game while predicting which expectation degree suggestion mode is variable and how much. Can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a suggestion effect suggesting the timing when a specific effect (for example, a PUSH display effect for operating the frame button 22) executed during one variation effect is executed, a specific effect (PUSH display effect) is used. ) Is executed, a countdown effect for specifically notifying the execution timing and a precursor effect for notifying that the countdown effect is executed are executed. Then, in one variable effect, the start timing of the above-mentioned precursor effect, the execution timing of the specific effect, and the period of the countdown effect can be determined from a plurality of, and the precursor effect is based on the determined contents. It is configured so that the effect mode and the effect mode of the countdown effect are set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in setting the suggestion effect and enhance the effect of the effect, as compared with the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and a variable display is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first control example, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

A small display area Dn1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dn1, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 85 (a)). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guide display area Dn1. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dn2 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dn2 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dn2, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is urged to be pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dn2 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), sub-display regions Ds are formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically.

Further, in this control example, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information related to the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140, the spheres that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls). Although details will be described later, this sub-display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying the game content and the effect content to the player (FIG. 102 (FIG. 102). a) See). When the variable display being executed ends and the next fluctuation is started, the reserved symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds corresponds to the next fluctuation (front view of FIG. 81 (b)). The leftmost reserved symbol) is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variation display during execution (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost side during the previous variation) is the execution symbol display area (area in which the expected degree display mode Dk1 of FIG. 102 is displayed). ) Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of each of the main symbol and the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 140 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters the ball. Each is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the ball entering the second ball entry port 140 can be held up to four times, respectively, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is The number of times is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 140 are not limited to the same. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be larger than or less than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 140. Good. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the game state is "normal", that is, when the game state is in a big hit, or in a normal state that is not in the probability change state or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed and the game state is "big hit". In the case of "", the jackpot medium effect is executed, and when the game state is "probability change or time reduction", that is, when the game state is in the probability change state or time reduction state, the probability change is in progress (probability change state or time reduction state). Middle) The production is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set gaming state just by looking at the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is configured to be executed in association with the game state, but for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. .. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state by visually recognizing the effect being executed, and the game is expected to be set in a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can let a person play a game.

Further, in FIG. 82, it is explained that the effect content (display content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differs depending on the game state, but the mode included in the effect content is the third symbol. It is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and naturally includes, for example, the sound output mode output by the voice output device 226 and the light emission mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227. is there.

First, the effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. First, in this control example, it is determined whether or not there is the number of special symbol reserved balls at the time when the jackpot game is executed and the contents of the reserved ball information (for example, whether or not there is the winning information). Based on the result), the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in succession, a production (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games) is executed to partially notify the contents of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game). When this is done, the number of rounds is notified for 5 rounds) in succession across multiple jackpots, so that multiple jackpot games are continuously executed. , Execute the production corresponding to each jackpot game, and before the multiple jackpot games (during the special symbol change period that is performed during the period from the end of the previous jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game) By continuously displaying the ending effect of the jackpot game, the jackpot medium effect 2 that produces the appearance that multiple jackpot games are continuously executed, and when the previous jackpot game is executed, the next It is configured to be configurable as a jackpot medium effect 3 that notifies that the jackpot game is executed and executes a continuous effect for a plurality of jackpot games.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83A, the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 1 will be described. FIG. 83A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 1. As shown in FIG. 83A, the jackpot medium effect 1 has a number of reserved balls of "3" when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit medium production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 1 is set, when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R)) )) The jackpot game effect (5R effect) indicating) is executed. After that, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next jackpot game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed, and the total It is set so that the jackpot game production for 25R is executed.

That is, instead of setting the effect content (effect scenario) executed during one jackpot game as a series of effect content (effect scenario), it is configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , The new production content (scenario) is configured to be set based on the ball entry information held and stored at that time.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 83 (a), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85 (a)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (notification of the number of fixed rounds) is executed to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. Then, when the jackpot game progresses to the 4th R, a suggestion effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) suggesting whether or not the next 5R effect is executed is executed, and at the 5Rth, the next 5R effect is executed. A notification effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) for notifying the result of whether or not to perform is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83A, since the jackpot of 15 rounds is set as the first jackpot, the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect (5R effect 3) executed for the third time is the period until the second jackpot to be executed next is started, that is, the ending period of the first jackpot and the first jackpot. It is set to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change that is executed after the end (see FIGS. 87 (a) and 88 (a)). Then, with the start of the second jackpot (the start of the opening period of the second jackpot), the 5R effect 4 is executed.

As a result, if a new hold memory is generated during the jackpot game and the hold memory includes the entry information corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, the entry information (for example, the number of rounds) is used as the basis. It is possible to set a new effect (display of the number of additional rounds). Therefore, the effect (display of the number of additional rounds) executed during the jackpot can be easily changed as compared with the configuration in which the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot is set as a series of effect scenarios at the start of the jackpot. ..

Note that FIG. 83A shows an example in which a period of 5 rounds is set as one effect unit during the jackpot game, but the effect content may be set for each round. Further, the discriminant management process for discriminating the content of the ball entry information may be performed for each round, and the effect content may be set for each predetermined round (for example, every 5 rounds). In addition, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the ball entry information is determined, and the information used when setting the effect content during the jackpot (presence or absence of jackpot, number of rounds) is stored in the storage area. It may be configured as.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load from temporarily increasing at the timing of setting the effect content during the jackpot game (every 5 rounds in FIG. 83A).

Here, the display contents of the jackpot medium effect 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the jackpot medium effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85 (b) is executed in the jackpot medium effect 1. FIG. 86A is a schematic view schematically showing an example of an effect display for showing whether or not the 5R effect is continued, and FIG. 86A is an effect display for showing that a new 5R effect is executed. FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example, FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in the round immediately before the end of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the ending period of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87 (b) is a display showing that the jackpot will end during the ending period of the jackpot 1. FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen, and FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen during a special symbol change after the end of one jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the jackpot medium effect 1 is executed, the characters "big hit" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved and "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery. The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed at, is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, the characters "right-handed" are displayed to guide the ball to be launched into the right-handed area, and the front view of the main display area Dm is displayed. On the upper right side, in the round number display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed is determined to be executed. The fixed number display mode Dm4 indicating the number of fixed rounds is displayed.

In this control example, as the jackpot middle effect 1, a five-round (R) effect that notifies the player in advance that at least five rounds of the jackpot game will be executed is executed, and is therefore shown in FIG. 85 (a). As described above, "5" is displayed as the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (number of running rounds display mode Dm3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 85 (b), an additional effect (FIG. 5) is executed in the next round (fifth round). An effect (big hit continuous effect) suggesting the content of 86 (a)) is executed. In this control example, as a jackpot continuous effect, the selected image Dm5 to Dm7 imitating the "treasure box" is displayed as a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the selected image Dm8 imitating the "arrow" is the selected image Dm5 to. It is displayed corresponding to each of Dm7. The player selects one of the three "treasure chests" displayed by selecting one of the selected images Dm8 displayed so as to correspond to each of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7. Select "Treasure Chest".

Although detailed description will be omitted, in this control example, one of the three “arrows” of the selected image Dm8 is displayed so as to be regularly variable in display mode. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the variable display mode (variable display mode Dm9) became the selected images selected by the player, and the player had an arbitrary "arrow" as the variable display mode Dm9. In this case, the frame button 22 is operated to select an arbitrary selected image.

The method by which the player selects an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured so that it can be selected by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select the frame. By operating the button 22, the selected image Dm8 to be the variable display mode Dm9 may be selected.

Further, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, but a different display mode may be displayed for each selected image. In this case, when the selected image having a display mode different from the usual one is displayed, it is preferable to configure it so that the next 5R effect can be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game will continue at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round with the selected image Dm5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86A is displayed. In FIG. 86 (a), only the “treasure box” (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuous production executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the number of confirmed rounds is displayed from the “treasure chest”. "+5" is displayed as the display mode Dm10 of the number of additional rounds to be added to the mode Dm4, and the value of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10".

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. Note that FIG. 86 (a) shows a display screen when “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, but the selected image selected in the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 85 (b)). The content of the addition round number display mode Dm10 is set to be different according to the above. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the big hit continuous production.

Further, in this control example, the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is displayed by a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen among the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game set internally. Any display mode may be used as long as it is variable according to the above, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as character movement, color, and size may be used. By using the abstract display mode as the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of having the player predict the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game.

In addition, a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time can grasp the regularity of the display mode using an abstract expression, so that it becomes easier to grasp the content of the jackpot game than other players. Satisfaction can be increased. In addition, as the content of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the jackpot medium production in which the production in which the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It should be possible to grasp by the regularity of the aspect.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the second jackpot game, based on the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide game information that is more advantageous than other players to a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play a game continuously for a long period of time.

In FIG. 86A, “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round game is being executed, and the fixed number of rounds is displayed. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10", but the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed is a timing other than during the round game, that is, 5 rounds. The effect content may be set so that the inter-round interval period is between the end of the round game of the eyes and the start of the round game of the sixth round.

Further, in the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 85B, a means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is provided, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it is within 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the 5th round game, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it exceeds, or if it is not operated, it may be configured to display the number of rounds display mode Dm10 in addition to the interval period between rounds after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, the player enthusiastically participates in the production by changing the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed based on the presence or absence of the operation. And the effect of production can be enhanced. The timing for displaying the number of additional rounds Dm10 may be different depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the presence / absence of the operation. For example, a predetermined timing (fourth round game) A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 may be provided for a specific 1 second), and the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be different based on the discriminating result. .. Further, only when the operation content for the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific 1 second during the round game of the 4th round), the number of additional rounds is displayed. The values displayed in may be configured to be different.

Next, the production content to make it appear that multiple (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, the special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game. The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (a).

First, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the jackpot continuous effect is executed based on the start of the round (14th round) immediately before the final round of the first jackpot game. FIG. 86 (b) shows an effect mode different from the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 85 (b), and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a more luxurious display mode than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. In this way, by making the production mode of the jackpot continuous effect different, it is possible to show the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will continue depending on the production mode of the jackpot continuous effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the content of the production, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

FIG. 86 (b) shows an effect mode different from that of FIG. 85 (b) in order to explain variations of the jackpot continuous effect, but the jackpot continuous effect (14) corresponding to the final round of the first jackpot game. As a jackpot continuous effect executed in the roundth round), the same effect mode as in FIG. 85 (b) is naturally set to be executed. In this way, by using the same production mode for the big hit continuous effect executed in the middle of the first big hit game and the big hit continuous effect executed at the end of the first big hit game, at what timing the first time It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds of jackpot the first jackpot was).

In addition to the above-mentioned method for setting the jackpot continuous effect, for example, this jackpot continuous effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game according to the selected image (“treasure box”) selected in the jackpot continuous effect. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a continuous production of a big hit.

When the selected image Dm5 is selected in the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 86 (b) and the final round (15th round) is entered, the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86 (a) is executed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display is continuously displayed even during the ending period after the end of the final round. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the change of the special symbol starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 88 (a) is displayed.

FIG. 88A is an example of a display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is completed and the special symbol is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), even after the first jackpot game is completed (after the special symbol variation is started), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has won the jackpot stops, the combination of symbols (for example, "777") for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the state.

In this control example, when an additional effect is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot and the next jackpot that becomes the pending villa (the jackpot stored on hold) ) And the number of rounds set in) can be added up to set the display mode of the additional effect, so before the next big hit, which will be the pending villa, is started, that is, 1 During the first jackpot, it is possible to display the additional round number display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set for the next jackpot.

In the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot (the next jackpot is won, the opening period of the jackpot has passed, and the first round game is executed. An example of the effect of continuously displaying the additional effect during the period) is shown, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), and the additional effect is completed during the ending period (Fig.). 87 (a)) and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)), a blessing effect to congratulate the addition of the number of rounds may be performed, or the final round (15). Rounds) and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (a)), the additional effect is completed, and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the effect of congratulating the addition of the number of rounds. In the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 86 (b)) executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed, and during the ending period (FIG. 87). (See (a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the additional effect may be executed.

When executing the above-mentioned blessing effect, the round following the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86 (a))) is executed during one jackpot (for example) For example, it is advisable to configure the same blessing effect to be executed in the sixth round). As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp how many jackpots were won while the extra effect is being executed, that is, the additional effect mode executed during one jackpot and 2 It is possible to make the effect mode of the additional effect executed between the two jackpots the same (the same except for an error to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no number of rounds to be added by the additional effect, "+0" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 and the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is "15" as shown in FIG. 87 (b). Is not changed, and the comment "Unfortunately the big hit ends" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the big hit ends.

Further, in this control example, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (inter-round interval period) between each round game executed during the jackpot game, but other than that. For example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same depending on the winning jackpot type, the period of the interval between rounds may be different. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of rounds in multiples of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 rounds and 6 rounds) is set to 5. The jackpot type, which sets the interval between rounds to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, the round set between 3 rounds and 4 rounds). It is preferable to provide a jackpot type in which the interval between rounds is set to 5 seconds and the interval between rounds is set to 2 seconds.

Further, when the jackpot type with different round-to-round intervals is used as described above, it is preferable to configure the jackpot during the jackpot to be switched at the timing when the long-term inter-round interval is set. Further, when the effect during the jackpot is executed with a predetermined period (for 5 rounds) as one unit as in this control example, the jackpot starts (the start of the jackpot opening period or the start of the first round). Since the interval until the first long-term inter-round interval is set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the effect during the jackpot, the effect other than the additional effect is executed. Then it is good.

Further, in this control example, a fixed period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot set for this ending period is also set. It may be configured to be different for each type, or it may be configured to be different for each set jackpot type for the opening period of the jackpot.

In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are different according to the set jackpot type. By setting the jackpot medium effect so as to straddle a plurality of jackpot games, how many times the jackpot was won while the player was performing one jackpot medium effect. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, when the next jackpot is won by the special symbol change of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot. And, even if the special symbol fluctuation period executed during the jackpot is different between the case where the next jackpot is won by the special symbol fluctuation of the third rotation, the opening period set for the jackpot, the interval period between rounds, By configuring the ending period to be different according to the set jackpot type, it is possible to execute the jackpot middle effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, returning to FIG. 83 (b), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 2. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), this jackpot medium effect 2 has a reserved ball number of "2" when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit medium production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is not included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 2 is set, the jackpot game effect (15R) indicating that the current jackpot is 15R when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed). The production) is executed. Then, the ending effect displayed during the ending period set at the end of the jackpot game is changed to the next jackpot (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) after the jackpot 1 is completed. Is executed continuously (extended) until is executed. Then, when the jackpot 2 is executed, the effect content is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

In this jackpot medium production 2, when the newly acquired reserved ball during the jackpot game contains the entry information corresponding to the hit, a plurality of jackpot games that are continuously executed are continuously executed. It is to produce to. In other words, the jackpot game production corresponding to the jackpot 1 is a normal jackpot game production (15R production), and it is continuous only by changing the content of the ending production based on the newly acquired ball entry information of the reserved ball during the jackpot game. It is possible to produce a plurality of jackpot games to be continuously executed.

With this configuration, the effect of continuously executing a plurality of jackpot gaming machines (continuous jackpot effect) can be set based on the reserved balls acquired during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot effect can be achieved. It can be made easier to execute, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, even if the normal jackpot game production is executed, the jackpot game can be performed while expecting the player to shift to the continuous jackpot production.

Here, the effect contents displayed between the two jackpots in the jackpot medium effect 2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (b) to 89 (b). FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing the end of the first jackpot and the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen in a state in which a jackpot of a special symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the ending display displayed during the first ending period of the jackpot, information for showing the number of rounds of the jackpot this time and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot is shown in the main display area Dm. (Acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbol changes start, the ending display is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 89 (a), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area Dm2 for the purpose, the running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of currently being executed and the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the confirmed number of rounds to be executed are big hits. It will continue to be displayed in the same way as. In addition, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a hold execution area Dn3, and a hold symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 89 (a), in the reserved symbol display area Dn4, the second reserved symbol from the left (the reserved symbol with 3 added to the circle mark that is variablely displayed one after another) is won as a big hit. Indicates the state of being.

Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbol with 3 in the circle stops), as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the jackpot continues in the main display area Dm (). A comment "The jackpot is still going on" is displayed to notify (that a new jackpot will be started), and a fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is displayed so as to indicate the number of rounds "10" of the second jackpot. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". Further, in the small display area Dn2, the combination "777" of the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Although the content of the effect executed in the jackpot medium effect 2 has been described above, the same effect may be used for the big hit medium effect 1. That is, in the above-mentioned jackpot medium production 1, since the production using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuous production, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot or during the ending period after the end of the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball including the winning ball entry information is acquired, it is difficult to execute the jackpot middle production so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 2, the jackpot medium effect can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84 (a), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 3 will be described. FIG. 84A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 3. As shown in FIG. 84A, the jackpot medium effect 3 has a number of reserved balls of "4" (a state in which a new reserved ball cannot be acquired during the jackpot game) when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed. ), And it is a big hit middle production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 3 is set, the next jackpot game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed) A jackpot game production (25R production) that also integrates the game contents of is executed.

This jackpot middle production 3 is a state in which a new reserved ball cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is continuously won at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is a production performed in. When the jackpot production 3 is executed, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the jackpot has been won in succession, which can give the player a sense of security and newly hold the jackpot during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the player to win the jackpot in succession because the above-mentioned jackpot middle effect 2 is executed in a state where the ball cannot be acquired.

As described above, in this control example, when a jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (in the hold memory), a jackpot to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. Multiple medium effects are prepared, and the number of special symbol reserved balls at the time when the previous big hit game is executed and the large hit medium effect to be executed based on the judgment result of the reserved ball entry information are set. doing.

Further, the plurality of jackpot productions have different timings for notifying the player that the jackpot has been won in succession. As a result, the jackpot game can be enjoyed to the end while expecting to win the jackpot in succession.

This control example corresponds to the jackpot of the special symbol during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the reserved memory number of the special symbol is vacant (a state in which the reserved symbol can be newly held and stored during the jackpot game). Even if the reserved symbol is stored on hold, it is stored on hold at the time when the jackpot game is executed because it is possible to execute the jackpot middle effect to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. Compared with the case where the jackpot medium effect is determined based on the information, the jackpot medium effect for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed can be easily executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the multiple jackpot productions, the number of rounds executed in the previous jackpot game can be partially notified to the player by dividing the number of rounds into multiple times, so that the jackpot production this time is one. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the production is performed in the jackpot game or the production performed across multiple jackpot games. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol change period after the jackpot game ends, the small display area Dn2 for displaying the change of the third symbol, the hold execution area Dn3, and the like during the normal special symbol change period, Although the configuration in which the reserved symbol display area Dn4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used, other configurations may be used. For example, a condition for executing the jackpot continuous effect during the special symbol fluctuation period is satisfied. If a means for determining whether or not the game is being played is provided and it is determined that the condition for executing the jackpot continuous effect is satisfied by that means, the variation display of the third symbol or the above-mentioned reserved symbol is performed even during the special symbol variation period. It is preferable to execute a process of not displaying the related display, or to execute a process of displaying the content in a mode (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the content.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first jackpot game and the start timing of the second jackpot game based on the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can be difficult to be done.

In addition, during the inter-round interval in the first jackpot game, a pseudo-ending display, a pseudo-variation display that fluctuates a pseudo-symbol that imitates the third symbol, and a pseudo-variation that stops the fluctuating pseudo-symbol with a combination corresponding to the jackpot A pseudo game execution means for executing a pseudo jackpot start display after the stop display and the pseudo stop display is provided, and the pseudo jackpot is executed so that a plurality of jackpots are executed while one jackpot game is being executed. It may be configured to perform the effect. With this configuration, the special symbol (this symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b when the first jackpot is won is the special symbol (this symbol) corresponding to the jackpot game of how many rounds. ) Can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the big hit medium effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, another example of the jackpot medium effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (b). FIG. 84B is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the jackpot medium effect 1. In this alternative example, the content of the additional effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the content shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the winning prize at the start of the big hit (winning information storage area 223a). The difference is that the presence or absence of winning information) is different.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning prize. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing the winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes "2"), and the 10R effect 1 In the jackpot continuous effect, an effect indicating that the 10R effect 2 is executed is executed using the total number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot 2.

By executing such an effect, one additional effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots (one additional effect is executed in a period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), since the effect for 10R is executed as the additional effect executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots, the 10R effect 1 and the 10R effect 2 are executed. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83 (a) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be shared.

Note that FIG. 83 (a) or FIG. 84 (b) shows an example of the additional effect, and the additional effect other than the above-exemplified content is also executed. Specifically, the additional effects include 5R effects using a period of 5 rounds, 10R effects using a period of 10 rounds, 7R effects using a period of 7 rounds, and 8 rounds. The 8R effect using the period is configured to be feasible.

By using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as the additional effects in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds executed during one big hit, and to the player. While predicting how long (up to how many rounds) this jackpot will continue, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the game state set at the end of the jackpot medium effect 1 executed corresponding to one or more jackpots, that is, the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) of the last jackpot executed corresponding to the jackpot medium effect 1. , Ordinary jackpot) may be configured to vary the additional effect to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot medium effect 1 is a probabilistic state. As an additional effect to be executed in the early stage of the big hit medium effect 1, it is easy to set an additional effect (for example, 10R effect) corresponding to a long number of rounds, or when the big hit medium effect 1 is completed. It may be configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) that is executed only when the set game state is a probabilistic state.

With this configuration, the additional effect to be executed allows the player to predict both the number of rounds executed during the jackpot and the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, and the effect of the effect. Can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In this control example, when the gaming state becomes a gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect (probability changing state or time saving medium effect (hereinafter referred to as high probability medium effect) is referred to. )) Is executed. The period during which this high-accuracy medium effect is executed is a period during which a predetermined effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, and based on the result of the battle effect, whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends. Is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-accuracy medium production (continuous production) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows a flow of the high-accuracy middle effect (continuous effect) executed when the game state is an advantageous state (probability change state or time-saving state), which is continuously executed until the jackpot is won. It is a timing chart which showed the production (continuous production). As shown in FIG. 90, the battle effect is repeatedly executed during the high-accuracy medium effect (continuous effect). The battle effect includes a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which an effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state (probability change state or time saving state) ends is executed in a period of one rotation of the special figure fluctuation. The effect for changing the display mode when the battle reach is executed is composed of the pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) which is executed in the period of a plurality of rotations of the special figure variation.

The details of the effect will be described later, but in battle reach, the effect (attack effect) in which the character of the player and the character of the opponent reduce each other's HP value (continuation value) is executed multiple times (three times), and the character of the player himself / herself When the HP value (continuation value) of is "0" (in the case of battle reach of the defeat pattern), the end condition of the advantageous state (winning the jackpot at the end of the advantageous state, or the time reduction in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set is set. It indicates that the number of times has been reached), and when the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent character becomes "0" (in the case of battle reach of the victory pattern), it indicates that the jackpot that the advantageous state continues has been won. If the HP values (continuation values) of each other do not become "0" (in the case of a battle reach of a draw pattern), it indicates that the high-accuracy middle production is continued.

Further, in the pre-battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set, and a plurality of special symbol fluctuations are performed based on the effect mode. The HP management used is performed.

FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic view showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is started as the high-accuracy medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle production is started, the pre-battle production, which is the first half part of the battle production, is first executed. In this pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent of the battle reach, which is the latter half part of the battle effect, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, the boy character Dm11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area Dm, and the opponent for selecting the opponent candidate for the battle reach. The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection units Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be opponents in battle reach, and one of the selection units is selected. Note that FIG. 91A shows a state in which the selection unit Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an HP display area Dm17 indicating a continuation value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four types of characters A to D is displayed. The HP display area Dm17 is formed of a display unit that indicates an HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display unit (Dm18) that indicates a numerical value. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to be variable (decreased) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle effect.

In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92 (a) is displayed next, the effect of reducing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the selection is displayed in the HP display area Dm17. A display (circle mark on the character A) is made to identify the HP display corresponding to the other character. As a result, the player can easily grasp what the HP value of the currently selected opponent character is.

Further, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of reducing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until the battle reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value of the player does not decrease, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play while playing. In addition, since the HP value of oneself (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle production, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uneasy that his / her own HP value decreases as a result of the effect being executed. can do.

The production mode of the pre-battle effect is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and an effect of displaying the own HP value and reducing the own HP value may be executed, or the own HP value or the opponent. You may perform an effect of increasing the HP value of. Also, in the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is reduced until it becomes "0", and the jackpot (probability change state after the jackpot ends, or the probability change state after the jackpot ends) without executing the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle production. , A jackpot that is given a time saving state) may be configured to be executed.

In FIG. 92A, since the attack (main attack effect) for reducing the HP by “200” was performed on the character ADm13, the display unit Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 is the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed as "800" according to the content of the effect.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92 (b), in addition to the effect of attacking by itself (character Dm11) (main attack effect), the cat character Dm20 appears and makes an additional attack (secondary attack effect). Is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92B, an attack that reduces the HP by "230" is performed against the character ADm13, and the display unit Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 is the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed in "770" according to the effect content of.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and if the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (character A is marked with a circle).

Here, a method of setting the HP value that decreases due to the attack effect will be briefly described. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) of the ball entry information stored on hold, the result of the battle effect and the rough effect content (HP value) are performed by the continuous value management means. It is configured so that the reduction value (100's place) and the main attack effect) are determined. Then, for the purpose of diversifying the types of effects for the effect contents (decreased value of HP value and main attack effect) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery result and the look-ahead result are obtained by the effect setting means. It is configured so that the detailed effect contents (HP value reduction value (10th place) and sub-attack effect) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value) by using the continuation value management means. It is configured.

Specifically, in FIG. 92A described above, an effect (main attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the effect setting means, and the continuation value (HP value) is set by the effect setting means. A display example is shown when the content that does not increase or decrease the value is set, and the main attack effect (attack effect of character Dm11) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200 is executed as a pre-battle effect. There is.

On the other hand, in FIG. 92 (b) described above, an effect (main attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the effect setting means, and the value of the continuation value (HP value) is set to 20 by the effect setting means. A display example is shown when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. In addition to the main attack effect (attack effect of character Dm11) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200, the opponent character A sub-attack effect (attack effect of cat character Dm20) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of ADm13 by 30 is executed, and a total effect that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 230 as a pre-battle effect. Is being executed.

With this configuration, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, it is possible to reduce the number of effects managed to continuously increase or decrease the continuous value (HP value) with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, when the opponent during the one pre-battle production is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continuously executed from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-accuracy medium production. A series of effects can be executed without generating it.

In addition, if the decrease in HP of multiple opponent candidates is biased during the pre-battle production, watch the production while expecting that the battle reach will be executed with the opponent with the lowest HP value as much as possible. be able to.

When the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is completed, the battle reach to battle with a specific opponent is executed next. If you win this battle reach (set your opponent's HP to "0"), you indicate that you have won a jackpot that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player, and you are defeated (your HP is "0"). In the case of (becomes), it indicates that the player has won the game when the game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, if the battle reach is executed at a timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, the game will be a draw (the HP of both the player and the opponent will not be "0"), and the high-accuracy middle production will be continued.

This battle reach is when a big hit is won during high accuracy (probability change, time reduction), or when a predetermined condition is met during high accuracy (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, or a battle. It is configured to be executed when the reach production lottery is won), and if the result of the battle reach is a draw, the production shifts to the pre-battle production again. In this case, all the HP values of the opponent character are set to the initial values. In other words, since the pre-battle effect is an effect that reduces the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period of not winning the special symbol during the probabilistic state continues for a long period of time, the pre-battle effect is in progress. In order to prevent the HP of the opponent character from becoming "0", it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect of reducing the HP of the opponent character (attack effect), which may reduce the effect of the pre-battle effect. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated in addition to the case where a special symbol is won, a "tie" is provided as a result of the battle reach, and when the battle reach is a "tie", the opponent character Since the HP value of is returned to the initial value and the pre-battle production is restarted, there is a problem that the effect of the pre-battle production is reduced by executing one pre-battle production for a long period of time. Can be solved. In addition, by providing a "tie" in the result of the battle reach, the possibility of a "tie" can be left even when a production with a low expectation is executed during the battle reach.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the battle reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (a) to 96 (b). First, FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the start of battle reach. Here, the contents of the battle reach production will be explained. In the battle reach of this control example, the attack of oneself or the opponent is executed a total of three times, and the effect of displaying the result according to the final HP value is executed. There are three types of attacks, "strong attack", "medium attack", and "weak attack", and the HP value to be reduced is set to be different for each type.

When the battle reach is started, the characters "Battle start" and the characters "First time" indicating the number of battles this time in the battle reach are displayed at the upper part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating the value of its own HP and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating the value of the other party's HP are displayed. The upper limit value "1000" is displayed on the HP gauge Dm21, and the value "500" reduced in the pre-battle effect is displayed on the HP gauge Dm22.

The accumulation gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. The accumulated value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is accumulated based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", the reversal effect is executed and the effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By making this reversal effect executable, it is possible to have expectations for a big hit until the end even if the opponent side performs a dominant effect during the battle reach where three battles are unfolded.

Then, a progress display area Dm24 for showing the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and the history of the attack effect during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (b), the display contents when the first attack during the battle reach is itself will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the main display area Dm, the effect that the own character (boy's character) Dm11 attacks (weakly attacks) the opponent's character Dm15 is executed, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 is ". It decreases from "500" to "300". Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "circle" indicating that the first battle was an attack of the player is displayed.

When the second battle effect is executed following the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (a). Here, in FIG. 94A, an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the second effect of the battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP value) of the own character Dm11 is “1000”. Is reduced from "" to "700", and the effect of accumulating half (50) of the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is displayed. Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an opponent's attack is displayed.

Next, when the production of the third battle (final battle) is executed, the production of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (b). Here, in FIG. 94 (b), as the third effect of the battle, an effect in which the own character (boy's character) Dm11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character Dm15 is executed in the main display area Dm, and the HP gauge The value of Dm22 is reduced from "300" to "0", and it is notified that the battle reach this time was a battle reach indicating that the player has won a jackpot in which a favorable gaming state is set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, "777" is displayed as a combination display of the third symbol to indicate that the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit.

In addition to the battle reach (winning pattern) shown in FIG. 94 (b), the battle reach in this control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94 (b), the effect shown in FIG. 95 (a) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (a), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the effect of the third battle. In the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (decreases to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuation value (HP value) of both the player and the opponent becoming 0. To do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), even if the final attack (third attack) of the battle reach is the opponent's attack, a draw pattern is provided in which the continuation value (HP value) of the player does not decrease to 0. So, until the end of the battle reach, the player can have expectations. In addition, in FIG. 95A, the pattern in which the opponent makes the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is defeated or the current battle reach is either defeated or drawn. The production that makes you think of a pattern is illustrated, but in addition to that, the pattern in which you make the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player wins this battle reach or An effect that makes you think of one of the draw patterns is also executed. In this case, the player can be reassured because he / she will not be defeated in this battle reach when the third attack is made.

When the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95 (b) is displayed instead of the effect of the third battle shown in FIG. 94 (b). In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (b), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third effect of the battle, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 is reduced to 0, and the accumulation gauge Dm23. The battle reach ends without the value of is accumulated up to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96A, even when the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, when the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), it is mainly. The character "Resurrection" is displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, the character Dm11 of the player stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96B, a resurrection effect of defeating the opponent character Dm15 is executed.

As described above, in the battle reach effect in this control example, the effect result changes depending on the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 in addition to the decrease of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent character Dm15. Because it is configured, you can expect big hits until the end of the battle reach.

Further, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle effect (effect mode) is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the reserved memory information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is configured to be variable.

Here, a display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d) show the HP display area Dm17 that is variably set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the hold storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. It is a figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97A is a schematic view showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic view showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 in a pattern in which the opponent characters are not replaced during the battle effect. Is. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the same opponent character (character ADm13) has a different continuation value (HP value) (4 stages of "700" to "1000"). It is displayed. When such an HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent of the pre-battle effect, and the attack executed by the player in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92 (a)). Therefore, an effect of reducing all HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is executed.

By using such a display mode, a plurality of HP values are reduced at one time, so that the effect to be executed can be made flashy. Further, even if the same character ADm13 is used, since the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADm13 having a low continuation value (HP value) is selected at the time of battle reach development. You can play the game while letting it play. Further, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for the jackpot for the same character ADm13. Therefore, for example, the jackpot expectation It is possible to reduce the types of image data for displaying a character as compared with the case where a different opponent character is set for each time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97B shows a display mode in which the display order of the characters A to D is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, when the degree of selection as an opponent character is configured to be different depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17 during the battle production, the opponent who is likely to be selected during the battle production. The character can be changed. Further, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic view showing a display mode in which an opponent character different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (c), in this display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is a special opponent character whose initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is lower than that of the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed selectably. With this configuration, the player can be expected to win the battle reach in this battle production.

Further, FIG. 97 (d) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced with respect to the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, the choices of the opponent character selected in the pre-battle production are reduced, so that the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character at the time of battle reach development is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production). It can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the hold storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. By configuring it to be variably set, the variation of the battle effect is increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced. For example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 suggests the future game result to the player. It may be configured to do so.

For example, when the above-mentioned special opponent character E is selected as the opponent of the battle reach in FIG. 97 (c), it is preferable to configure it so that the battle reach of the defeat pattern is not executed. As a result, in addition to the effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character in the pre-battle effect, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. Further, when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. 97 (a), the battle reach of the defeat pattern is performed during the current battle production period at the timing when the battle production is executed. Is not executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reserved memory information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect includes the ball entry information in which the battle reach of the victory pattern is executed, the battle reach of the victory pattern is selected. The display mode including the specific opponent character in which is executed may be displayed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be variably set based on the operation result for the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 is executed during the pre-battle effect, and the operation effect is performed. The display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be changed to the display mode described above in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d) based on the operation result of the above.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d), the length of the HP gauge is configured to be a constant length even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by "100", the decrease rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed according to the set continuation value (HP value). The HP gauge may be displayed with a length corresponding to the set continuous value (HP value). Further, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuous value (HP value) by the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is changed according to the length of the HP gauge. You may.

By configuring as described above, even if the battle production is repeatedly executed for the player, the production mode can be changed, and the player gets tired of the production content at an early stage. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle effect is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol when the battle effect is set (when the pre-battle effect is set). Is configured to be variably set, but the effect mode may be variably set using other conditions. For example, as a game state in which a battle effect can be executed, a first game state (for example, a probability change state) may be set. ) And the second game state (for example, the time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state at the time of setting the battle effect (when setting the pre-battle effect) is the first. The effect mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the player is in the 1-game state or the second game state, or the ball entry information held and stored at the time of the battle effect setting (when the pre-battle effect is set). Is determined, and as the determination result, the effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is ball entry information indicating that the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, a suggestion effect, which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This suggestion effect is a game in which a specific effect for showing a high degree of jackpot expectation is executed in the variation effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is a production to suggest to the person in advance, and is a production composed of a precursory production of the first half part and a countdown production of the second half part.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggestion effect is started, and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the precursor effect which is the first half part is completed. , Is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect which is the latter half part is started, and FIG. 99 shows the display screen at the time when the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is finished and the specific effect is started. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

As shown in FIG. 98A, when the suggestion effect is started, the precursor effect is executed in the sub-display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), the character Dc1 imitating a "car" is subjected to a dynamic effect of traveling from left to right, and the character Dc1 is displayed as the character "goal" at the arrival point Dc3. By arriving at, the production is executed so as to switch to the countdown production.

Then, as a movement route when the character Dc1 moves to the arrival point Dc3, either the first route Dc2a indicating a linear route or the second route Dc2b indicating a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98A, the second path Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering path is executed.

Here, a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, can be selected from a plurality of points. Since the period during which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the route of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the precursor period effect is executed. As a result, when the precursor effect is executed, the timing at which the countdown effect is started can be visually grasped.

In FIG. 98 (a), as the precursor effect, an effect suggesting the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used, but other effects may be used as the precursor effect, for example, the countdown effect is executed. You may use an effect that suggests to the player, an effect that suggests the period of the countdown effect, or an effect that suggests the type of the specific effect that is the target of the countdown effect. That is, it suffices as long as it is an effect of notifying in advance information about the effect to be executed in the future as a suggestion effect.

When the precursor effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the comment "countdown start" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and counts down. The character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. As a result, it is possible to specifically notify the player that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 98 (b), a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds is shown, but in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. With this configuration, during the precursory effect, which is the first half of the suggested effect, the countdown effect with a long countdown period is executed while predicting the timing when the countdown effect starts and the fluctuation pattern of this time. You can expect that.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (b) is completed, as shown in FIG. 99, the character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub display area Ds, and the main display is displayed. In the area Dm, an operation effect is executed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, a flow for setting a precursor effect and a countdown effect to be executed as a suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed to notify the player of the timing when the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the target specific effect is executed. (Refer to FIG. 98 (b)) is executed, and in the precursory effect executed in the first half part, an effect that directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect is executed is performed. (See FIG. 98 (a)) is executed.

Here, in the variable effect conventionally executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration was used in which it was executed for a predetermined period of time. If the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects executed in the variable effect (for example, an effect that suggests a higher hit expectation than the suggestion effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was applied to prevent the suggestion effect from being executed. Further, there is a problem that the suggestion effect cannot be executed for the specific effect executed at the timing when the period during which the suggestion effect is executed cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestion effect data having different predetermined predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases, and further, the processing when setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor of the first half part). The start timing of the production) can be set from multiple points.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without setting the execution period in advance. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set from a plurality of points, for example, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when a big hit is won). It is possible to set a longer period during which the suggestion effect is executed), or to change the start timing of the suggestion effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect.

FIG. 100A is a timing chart showing a flow of executing a suggestion effect in a variation effect in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (a), the timing at which the suggestion effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Is set to. Then, the countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is set so that the countdown effect (execution period 3 seconds) ends at the timing when the specific effect is executed (33 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, since this fluctuation is a case where a big hit is won, the timing at which the suggestion effect period can be set longer (the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect from among the plurality of start timings. Set as.

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100 (a), after the precursor effect (effect period 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is performed. ) Is executed. Then, a specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. If the change this time is not a big hit, the timing when the suggestion effect period is shortened (the timing 20 seconds after the start of the change) is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). ..

In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, the start timing of the suggestion effect is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The length of the suggestion effect period can be changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the player can be made aware of the length of the effect period. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, even when the length of the suggestion effect period is changed, the countdown effect period, which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect, that is, the period for executing the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect is , Since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the suggestion effect.

That is, when the length of the suggestion effect period is changed, only the period during which the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed is changed. This precursor effect directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is executed as described above, and even if the length of the effect period is changed, it is executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect. It is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the countdown effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (b), the flow of the suggestion effect executed in the variation effect B different from the above-mentioned variation effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 100B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the variable effect B.

The variation effect B shown in FIG. 100 (b) is different from the variation effect A described above, and is a variation effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be the target of the suggestion effect are set. The setting method of the variation effect executed in the variation effect B will be described focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned variation effect A. In the variation effect B, a timing at which the suggestion effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the variation is set, and a timing at which the specific effect can be executed 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variation is set.

In the variation effect B, as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation, a boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The jackpot expectation is set to be the same for these two specific effects, and the specific effect of the person corresponding to the set suggestion effect is executed.

In the variation effect shown in FIG. 100 (b), similarly to FIG. 100 (a) described above, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special symbol is used. When the lottery result is a big hit, the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and the "PUSH effect" executed 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is easily set as the specific effect. doing.

More specifically, in descending order of jackpot expectation, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect. A pattern that sets "PUSH effect" as a specific effect, a pattern that sets the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and a pattern that sets "cut-in effect" as a specific effect, a timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation Is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect is set according to the jackpot expectation in the order of the pattern in which the "cut-in effect" is set as the specific effect.

Further, in the variable effect B shown in FIG. 100 (b), the start timing (length of the countdown period) of the countdown effect is also variably configured according to the length of the set suggested effect period, which is the most. When an effect pattern with high jackpot expectation is set, the start timing of the countdown effect is set 7 seconds before the specific effect is executed, and immediately after the countdown effect is started, the subordinate of the third symbol display device 81. Countdown of display area Ds A countdown effect of displaying the character "7" in the display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98B) is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the suggestion effect straddling a plurality of variable effects can be executed. The flow of the suggestion effect executed across the plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect when the suggestion effect is set across the variation effect corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new hold memory is acquired during the execution of the variation effect, the information (hit / fail determination result, variation pattern, etc.) included in the newly acquired hold memory is determined in advance. (Look-ahead) is performed, and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variation effect that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the corresponding hold memory.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect C (variation time 30 seconds) is started in the state where there is no hold memory, and at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is 15 seconds), the first When a ball enters the 1st entry port 64 or the 2nd entry opening 140 and acquires a new hold memory (hold memory corresponding to the next variation effect), based on the information contained in the new hold memory. , Determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variation effect is a variation effect that executes the suggestion effect, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current variation effect is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) or more. In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing at which the new hold memory is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the variation effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variation effect is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and the present The start timing of the suggestion effect is set at the predetermined timing (the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation) in the fluctuation effect of, and in the next variation effect (variation effect D), the specific effect (specification) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation is performed. A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestion effect and the end timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variation effects (variation effects C and D), the variation effect C When 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the variation effect C ends. Then, the precursor effect is continuously executed during the period (2 seconds) from the fluctuation start timing of the variation effect D to the execution of the countdown effect, and after that (2 seconds after the start of the variation of the variation effect D), the countdown effect is performed. After being executed for 3 seconds, the privilege effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since the suggestive effect can be executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the early stage of the variable effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the variation). ) Can also be executed as a suggestion effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom of suggestion production can be further increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 101, when the timing of acquiring the new hold memory is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) of the fluctuation effect C (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101). In the case), since it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestion effect for the specific effect C of the variable effect D, the suggestion effect for the specific effect C is not set.

In the above-mentioned example, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect for the specific effect to be executed in the variable effect from the next time onward, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing of acquiring the new hold memory). Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the timing of additional winning (timing of acquiring a new hold memory), the timing of executing the specific effect in the next and subsequent variable effects is set. It may be configured to be variable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set a suggestion effect to be executed across a plurality of variable effects, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestion effect executed across a plurality of variation effects, the flow of the suggestion effect when the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied during the execution of the variation effect has been described. A suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of variable effects may be executed under other conditions.

For example, when the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied and the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied, any timing in the variation effect of the next time is set as the execution timing of the specific effect, and the present It may be configured to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect at any timing of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the content of the effect to be executed in the currently executing variable effect and the content of the effect to be executed during the next variable effect are determined, and the determination result and the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the next variable effect are drawn. It is preferable to set the start timing of the suggestion effect based on the result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect in which the currently changing variation effect and the next variation effect are set as a series of effects is set, a suggestion effect is provided for the next variation effect. If it is set to execute a special effect at the end timing of the variable effect currently changing without executing it, that is, at the start timing of the next variable effect, the suggestive effect is performed within the next variable effect period. If there is no factor prohibiting the setting of the suggestion effect in the currently fluctuating fluctuation effect and the next variation effect, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating variation effect or the next variation The start timing of the suggestion effect can be set to any of the period of the effect.

In addition, when the start condition of the next (one after another) variation effect is satisfied, it is determined whether the variation effect corresponds to the jackpot winning, and the start timing of the suggestion effect is being executed based on the determination result. It may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect of the above or the execution period of the next (next) variable effect. As a result, it is possible to easily set a suggestion effect period that is longer than one variable effect period.

In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestion effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period in which the common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period in which the countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of the plurality of specific effects. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestion effect has been executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect may be executed while the precursor effect is being executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, an expectation degree suggestion effect, which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This expectation suggestion effect is an expectation display effect that displays a plurality of expectation display modes that can notify the jackpot winning expectation stepwise, and changes the display mode of the expectation display mode (big hit winning expectation). This is an effect composed of an effect of increasing the degree of expectation for (variable to a high display mode).

First, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), an expectation degree display mode used for the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

The expectation degree display mode Dk1 shows the jackpot expectation degree by using the execution display which shows the information corresponding to the variation effect during execution, and in FIG. 102A, the jackpot expectation degree is shown by “LV2”. Is displayed. Although the details of the expectation display mode Dk1 will be described later, the expectation display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. To.

The expectation degree display mode Dk2 shows the jackpot expectation using characters appearing during the variation effect, and in FIG. 102 (a), “LV1” indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed. The expectation degree display mode Dk2 will be displayed 24 seconds after the start of the variation effect, although the details will be described later.

The expectation degree display mode Dk3 shows the jackpot expectation degree by using the dialogue display showing the content of the fluctuation effect and the progress information, and in FIG. 102 (a), the jackpot expectation degree “LV2” is displayed. Has been done. The expectation degree display mode Dk3 will be displayed 36 seconds after the start of the variation effect, although the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (a), each expectation degree display mode is shown by the LV display which shows the jackpot expectation degree stepwise, but it may be the mode which can notify the jackpot expectation degree stepwise, for example, corresponding to the jackpot expectation degree It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, the output volume and the magnitude of the amount of light are changed stepwise. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the effect mode showing the growth process or the transformation process is changed stepwise toward the final mode.

Further, regarding the in-execution display displayed in the expectation degree display mode Dk1, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds is configured to be continuously displayed. May be good. As a result, when an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol (reserved symbol notice effect) is executed during the display of the reserved symbol, the changed display mode of the reserved symbol can be continuously used as the running display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

When the expectation suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation display effect in which the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. 102A are displayed, the display modes of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are variable (increased). ) Is executed (see FIG. 102 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the expectation degree increase (additional) effect is executed, first, as the expectation degree setting effect, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (additional) values are displayed. The aspect (roulette) Dk4 is rotated and displayed, and when the roulette Dk4 is stopped, the ascending (additional) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow Dk5 is set.

This increase (additional) value indicates a variable amount that changes the display mode of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (additional) value. Is to execute an effect in which the jackpot expectation is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is stepwise one higher than the currently displayed display mode for any one of the expectation display modes. Shown.

With this configuration, by executing the expectation increase (additional) effect, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation display mode displayed during the current expectation suggestion effect. .. Therefore, the player enjoys the effect of increasing the expectation (additional) while expecting that the expectation of the expectation display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the high jackpot expectation is already displayed is further variable (increased). Can be done.

In this control example, as the increase (additional) value set in the expectation increase (additional) effect, each expectation degree that is variable (increased) while the current expectation degree increase (additional) effect is being executed. It is configured so that a value obtained by adding up the variable amounts of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as the increase (additional) value, whether the display mode of one expectation display mode is variable by three steps or the display mode of each of the three expectation display modes is variable by one step. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the production result of the expectation suggestion effect at an early stage, and to enhance the effect.

next. The content of the effect when "3UP" is set as the increase (additional) value will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). FIG. 103 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the display mode of each expectation display mode is variably (raised) using the set rise (additional) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103 (a), "3UP" is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation display mode Dk1 is variable from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation display mode Dk2 is variable from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation display mode Dk3 The display mode of is variable from "LV2" to "LV3".

Note that FIG. 103 (a) described above illustrates a pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are changed at the same time, but the display modes of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, among the increase (addition) values set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the increase (addition) obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the variable amount in which the display mode of any of the expectation display modes is changed. ) The value is displayed on the display screen as a residual increase (addition). With this configuration, it is possible to specifically predict the effect result based on the residual rise (additional) value displayed on the display screen and the expected degree display mode in which the display mode is not variable. The effect can be enhanced. Further, for the same expectation degree display mode, the expectation degree increase (additional) effect may be executed so as to change the display mode a plurality of times at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

Further, in the present control example, each of the plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variation effect is continuously displayed, so that the display is as shown in FIG. 103 (a). Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period during which each expectation display mode Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at the same time, and among the display timings of the plurality of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. , At least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Further, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103 (b)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the comment "Raise the level of the boy" suggesting the target expectation display mode is displayed above the main display area Dm. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what the expectation display mode that is the target of the expectation suggestion effect this time is, and enjoy the game while predicting the progress of the effect in the future. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the expectation degree display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the expectation degree display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one fluctuation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), the expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that stepwise indicate the expectation degree of the jackpot winning are displayed at different timings. Specifically, the expected degree display mode Dk1 (expected degree 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the expected degree display mode Dk2 (expected degree 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the expected degree display is performed. Aspect Dk3 (expected degree 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) for increasing (adding) the display modes of each expectation display mode Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. .. Here, the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is configured so that the expectation degree display mode for which the expectation degree is increased differs depending on the display (execution) timing. It is configured so that the expectation degree display mode displayed after the degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed is targeted.

Specifically, when the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are targeted, and the expectation rises 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. When the effect (expectation addition display) is displayed, the expectation display mode Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted, and when the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is displayed 29 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the expectation degree is displayed. An effect targeting only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the production contents of the expectation increase effect, which is the same effect mode, different only by making the display timing (execution timing) different. In addition, since the expectation increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation notified by the expectation increase effect increases the expectation of which expectation display mode. You can play the game while expecting.

In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is the expectation display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the above-mentioned expectation degree display mode may be targeted. May be targeted as a combination of. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to predict which expectation display mode is variable (whether the expectation is increased) due to the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). , The effect can be enhanced.

Further, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display), at least one of a plurality of expectation display modes can be selected by the player, and the expectation selected by the selection means. The target determination means for determining whether the degree display mode is a target whose display mode is changed by the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display), and the expectation degree display mode selected by the selection means are the expectation degree increase effect ( When the target discriminating means determines that the display mode is variable by the expectation addition display), a variable control means that changes the display mode by the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is provided. Is also good. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player participation type production, and it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In this case, for example, the suggestion notification suggesting the expectation display mode that is the target of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is sent in a period before the period in which the player selects the expectation display mode by the selection means. It is advisable to provide a suggestion notification means to be executed. As a result, the target range to be selected by the selection means can be limited to the player, and the probability that the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is executed can be increased.

In addition, when the target determination means determines that the expectation display mode selected by the selection means is not a target whose display mode is variable by the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). It is preferable to provide an effect switching means for executing a different effect using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). As a result, the rising (additional) value already displayed on the display screen can be digested, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

The different effects described above include, for example, an effect for notifying the player of the contents of the winning information stored on hold in advance, and a value accumulated by the player for obtaining a privilege (for example, a game level and experience). It may be an effect that is advantageous to the player, such as an effect for increasing the value), or it is disadvantageous to the player, such as an effect that changes the effect mode so that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode is lowered (expectation level lowering effect). It may be directed.

In addition, a means is provided so as to change the display mode of the effect switched by the effect switching means in correspondence with the increase (additional) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). Is also good. Further, when the player does not select the expectation degree increase mode by the selection means, the expectation degree display mode which is not the target may be automatically selected, or the target expectation degree display mode may be selected. May be configured to be automatically selected. If the target expectation display mode is automatically selected, it is configured so that the player is more advantageous in selecting the non-target expectation display mode by the selection means. Then it is good. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the expectation degree display mode by the selection means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. First, the details of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type (big hit symbol) used for selection. Initial value setting of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the winning of the second ball 140. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in this control example, up to four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140. For this reason, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is special. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball wins in any of the second entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or Various settings and control processes for variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not possible, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, and the prize is won. If the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is stored in the storage area 203b. Further, when the corresponding number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired and only the prize balls (3 prize balls in this embodiment) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140, but the number is not limited to this and is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls may be different between the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140, or the upper limit value may not be provided. Further, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 140 so that only one of the reserved balls can be stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 238 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 238) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Is determined to be "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "5 to 9" in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. If it is within the range of "5-9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 239, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are five values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "5 to 9" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 239, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1 / 47.8".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 113. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, any one of the big hits A to K is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, the details of the first type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107, in the first hit type selection table 202c, the jackpot types to be selected are defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". "Big hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the game state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, "big hit A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved in a special symbol lottery, "big hit A" Is selected at 10%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 79" in association with "big hit B". .. This "big hit B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is less than that of the "big hit A", but the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Is. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 60 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved in a special symbol lottery, "big hit B" Is selected at 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 114" in association with "big hit C". This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the big hit is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved in a special symbol lottery, "big hit C" Is selected at 17.5%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "115 to 164" in association with "big hit D". .. This "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit D" is selected, so if a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery, "big hit D" Is selected at 25%.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "165 to 199" in association with "big hit E". .. This "big hit E" is a normal state as a game state after the end of the big hit when the number of rounds is 5 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability state and not a time saving state (when it is a normal state). Is set, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 are random values for which "big hit E" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved in a special symbol lottery, "big hit E" Is selected at 17.5%.

Next, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2), as in the case of the above-mentioned special diagram 2, the "big hit F" is based on the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202c. "-" Big hit K "is selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. The ratio of the jackpot (“big hit F”) having 15 rounds is set to be higher than the (first hit type) (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, the jackpot that allows the player to obtain a large number of balls in one jackpot is higher when the jackpot is won in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. The degree of advantage of the player can be different between the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2.

On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. May be selected. Specifically, when "Big hit I" to "Big hit K" are selected, 2 rounds, which is less than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of Special Figure 1, are selected. Set.

In addition, when "Big hit H", "Big hit J", and "Big hit K", which are the big hit types to which the time saving state is given, are selected as the game state after the big hit ends, the corresponding symbol type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times (time reduction number of times) (100 times) set when the time reduction state is given as the game state after the jackpot ends ( 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed and the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 2 are set after the jackpot game is completed. By making the game states different, it is possible to complicate the game and prevent the player from being constantly given an excessive privilege.

Furthermore, since the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different based on the game state at the time when the jackpot is won, the game state set is conscious of the game state aiming at the jackpot of the special symbol. While playing a game. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state set after the jackpot ends is determined depending on whether the time is shortened or the normal state. Unlike this, a gaming state is set that is more advantageous to the player when the time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting to win a big hit of a special symbol during a specific period (during a short time).

In this control example, the rate at which the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same between the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 2. The first type selection table 202c is defined as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio at which the high probability state is set may be different. In addition, by selecting the jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing the ball through the specific area during the jackpot, a probability change state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine to be played, the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2 are the passage of the ball to the specific area described above. It may be configured to have different ease of use. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot.

Further, as a method of differentiating the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) capable of winning a ball during the jackpot game are provided and executed. The variable winning device 65 that allows the ball to win during the jackpot game may be configured differently depending on the jackpot. In this case, the ease of winning a ball to a plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins, and the end condition (number of balls and time limit) for ending one opening operation. It is good to make them different. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 113. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 108 and 109). A plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the gaming state are set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and fluctuation pattern tables are set for each of them according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the ball is either left or right. It is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the ordinary symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202b, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b).

FIG. 106 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202b. In this second symbol per random number table 202b, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 6". There is. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 2, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". ..

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 140a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 140. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the state of the ordinary symbol (low probability or high probability) at the time of lottery (at the time of winning determination) of the ordinary symbol. ), The fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is determined, and it is given when the normal symbol is won according to the state of the normal symbol (low probability or high probability) at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. The content of the privilege, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a is determined.

That is, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started during the high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state), the short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and it is normal during the short fluctuation. When the state of the symbol shifts to the low probability state (when the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state), even if the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed after the end of the short fluctuation, the electric accessory 140a is a normal symbol. The opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") is executed during the low probability (in the normal state) of.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol are executed separately and independently, and is based on the game state that can be changed depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lottery. When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the privilege content at the time of winning are determined, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the privilege content at the time of winning the normal symbol is determined. Can be determined based on the gaming state when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), so that the operation content of the normal symbol and the set gaming state may differ. It can be suppressed from occurring.

The fluctuation control of the normal symbol is not limited to the content of the present control example described above, and other controls may be used as a matter of course. For example, the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time are based on the game state at the time of lottery of the normal symbol. The privilege content (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, only when the normal symbol is drawn and when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state), and the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is obtained. You may set a privilege (for example, "1 second x 2 times") in which (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) is advantageous to the player, or when the normal symbol is drawn and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Only when both (when the electric accessory 140a is open) are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds"). × 1 time ”) may be set.

Further, it may be configured to switch and execute the plurality of setting methods described above. For example, during the probability change state, which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the combination that is most advantageous to the player (at the time of lottery of the normal symbol). And when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), the combination is set so that the player is given a privilege in all cases except when the normal symbol is in the low probability state (normal state). , During the time saving state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol, the combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the probability change state (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened) is the high probability state of the normal symbol). In this case, a combination in which a player is given an advantageous privilege) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). As shown in FIG. 105A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a random number table 202b per second, and a type selection table 202c per first as part of the fixed value data described above. , The variation pattern selection table 202d, the jackpot transition setting table 202e, and the state transition table 202f are stored at least.

As described above, the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (a)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. The second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 106 (b)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored as described above. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and as described above, the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot. It is specified in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

FIG. 108 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example is the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won regardless of the gaming state. , The game state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), and the deviation pattern table 202d2 used to select the variation pattern when the deviation is won. And, in the game state (probability change state or time saving state) other than the normal state, the deviation pattern (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern when the loss is won, and the lottery of the special symbol. It is composed of a special variation pattern table 202d4 used for selecting a variation pattern when a special condition is satisfied regardless of the result.

First, the details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (b). As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" in association with various normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and is defined as "50 to 179". Various super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated with the range of, and various special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198". ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol is won as a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the fluctuation patterns (variation time) selected in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 are 60 seconds (selection ratio is about 55%) and 30 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection ratio is about 20%), and it is stipulated that the selection is facilitated. This is related to the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol, which will be described later, is out of order, and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. By the ratio and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

In this control example, the variable pattern table 202d1 for jackpots is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and there are cases where the jackpot type indicates a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot. It is also possible to use different fluctuation pattern tables depending on the type of jackpot that indicates. In this case, for example, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won than in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. It is good to configure it so that it is easy to do. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won in a short variation time, even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (c), the details of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (c), in the deviation pattern table 202d2, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern when the stop type is "complete deviation" and "common reach" are shown. Is specified in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the stop type is "completely off", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the fluctuation time is a short deviation of 7 seconds. It is defined in association with each other, and a long deviation of 10 seconds is specified in association with the range of "99 to 198". When "completely off" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

Further, the stop type is "common to reach", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with various normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and is defined in the range of "149 to 197". Various super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and various special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, the details of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (d). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation and the gaming state is the probability variation state (time saving state). In the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, as in the above-mentioned deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete deviation" and "common reach". The range and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the stop type is "completely off", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", and the fluctuation time is an ultra-short deviation of 3 seconds. Is specified in association with each other, and a short deviation of 5 seconds is specified in association with the range of "191 to 198".

Further, the stop type is "common to reach", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190" in association with various normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the range is "191 to 198". Various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are specified in association with each other. That is, when the game state is the probability change state (time saving state), the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. Therefore, when the game state is the probability change state (time reduction state) and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of 90 seconds is selected, it is only when the jackpot of the special symbol is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a privilege effect to congratulate the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by being notified of the deviation of the special symbol after the long-time fluctuation pattern is executed during the probabilistic state (time saving state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Can be done.

As described above, when the probability change state (time saving state) is set as the game state and the deviation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the game state and the deviation state (normal). ) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d2 is used, the lottery of the special symbol in the probability variation state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is performed. It can be done efficiently. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the probabilistic state (time saving state) is set as the game state, the stop type reaches when the special symbol comes off, compared to the case where the normal state is set. It is set so that the rate of deviation is low. Therefore, while the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (time saving state), the frequency of occurrence of reach loss is reduced (because it is difficult to execute the out-of-reach fluctuation with a long fluctuation time), so that the probabilistic state is advantageous to the player ( The lottery of special symbols can be performed more efficiently during the time saving state).

Next, the details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. The special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for four rotations of the special figure variation when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes a probability variation state or a time saving state, and is a continuous jackpot effect described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation (see FIG. 89 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 109, in the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4, the fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special symbol) after the jackpot ends, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation time is an ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Short hit) is specified.

In the 4th special symbol change after the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, an ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a win, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as an ultra-short hit with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time is 32 in the range of "180 to 198". A special hit of .5 seconds is specified.

With this configuration, when the game state after the end of the big hit is a probability change state or a time saving state, it is possible to immediately execute the fluctuation for four rotations of the special symbol. As a result, when a series of jackpot effects are executed using a plurality of jackpot games as in the continuous jackpot effect described above, the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed between the jackpot games can be shortened, and the effect can be shortened. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in this control example, in the state in which the probability change state or the time reduction state is set as the game state (during the consecutive villa mode), the probability change state or the time reduction state is set again after the jackpot ends. When a winner is won, the variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. With this configuration, the special symbol fluctuation time for a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the end of the jackpot can be shortened only in the state where the probability change state (time saving state) is continuously executed.

As a result, for example, when the normal state is set as the game state and the jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends is won, that is, the jackpot ends. Later, in a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 1 exists and the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 does not exist, so that the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 or the deviation (probability variation) The fluctuation pattern is set with reference to the fluctuation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the probability change state (time saving state) is set and the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set is won after the jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends. In a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 exists and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern itself is set to the ultra-short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Further, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202d4 of FIG. 109, in this control example, the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit is a part (about 10%) of the case where the player wins the fourth rotation after the jackpot ends. (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in a state where the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4, what is a series of jackpot effects (continuous jackpot effects) that have continued from the previous jackpot game? Separately, it is possible to perform a special production to congratulate the winning of the jackpot in a row. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

In this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the special hit variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in a part of the fourth variation after the end of the jackpot, but this is limited to this. The special hit variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even when the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a part of the 1st to 3rd times. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the variation pattern (for example, the variation time of 10 seconds) in which the variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set is selected. May be good. With this configuration, if the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot reaches 4 times and the fluctuation is executed for 0.5 seconds or more, the player can expect the jackpot to be won. Therefore, it is possible to play a game that is conscious of the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Next, the details of the jackpot migration setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 110. The jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining the game state set after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c. , The state transition status (state transition 1 to state transition 9) is defined in association with the game state at the time when the jackpot is won.

The jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1213), and the selected state transition status is selected. Therefore, the game state is set according to the specified contents specified in the state transition table 202f, which will be described later.

Specifically explaining the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202e, the jackpot type is one of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit H". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or " In the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the status transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the game state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later, and the "state transition" is set. When "2" is set, the gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

Next, when the jackpot type is "big hit C" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 3" is set as the status transition status, and "probability change state (high)" is set. In the case of "probability time reduction" (ST2) "or" time reduction state (low probability time reduction) (ST3) "," state transition 4 "is set as the status transition status, and the jackpot type is" jackpot E ". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or "time reduction state". (With low probability time reduction) (ST3) "," state transition 4 "is set as the state transition status.

Further, when the jackpot type is "big hit H" or "big hit J" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the status transition status, and "state transition 6" is set. In the case of "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or "time reduction state (with low probability time reduction) (ST3)", "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "big hit K". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)", Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the status transition status.

When any of "state transition 3" to "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status, of the state transition 3 table 202f3 to the state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later. , The game state is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding table.

Here, the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111 (a). The state transition table 202f is a table used for shifting state statuses such as a game state and a fluctuation pattern table based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is a specified number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It shifts the state status based on the value of. This state transition table 202f is referred to when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), and when the specified number of times counter 203j is acquired (S1214). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S409: Yes), it is referred to for setting the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111A, the state transition table 202f in the first control example is the state transition status (“state transition 1” to “state transition 9”) set by using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) Corresponding to the state transition table (“state transition 1 table 202f1” to “state transition 9 table 202f9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and the state status "ST2 (probability change state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. ) ”Is stipulated. That is, in the state where the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (the state in which "state transition 1" is set), the probability change state is continuously set until the next big hit is won.

Next, the details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (c). The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, the state status "ST2a (probability change state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j "ST2 (probability change state)" is defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST2a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2a" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period in a state where the same gaming state (probability variation state) is continuously set. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110.

FIG. 111 (d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202f3, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111 (e) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202f4, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the state status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

FIG. 111 (f) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 5 table 202f5, the state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, the normal state is set without setting the game state (probability change state, time saving state) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 112A is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202f7, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the state status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

FIG. 112 (c) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202f8, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112 (d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and the state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the state status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

As described above, in this first control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot are based on. , The game state set after the jackpot ends and the variation pattern table used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot end can be made different. As a result, the content of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the period for selecting the fluctuation pattern using the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is set to 1 to 4 rotations of the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example. Instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the jackpot ends, the special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used at the 11th to 14th rotations after the jackpot ends. In this configuration, the state transition table is set to the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j and "4" as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. The set status status "ST3a (time saving state)", the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and "0" are set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. It is preferable to configure so that the above-mentioned "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. With this configuration, the variation pattern of the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big hit can be selected by using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set starting from the end of the jackpot and the number of fluctuations (specified number of times) of the special symbol in which the state status continues are set in association with each other. The game specifications can be easily set and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, even when the game specifications are changed, the contents of the state transition table may be changed, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

Further, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state (when ST1 is set as the state status), "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and it is always set. The same fluctuation pattern table (big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or off (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2) is configured to be referred to, but a fluctuation pattern table that can be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is provided. A plurality of them may be provided so as to refer to different fluctuation pattern tables according to the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state. (When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set to "10" in correspondence with the state status ST1.

Then, when the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than "0" in the state where the state status ST1 is set, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation (normal) pattern table. With this configuration, it is possible to select a variation pattern different from the usual one immediately after the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, so that the player can have a game state that is advantageous to the player. It can make you think that it is still going on.

In the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the period for referring to the special variation pattern table is output from the effect mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226. It is preferable to configure the sound mode and the light emitting mode output from the lamp display device 227 to be a special mode corresponding to the period. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a more special feeling to the player. Further, even if a jackpot is won during the period in which the special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special effect mode different from the effect during the normal jackpot. As a result, the player can feel that he / she has won the jackpot during a special period, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this first control example, a state transition table is provided corresponding to each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. With this configuration, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which the fluctuation pattern table referred to by changing the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is used, but the state status is used for other elements. May be made variable. For example, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is "40" while referring to the state transition 6 table 202f6, the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but a small amount of privilege. When a lottery result (so-called small hit) that can give (a privilege to open the variable winning device 65 for a short period (for example, 3 seconds)) is won, the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the specified number counter 203j is changed. Is set to "4", the status status ST3b is set, and when the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated to after a small hit Refer to. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. With this configuration, it is possible to select a dedicated fluctuation pattern only for a predetermined period after winning a small hit (the period until the special symbol changes four times).

When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" while the state status ST3b is set, the state status ST3 is configured to be set again, and the state status ST3b is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. By configuring to set "35", which is subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period during which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 50 times) is set. Without changing, it is possible to select and execute a dedicated fluctuation pattern for a predetermined period (the period until the special symbol changes four times) based on the small hits won during the time saving state.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is subtracted when the special symbol is changed, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned small hit as the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j may be subtracted based on the number of times the small hit is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result) instead of the variation number of the special symbol, the time is shortened. Since the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105B is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, state status storage area 203i, specified number of times counter 203j, and other memory area 203z. have.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. The values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 or CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, the original special symbol is used. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second ball entry port 140 is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of No. 1 into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting winning prize) (in the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display to be performed up to 4 times. The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entry port 140 (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81). ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) up to 4 times. The value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the ball enters the second entry port 140 and is special. Every time the number of reserved balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127 and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is a hold ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S803: No in FIG. 133).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and is set to on each time the end timing of "big hit A, B, D, F, G, I" is reached (big hit control process (see FIG. 137). ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag 203g is off, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In this control example, while the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is also set. Therefore, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the probability variation flag 203 g and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h are referred to to determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state. Specifically, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203g is on (if the time saving state or the probability change state), it is determined to be the time saving state of the normal symbol. A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on a random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off (neither the time saving state nor the probability change state), the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability time. A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is set to 0, the main control device 110 wins the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the jackpot, and in the case of "big hit H, J", at the end of the jackpot. “50” is set as the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h, and in the case of “big hit K”, “25” is set as the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h at the end of the big hit.

When the jackpot type is "big hit E", the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the value at the time of winning the jackpot is set. If the gaming state is a time saving state (with low probability time saving) or a probability variation state (with high probability time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won is the normal state (with high probability time saving). If there is no low probability time reduction), the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is not set.

After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Further, even if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more, if the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 in FIG. 127).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g described later is off, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing information on the current state status (ST) set by the state transition table 202f. In this state status storage area 203i, when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, the acquired status status is displayed at the end of the jackpot. It is stored, and then, in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the specified number counter 203j, which is subtracted each time the special symbol changes, becomes 0 (S409: Yes), it is newly set. Status Status is stored.

The specified number-of-times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached the specified number of times. The specified number of times counter 203j corresponds to the acquired specified number of times when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and then, in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), the value is subtracted each time the special symbol changes (S407). When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202f.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119. FIG. 114A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the ROM 222 includes a variation pattern table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a jackpot medium effect selection table 222c, an additional number selection table 222d, and a continuous effect mode selection table 222e. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation degree selection table 222i, and an expectation degree effect selection table 222j.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the mode of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It's a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The hold rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting a hold rank based on the hold status of the special symbol, and the effect of the jackpot is determined based on the selected hold rank. Here, the details of the hold rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b).

FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), does the hold rank selection table 222b have the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol) and the winning information indicating the jackpot in the reserved balls of the special symbol 2? The hold rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. With this configuration, the effect executed during the jackpot can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) executed after the jackpot ends.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved sphere of the special symbol 1 and the reserved sphere of the special symbol 2 are present, the process of preferentially digesting the reserved sphere of the special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ). That is, the timing at which the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is digested is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, it is based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that preferentially fluctuates after the end of the jackpot (the reserved ball whose fluctuation order is fixed after the end of the jackpot) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The hold rank is selected so that the jackpot effect can be executed based on the change result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends.

When both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the reserved balls are held in the order in which they are reserved (the order in which the balls are entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140). If the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration that digests (so-called winning order digestion), not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, but the total number of reserved balls and the predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) in the order of digestion. It may be configured to select the hold rank as the target. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends.

When the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b are specifically described with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "1 to 3", and a hit is shown in the reserved balls. If there is winning information, the hold rank "3" is selected, and if there is no winning information indicating a win, the hold rank "2" is selected.

If the number of reserved special symbols (special symbol 2) is "4" and there is "winning information" indicating winning, the holding rank "4" is selected and there is no winning information indicating winning. In that case, the hold rank "1" is selected. When the number of reserved special symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

The hold rank selected with reference to the hold rank selection table 222b is referred to in the jackpot medium effect selection table 222c described later. Next, the jackpot medium effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (c). The jackpot middle effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting an effect to be executed during the jackpot, and receives an opening command in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3301: Yes), and the jackpot medium effect. It is referred to when the setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed (S3406).

In the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c, the jackpot middle effect is defined in association with the hold rank selected in the hold rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, a "normal hit effect" is defined in the range in which the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 99". This "normal hit effect" is an effect that is completed during one jackpot game (see FIG. 83 (b)), and an effect corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot to be executed is executed.

In the range where the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "100 to 149", "additional effect" is defined. As described above in FIG. 83A, this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one big hit (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, first. 5 rounds are displayed), and as the jackpot game progresses, the remaining number of rounds (the number of undisplayed rounds) is displayed.

When the "additional effect" is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds of the jackpot is currently being executed, and the effect during the jackpot game can be watched. .. Further, in the "additional effect" of the first control example, when a plurality of jackpots are won in a short period of time (the winning information (pending symbol) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot includes the next jackpot). In the case), the number of rounds of the next jackpot is added to the number of rounds of the previous jackpot, so that the game is executed across a plurality of jackpots.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the jackpot has been won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while enjoying how many rounds are displayed in total by the "additional effect".

Further, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed by one big hit can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed by a plurality of big hits can be combined and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots won while one "additional effect" is being executed and the number of rounds executed in each jackpot. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one jackpot is 15, the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change state is always set as the game state after the jackpot ends, won the jackpot of 15 rounds. It is possible to make it difficult to understand and to play a game while predicting which game state will be set after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when an effect suggesting a game state set after the end of the jackpot is used as the effect executed during the jackpot, it is executed during one jackpot before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game state set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Next, in the range where the hold rank is "2" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", the "normal hit effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is defined. In the range of "50 to 149", "additional effect" is defined. "Normal hit effect" is defined in the range where the hold rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "50 to". In the range of "99", "additional effect" is defined, and in the range where the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "100 to 149", "continuous hit effect" is defined.

As described above in FIG. 84, this "continuous hit effect" is an effect of notifying the player that a plurality of jackpots have been won when the previous (first) jackpot game is started. (See FIG. 84). The "continuous hit effect" executed here is, for example, a total value (for example, 25) of the number of rounds of the first big hit (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big hit (for example, 10 rounds). The effect of notifying when one jackpot game is started (the first round of the first jackpot is started) is executed.

By executing the "continuous hit effect" in this way, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that a plurality of jackpots have been won, and the jackpot game can be performed with peace of mind while giving the player a sense of superiority. Can be made.

In the range where the hold rank is "4" and the value of the first production counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", "normal production" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Direction for continuous hits" is stipulated.

As described above, in this control example, a different effect (effect during jackpot) is executed during the jackpot based on the selected hold rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the production performed during the jackpot.

Further, depending on the selected jackpot medium effect, the timing of notifying the player that the next jackpot is included in the hold is different. Therefore, for example, at the timing when the previous jackpot game is completed, the next jackpot game is completed. Compared to a pachinko machine that notifies the presence or absence of a pending symbol (presence or absence of a holding villa) that wins a jackpot, the next jackpot winning is compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of a holding villa only at a specific timing. It is possible to execute a jackpot game while having expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the content and ratio of the jackpot production selected according to the hold rank are different, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and the second entrance during the jackpot game. It is possible to perform an effect in which the look-ahead result of the ball winning the 140 can be taken into consideration, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, when the hold rank is "1", that is, when the number of hold symbols is the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, the hold inside ream Since the villa is never executed, it is stipulated that either the normal hit effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is stipulated so that the normal hit effect can be easily selected. In other words, if the hold rank is "1" when the jackpot is won, the player will not have excessive expectations for the hold inner consecutive villa, or "normal hit production" or this time. One of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is a jackpot is executed.

If the hold rank is "2", that is, if the number of hold symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, the hold rank is different from "1". There is a possibility of acquiring a new reserved symbol during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the pending villas are not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, in order to deal with the case where the reserved villas are confirmed during the jackpot game, the hold rank is "1" rather than "additional". The percentage of "Direction" selected is set high. As a result, when a pending symbol that wins the jackpot is acquired during the jackpot game, the player can be notified to that effect by the "additional effect".

When the hold rank is "3", that is, when the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbol, that is, the reserved symbol is not the upper limit and is in the hold. If the jackpot game is executed while the consecutive villas have been confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal hit production" and "additional production", it is possible to notify early that the pending villas have been confirmed. "Continuous hit effect" can be selected, and if the hold rank is "4", that is, if the hold symbol is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, "normal hit" It is stipulated that either "production for continuous use" or "production for continuous hitting" is selected.

That is, in the hold ranks "3" and "4" for which the hold inner consecutive villas have already been confirmed, the hold rank "3" is in a state in which a new hold ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making it possible to select the "additional effect", it is possible to make the player think that the next jackpot has been won by the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of the hold rank "4", a new hold ball (winning information) cannot be obtained during the big hit game, and the next big hit is not won during the big hit game. "Direction" is not selected and the production by "Continuous hit production" is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit and other cases, that is, whether or not a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game. By differentiating the options of the effect to be executed during the jackpot based on the above, it is possible to prevent the effect from being executed that is uncomfortable with the actual hold situation.

In this control example, it is stipulated that the "normal hit effect" is selected regardless of which hold rank is selected, so that the "normal hit effect" is executed. Even if there is, the possibility of the pending villa can be left. Therefore, it is possible to make the player execute the big hit medium game while expecting the pending Uchirenso until the end.

Next, the additional number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). The additional number selection table 222d is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the “additional effect” is selected as the effect to be executed during the jackpot. It is a table for selecting a value (the number of additional rounds) to be added to (see FIG. 86 (a)).

The additional number selection table 222d is a case where a new round number command is received (S3304: Yes) in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 142), and the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (see FIG. 142). It is referred to in a part of the process during the additional effect (see FIG. 144) executed in S3306: Yes) (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in the area of the display round number storage area 223g for storing the value to be added to the fixed round number display mode Dm4 (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds confirmed to be executed) are When they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86A).

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the additional number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the pending villa is confirmed), and the second production counter 223y2. The number of additions is specified in association with. Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of whether or not there is a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

In this first control example, the number of all jackpot rounds (the number of jackpot rounds in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5. In the case of rounds, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the fixed number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

In the range where the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10,15", the winning prize is "Yes", and the value of the second production counter 223y2 is "0-49", the additional number "5" is "50-99". The range is defined as the additional number "10", the range of "100 to 149" is defined as the additional number "15", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10,15", the winning prize is "none", and the second The addition number "5" is in the range where the value of the effect counter 223y2 is "0 to 49", the addition number "15" is in the range of "50 to 99", and the addition number is "100" in the range of "100 to 149". 10 ”is specified.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), it is stipulated that the ratio of the number of additional numbers selected differs depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the presence or absence of the pending villa based on the value added during the "additional effect", and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the range where the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", the winning prize is "Yes", and the value of the second production counter 223y2 is "0 to 49", the additional number "5" is in the range of "50 to 99". The additional number "10" is specified in the above, and the additional number "15" is specified in the range of "100 to 149". In this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 to". The winning prize will never be "none". Therefore, if the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 to" and the winning prize is "none", the additional number "-" is specified, and if selected, an error command is set. ..

Here, when an error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed and the remaining number of rounds managed by the voice lamp control device 113 are different, the additional effect is continued. Since there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed when the player is made to do so, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and the currently executed jackpot is based on the information received from the main control device 110. It is preferable to start the execution of the effect of displaying the number of rounds currently executed for the jackpot and the number of rounds currently being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the jackpot production that gives the player a sense of discomfort is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. The continuous effect mode selection table 222e shows the effect mode (final mode) until the battle reach (final mode) is executed among the battle effects (see FIG. 90) executed during the probabilistic change and the time saving of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), The continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, and whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the pending villa is confirmed) are displayed. A different continuous effect mode is defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

Here, the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous effect is set in one probability change state or the time reduction state, and the battle occurs when the probability change state or the time reduction state continues for a long period of time. It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (b).

To specifically explain the contents specified in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the hold information (winning information) is set to "yes". Therefore, the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "100 to 149". There is.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the continuous effect mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223y3. It is stipulated. The pattern corresponding to this continuous effect mode "5" is the case where the first rotation in which the battle effect is executed first after the end of the jackpot wins the jackpot, in order to provide a special feeling to the player. In, a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "2 to 5" and the hold information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". The continuous production mode "2" is defined, the continuous production mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the third production counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

When the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "6 or more" and the hold information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". When the mode "3" is defined, the continuous production mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the value of the third production counter 223y3 is specified. However, the continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode selected with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. For example, the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91). ), The production mode related to the display mode at the time of battle reach development, such as the type of own character, the type and order of the opponent characters that are displayed in a selectable manner, the type of the opponent character that is actually selected, and the HP value. The effect mode that is not related to the display mode at the time of battle reach development, such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle effect and the attack pattern to the opponent character, is set based on the selected continuous effect mode.

For example, when the continuous production mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle production is executed and there is a winning prize in the hold), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. The production mode for this is set. Specifically, the premier character that is set when there is winning information to win a big hit in the hold is set as the character of itself or the opponent, or a specific value as the initial value or the progress value of the HP value of the opponent character. (For example, "777" or "333") is displayed, or the same character is displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot will be won by using a plurality of variable periods.

Next, the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when the game state is set to a game state (probability change state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to show that the game state is continuing. Will be done.

In this battle production, a battle reach (final mode) production for indicating whether or not an advantageous game state ends and a pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. If, as a result of the battle reach effect, the advantageous gaming state is not completed, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect of reducing the opponent's HP value (continuation value) as described above with reference to FIG. 92. The battle reach production mode (HP (continuation value) of the opponent at the start of the battle reach) is determined based on the continuation value reduced during the pre-battle production.

In this first control example, the continuation value reduced during this pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value subselection table 222g. It is configured to be calculated. By setting the continuation value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining the plurality of values in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuation value.

Returning to FIG. 117 (a), the description will be continued. In the continuous value main selection table 222f, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of determining the remaining number of fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol to be won the jackpot is executed, and the current display are displayed. The continuation value to be selected is specified in association with the continuation value.

That is, in the continuation value main selection table 222f, it is stipulated that the continuation value is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort when the battle reach effect is executed by taking over the HP (continuation value) of the opponent that is changed during the pre-battle effect.

Here, when the content of the continuation value main selection table 222f is set more complicatedly in order to enrich the variation of the increase / decrease display of the continuation value executed during the pre-battle production, for example, in this control example, one hundred. The continuation value is managed in the unit of, but the continuation value is managed in a finer unit (ten units), and the lottery result of the special symbol is further subdivided into each subdivided lottery result. When the continuation value is specified in association with each other, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value becomes high. However, it was necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase / decrease display in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle effect.

Therefore, in this control example, when the continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value main selection table 222g is used, which is a table independent of the continuation value main selection table 222f. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222f is configured to be further variable. As a result, the variation of the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuation value is set in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuation value selected by using the continuation value main selection table 222f. It is configured so that the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that reduces (HP value) is set. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected by using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g is displayed as the continuation value after the decrease (after update). It is configured as follows.

Then, the attack effect managed by the value (continuation value) selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the continuation value set by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g (the continuation value). The range of values selected in the continuous value subselection table 222g is set so that the difference value (HP value) does not differ.

With this configuration, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f. Even if it is managed only by a rough continuation value, it is possible to execute the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

As an attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, specifically, if the difference value is "0 to 200", it is a "weak attack" (FIG. 92). (A)), "201-400" is set to execute the effect corresponding to "medium attack", and "401 or more" is set to execute the effect corresponding to "strong attack (see FIG. 92 (b))". To.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is in the range of "medium attack" (for example, 300), the difference value of the displayed continuation value is "weak". It becomes the range of "attack" (for example, 200), and it is possible to suppress that the range of the continuation value based on the lottery of the special symbol and the range of the continuation value actually displayed are different.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the continuation value main selection table 222f shows the number of remaining fluctuations until the hit fluctuation and the continuation value selected last time (among the continuation values currently displayed, the continuation value main selection table 222f). The continuation value is specified in association with the value selected in. Specifically, if the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "3" and the continuation value selected last time is "1000", "800" is selected, and if it is "900", "700" is selected. A value having a difference value of "200" is selected so as to be performed. Hereinafter, similarly, if the continuation value selected last time is "400" to "800", the values whose difference value is "200" are selected. If the last selected continuation value is "300", "200" is selected (difference value "100"), and if the last selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the difference value is "200". A value of "0" is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "2", if the continuation value selected last time is "300" to "700", the values whose difference value is "100" are selected, respectively, and the previous time. When the selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the value whose difference value is "0" is selected. When the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "1", that is, when the next fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, when the continuation value selected last time is "300" to "700", the difference value is "200". When the value to be selected is selected and the previously selected value is "200", the value whose difference value is "0" ("200") is selected, and when the previously selected value is "100". , The value "0" at which the difference value is "100" is selected.

As described above, in this control example, of the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, the rough values (HP values) are used. Since it is configured to select a value (in hundreds of units) and the effect mode of the attack effect is set based on the difference value, the continuous value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (HP value), that is, the value to be referred to rather than setting the effect mode of the attack effect based on the continuation value (HP value) selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g. The pattern can be reduced, and the processing load when setting the effect can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (b) and 117 (c). FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1, and FIG. 117 (c) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value subselection table 222g2. It is a figure.

As described above, the continuation value subselection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. Table. In this control example, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is added by adding the value selected in the continuation value subselection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. (Continued value for production) is set.

In this control example, it is determined whether the selected continuation value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200) by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and a different continuation value subselection table 222g is used based on the determination result. When the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or more, the first continuation value sub is shown in FIG. 117 (b). The selection table 222g1 is referred to, and if it is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuous value subselection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117 (c) is referred to.

In the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuation value "-10" is selected. In the range of "80 to 119", the continuation value "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120 to 149", the continuation value "+20" is selected.

As a result, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f is added to the continuation value selected using the first continuation value subselection table 222g1, and the types of continuation values on the display are increased. Can be done. Specifically, when the continuation value is reduced (updated) from "1000" to "800" with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, the selected continuation value ("800") is a predetermined value ("800"). For example, since it is 200) or more, the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is referred to. When the value of "+20" is selected in the first continuous value subselection table 222g1, "820" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (HP value). See FIG. 92 (a)). On the other hand, when the value of "-20" is selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuation value (HP value).

In this way, by adding the value selected in the continuation value subselection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The variation of the value (HP value) can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f becomes a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value on the display (for example, with reference to the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 described above). If the HP value) is set, the value of "+20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 while "0" is selected as the continuous value in the continuous value main selection table 222f. As an attack effect, an attack effect is executed in which the HP value of the opponent character is set to "0", whereas there is a problem that the continuous value (HP value) on the display is "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether the continuous value selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and if it is determined to be equal to or less than the predetermined value, the second continuous value is determined. It is configured to refer to the subselection table 222g2. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the second continuous value subselection table 222g2 defines a range of "-20" to "0" as the value to be selected.

In the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuation value "-5" is selected. In the range of "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, the difference between the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 described above will be described. The first continuation value subselection table 222g1 has a value (“+20”) to which the continuation value (for example, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is added and a value to be subtracted (“−20”) as possible values. Both "10" and "-20") can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 is a value (“-5”, “-10”” obtained by subtracting the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f as a value that can be selected. ) Is selected.

With this configuration, if the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the displayed continuation value (HP value) can be set widely. If the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the production within a range that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, a storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuous value subselection table 222g1 and whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value are determined. A determination means for determining whether to select a value using the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 or the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 based on the determination means of the determination means. May be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value subselection table 222g from being biased in the positive direction or the negative direction.

In the first control example, as described above, the configuration in which the mode of the attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f And a calculation means for calculating the difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value subselection table 222g, and a selection for selecting an attack effect mode based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means. It may be configured by using means.

In the first control example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a configuration in which the continuation value subselection table 222g is provided, but other configurations may be used. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a continuation value main selection table. Only 222f may be provided, and the continuation value subselection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may be configured to perform the process of selecting the mode of the attack effect. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform update management of the continuous value using the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In this first control example, the continuation value using the continuation value main selection table 222f or the continuation value subselection table 222g, which is executed when there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol, is executed. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol, the process of varying the continuous value is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous value variable processing in this effect is variable depending on the period during which the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is configured so that a later continuation value is selected.

With this configuration, while the continuous production (pre-battle production) is being executed, it is possible to frequently execute the production that reduces the continuous value, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the production content. can do.

Further, in this first control example, as a continuous effect (pre-battle effect), the continuous values of four bodies (A to D) are displayed as opponent candidates that can be opposed at the time of battle reach (see FIG. 91 (a)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) can be continued by selecting another opponent. Can be executed.

With this configuration, when the continuous production (pre-battle production) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach effect from becoming poor.

Further, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10). If the pre-battle effect continues while it fluctuates more than once, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a 60-second deviation pattern), the battle reach is configured to be executed, and the battle reach is performed. If the winning result is not won, the continuation effect (second time) is configured to be executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous production (pre-battle production) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach effect from becoming poor.

Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). The final aspect selection table 222h is a table for selecting an effect mode of the battle reach executed during the above-mentioned continuous effect, and is a result of determining whether or not the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed is appropriate and a fifth effect. A different final aspect is defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit and a game state (probability change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the big hit ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is set. The final mode "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the final mode "2" is defined in the range of "50 to 129", and the final mode "3" is defined in the range of "130 to 149".

If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit and the player is not given a favorable gaming state after the big hit, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" in the final mode "4". However, when the final mode "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149" and the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is out of the range, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is set in the range of "0 to 129". 6 ”is defined as the final aspect“ 7 ”in the range of“ 130 to 149 ”.

Further, in the case of a special symbol variation in which the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the final mode "4" is set in the range of "0 to 129" for the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5. The final aspect "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149".

Here, the effect content of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram illustrating the effect content of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h. In this control example, as the final mode (battle reach) of the battle effect, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, an effect in which either the main character or the opponent's character attacks a total of three times is executed. A different attack pattern is selected depending on the final mode selected.

Specifically, in the final modes "1" to "3", the attack pattern in which the winning battle in which the main character wins is executed is selected, and in the case of the final mode "1", all three attack opportunities are performed. In, the attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the case of the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode "3", the attack pattern (revival effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent character is selected after the opponent character attacks in all three attack opportunities. Will be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. For example, in the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the final mode selection table 222h is provided three times. The final modes (final modes "1" and "2") that are completed by the attack of the above are easily selected, and the revival effect is easily selected in the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. Here, in the revival effect executed with the variation pattern of the variation time of 90 seconds, the effect data of the first three attacks is the same as the effect data of the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds (final mode "5"). Is used. As a result, the production data is shared to reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the production in which the victory battle is executed (the first half of the final mode "3") and the production in which the defeat battle is executed (final mode "5"). By executing the same effect in () and, it is possible to reliably suppress the situation in which the player is grasped the effect result in the middle of the effect.

Return to FIG. 118 to continue the description. In the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern in which a defeat battle in which the main character is defeated is executed is selected. In this defeat battle, as a result of the battle reach, the effect that the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP) of the main character finally becomes 0 is executed. In the case of the final mode "4", an attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode "5" In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the defeat battle set in this control example, until the last one attack (third attack) is executed, other battles (victory battle, draw battle described later) and Since the same effect is executed, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the player is grasped the effect result in the middle of the effect.

In the final modes "6" and "7", an attack pattern in which a draw battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0 is selected. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends and the next pre-battle production is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode "7" is selected. In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, the same effect as other battles (defeat battles) is executed as the attack pattern, so that not only the attack pattern but also the attack pattern is applied to the player. It is possible to pay close attention to the decrease of the HP gauge, and it is possible to surely suppress the situation where the production result is grasped in the middle of the production.

In this control example, the same attack pattern as the defeat battle is selected as the attack pattern executed during the draw battle, but it is the same as other battles (victory battles). It may be configured so that the effect in which the attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, the battle reach this time is either a victory battle or a draw battle (that is, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (1st to 3rd attack opportunities). , It is possible to let the player know that it is a battle without defeat, and the production (battle reach) can be seen without worrying that the game state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 stores the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the fluctuation start flag 223c, the stop type selection flag 223d, the state storage area 223e, the jackpot information storage area 223f, and the number of display rounds. Area 223g, additional effect flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, fluctuation number counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous effect mode storage area 223m, continuous value storage area 223n, duration counter 223p, and so on. At least an effect setting counter 223q, a continuous effect flag 223r, a precursor setting flag 223t, an effect counter group 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to the fourth area). ), And each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first entry hole 64 or the second entry entry port 140 is detected in the main control device 110, the first random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize is obtained. , Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn from each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern). ) Is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area ~) corresponding to the type of the entry port (first entry opening 64 or second entry opening 140) in which the entry is detected. Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the starting prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is included in the various information predicted in response to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing when the starting prize is won, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol changes start (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, as the look-ahead effect, the setting of the effect mode such as the jackpot effect, the battle effect, and the expectation degree display effect is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the player can be asked about each reserved ball even before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115A, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b counts the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2. It has a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the reserved ball number increases or decreases, such as when a winning information command is received or when a fluctuation pattern command is received. To update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b1 is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a special symbol 1 reserved in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the above up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b2 is a variation display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times for each type of the special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 detects the start winning and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2. , A display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2 after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3202 of FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device. It is turned off when the variation display in 81 is set (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information regarding the jackpot to be executed, and is a main control device for storing information regarding the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, the number of rounds and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot ends). This is an area for storing when received from 110. In this control example, the mode of the effect executed during the jackpot is set based on the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f.

The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85 (a), when the addition effect is executed during the jackpot, the number of running rounds display mode Dm3 indicating the number of running rounds and the internal The fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 that partially confirms and displays the set number of rounds is the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information about the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

In this display round number storage area 223g, 0 is stored as an initial value, and among the hit-related commands transmitted from the main control device 110, the round number command is received (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), and the additional effect flag is added. When 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes in FIG. 142), it is set internally with reference to the stored value (number of rounds) in the process during additional production (see FIG. 143). The difference between the number of rounds to be confirmed and the number of confirmed rounds is calculated, and the value (number of rounds) of the number of confirmed rounds newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so that it is displayed as the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds n) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the addition effect is completed, the stored value is initialized.

As described above, in this control example, when a new round is started, the additional effect processing (see FIG. 144) is executed, the number of fixed rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g is updated, and a predetermined number is obtained. When a round (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the number of fixed rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 can be added, or the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is displayed based on the operation of the player. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, it is possible to reliably respond even if the display timing of the fixed number of rounds is different.

Further, in this control example, when the additional winnings generated during the jackpot are won, the number of rounds is specified in advance based on the winning information corresponding to the additional winnings, and the preliminary identification result is shown. The number of display rounds is set according to the total number of rounds including the number of rounds information.

The additional effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the additional effect is being executed, and is set to on when the additional effect is selected as the jackpot medium effect. This additional effect flag 223h is set to on when the additional effect is read as the jackpot medium effect in the jackpot medium effect setting process (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142). ) When the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no pending villa (S3703: No in FIG. 146), it is set to off.

The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the jackpot (ending display of the jackpot) is extended and displayed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot, and the effect during the jackpot (the effect during the jackpot). It is set to on when the ending display of the jackpot) is extended and displayed. If the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, that is, if a new jackpot is won while the effect during the jackpot (the ending display of the jackpot) is being executed, information on the jackpot (acquired ball). The number and the number of rounds) are displayed in a display mode that continues from the information (the number of acquired balls and the number of rounds) regarding the previous jackpot.

This display extension flag 223i is set when the jackpot effect executed this time is a normal hit effect and the game state after the end of the jackpot is a probability change state or a time saving state in the jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). S3709: Yes in FIG. 146), set to on (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol fluctuates four times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3904: Yes in FIG. 148), or when the elapsed time is 4 seconds (S5103: Yes in FIG. 154). , Off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and then the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times) or a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. Is configured to be turned off when is true. This is the period during which the display extension flag 223i is set to the period during which the jackpot effect is continuously executed, and if the jackpot is won during that period, the jackpot effect is displayed. This is because it is a continuous period (the previous jackpot production is continuously executed).

More specifically, if the condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to off is to set only that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is less than the predetermined number of times (4 times) described above, and the player interrupts the launch of the balls after the jackpot ends. If this happens, the game will be interrupted without the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the predetermined number (4 times) after the jackpot ends, and there is a risk that the production during the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. is there. Furthermore, if the player stops the game in such a state, the effect of hitting the jackpot will be displayed even though no one is playing the game, so that a new player will be able to play. There is a problem that the pachinko machine 10 hesitates to play a game and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the passage of time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to off. As a result, it is possible to set a limited period during which the effect during the jackpot is continuously displayed and the effect across the plurality of jackpots can be executed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The fluctuation number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The fluctuation count counter 223j executes the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) with the display extension flag 223i set to ON, and is “5” when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed. The value of is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time in the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the after-hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (FIG. 146). (See S3711) The counter value is decremented by "1" each time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 executed every 1 millisecond is executed (FIG. 154). (See S5102).

Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes “0”, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (see S5104 in FIG. 154). With this configuration, when the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot elapses a predetermined time (4 seconds), the effect during the jackpot can be ended and the normal effect corresponding to each gaming state can be executed. , You can enthusiastically play a game to win a big hit in a limited period of time.

In this control example, "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, but the set time is not limited to this, for example, even if it is 3 seconds. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to be turned on, one of a plurality of times may be selected and the period may be set. Further, the value to be set in the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k may be set longer than the total of the fluctuation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, the variation of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 preferentially digested during the jackpot can be executed while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223 m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when the display extension flag 223i is set to off in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and it is determined that the game state is a time saving state or a probable change state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and until the Kiyoaki mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed). Until then), the effect corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m (pre-battle effect) is executed.

The continuous value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f among the continuous values (HP values) increased / decreased during the continuous effect executed in this control example. Therefore, the update (increase / decrease) process of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n.

In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g. By configuring as such, the increase / decrease pattern of the continuous value displayed during the continuous effect is increased, but the management of the continuous value (HP value) in the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Since it is configured to execute only with the continuation value selected based on, the type of the continuation value (HP value) to be managed with respect to the type of the continuation value (HP value) displayed during the continuation effect. Can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring the period in which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, and is to prevent the final mode (battle reach) from being frequently executed in the continuation effect. , The counter used.

The continuation period counter 223p continues every time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed with the continuation effect flag 223r set to ON, that is, every time the variation of the special symbol is executed. 1 is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, when it is determined that the counter value is less than "6" in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (S4003: No in FIG. 149), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. It is configured. With this configuration, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, from the execution of the pre-battle effect to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation 6 times. Will be done.

The continuous effect setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous effect flag 223r is set to be turned on) while the game state is set to the probability change state or the time saving state. Yes, it is set so that a different continuous effect mode can be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q. As a result, when the continuous effect is executed for a long period of time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the battle effect of the same mode. Further, by setting the continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with a rare effect.

This continuous effect setting counter 223q is referred to when a new continuous effect mode is selected in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and 1 is added when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect is completed (when the gaming state shifts to the normal state or when the jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect mode is selected (pre-battle effect is being executed) during the execution of the continuous effect, and when the continuous effect mode is selected, the continuous effect mode is selected. Set to on. While the continuous effect flag 223r is set to on, the pre-battle effect is executed in the same continuous effect mode without selecting a new continuous effect mode.

The continuous effect flag 223r is initially set to off when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to on when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004: Yes in FIG. 149). Then, when the final aspect is selected based on the final aspect selection table 222h (that is, when the battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is completed), it is set to off (see FIG. 149: S4015).

The precursor setting flag 223t is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variation display is switched during the precursor effect period. When this precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON, when a new fluctuation effect is set in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147), It is controlled so that the precursor effect of the precursory fluctuation is continuously executed from the start of the fluctuation.

This precursor setting flag 223t has a countdown effect having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as look-ahead information in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 141) (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141), and the fluctuation currently being executed. When it is determined that the residual variation period of the display is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes in FIG. 141), it is set to on (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON in the process of S4301. In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed in, the effect mode is set and then turned off (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223y has at least the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6, and each of the counters is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. A random number value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from (not shown) is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate at least with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can update each effect counter to a different random number value and execute a determination. Is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when executing various determinations executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the determination of the advance notice type of the normal pressing effect.

The other memory area 223z is provided with a flag other than the above-mentioned flag for setting an area and a state for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and temporarily sets other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is an area for memorizing. Specifically, for example, a power off flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure is provided. This power-off flag is set to on before the power-off command is received from the main controller 110 and the power-off process is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), when the power off flag is on (3008: Yes in FIG. 138), a certain period of time (100) after the power off flag is set to on. When the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on before the elapse of (milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 121 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 22 (b). As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the image of the fluctuation when the power is turned on with the “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the “○” as shown in FIG. 22 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 121 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and (c) are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry is detected in the first entry port 64 or the second entry 1640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It can be displayed on 81 immediately.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. it can.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 122 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 122 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage”.

As shown in FIG. 122, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 122A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 81 (b)) with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. To. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the sub-symbols without numbers are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the serial error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and a precursor effect flag 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to the big hit medium production, round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period for one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main control device 110) for display stop type. It is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, but other configurations may be used. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. The display control device 114 divides the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the period (for example, 60 seconds) of one special symbol fluctuation into a plurality of parts (for example, the first half fluctuation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half fluctuation pattern (30 seconds)). By configuring in this way, the game content (for example, the player's operation on the frame button 22 and the new ball entry) that occurred during the period in which the first half fluctuation pattern is being executed may be configured. It is possible to set a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation pattern based on (acquisition of information).

In addition, by using the above configuration, when an additional display variation pattern command is received after the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation is output once, the additional display variation is received. It is not necessary to perform the process of rewriting the effect content in correspondence with the pattern command, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 divides the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the period (for example, 60 seconds) of one special symbol fluctuation into a plurality of parts (for example, the first half fluctuation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half. When the variation pattern (30 seconds) is output to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output the display stop type command together with the display variation pattern command that is output first.

Further, in this control example, the display effect command for executing the continuous effect (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the game state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the continuous effect are terminated. The voice lamp control device 113 includes a final mode command for display for executing an effect (battle reach) for notifying whether or not, and various other commands for increasing the expectation that the player has won a big hit. It is configured to be output from, and when various commands are received, the effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Further, even if the effect content is already set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if an additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is supported. The content is configured to overwrite the production content. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, the effect for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (special symbol variation period) is set (created) in advance, and additional effects are added during that period. When a display command (for example, an operation on the frame button 22 by the player or a display command for indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display content of the effect can be smoothly changed.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols without the numbers "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as images and characters of a young man, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "morning stage", "evening stage", or "night stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image (special back image A to C, etc.) different from the back images A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed. ..

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 124).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, in the example of FIG. 124). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. It is set to on during the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , Off (see S8005 in FIG. 170 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 157 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S6309 in 157 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 167 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 125) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 125, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (design 1, symbol). 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, Number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., Error symbol ), And detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 157 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 157 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The total value storage area 233k is an area for storing (storing) the history displayed (displayed as the total value) as the continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-mentioned continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content in the continuation effect (for example, FIG. 92A) The displayed reduction value Dm12, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

That is, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set total value on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and displays the display mode based on the calculation result. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, means for setting an effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuation value (HP value) on the voice lamp control device 113 side (continuation value subselection table 222g, and S4105-S4107 in FIG. 150). However, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting the effect value. With such a configuration, the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The precursor effect flag 233 m is a flag for determining whether or not the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this precursor effect flag 233m is on, it means that the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, and if it is off, it means that the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that it is not done. The precursor effect flag 233m is set to on when the additional precursor command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). Further, the precursor effect flag 233 m is referred to in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect executed across the plurality of special figure fluctuations. , Off (see S6503 in FIG. 159). As a result, it is possible to execute the precursory effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

Although detailed description is omitted, when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure fluctuation and the time when the effect data has been executed. When setting the effect corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (S6502 in FIG. 159), referring to the effect data stored in the above-mentioned storage means, the previous time. It is configured so that the precursory effect executed in the special figure fluctuation of is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the precursory effect executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, the precursor effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the precursor effect is executed as a part of the variation pattern). Not limited to this, when a display command indicating that the precursory effect is executed is received, regardless of the variable display content, the precursory effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command or the precursory effect is stopped. It may be configured to display until a command is received.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 238, 199, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal ball entry port 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205). A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

As described above, in this control example, when executing the process of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired. .. With this configuration, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially executed.

The process of starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example. For example, the process of starting the variation of the special symbol 1 may be configured to be executed with priority given to the variation of the special symbol 1. And the special symbol 2 may not be prioritized, and for example, the special symbol may be changed according to the order in which the balls enter the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140. In this case, a storage area for storing the order in which the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 140 is provided, and the special symbol 1 is provided according to the order (in order of entry) stored in the storage area. The value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter may be acquired, or the reserved ball number counter common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be used. ..

Further, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to fluctuate independently and simultaneously. In this case, if it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the jackpot, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is stopped (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped until the jackpot of one is completed), or the other. It is advisable to configure so that the fluctuation of the special symbol of is discarded (even if the fluctuation time has not passed, the lottery result is rewritten to be out of order and forcibly stopped). With this configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, when one becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be performed without worrying about the fluctuation of the other special symbol. it can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the description will be continued. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special). The jackpot type (big hits A to K) is determined according to the values of the symbol 2) and the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, the winning jackpot type can be identified by making the LED lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 different according to the jackpot type (big hit A to K). Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by turning on or off each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first symbol display device 37. The lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 may be configured so that the lighting colors are different. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is changing by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this blinking display. The lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stop state of the special symbol) displayed from the stop of the special symbol to the execution of the next change of the special symbol is longer than the lighting period of the LED. It is configured in. This makes it possible for the player to grasp whether the special symbol is in a fluctuating state or a stopped state.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). After that, the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218) to set the start of the jackpot (S219). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1104) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, it branches to S1201: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, when the process of S219 is completed, a stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the information regarding the stop symbol is set (S220), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is different (S216: No), the variable number subtraction process is executed (S221). The fluctuation number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. After that, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S220 process, and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213), first, the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol. When the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first random number counter C1 for high probability. Based on the random number table per unit, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, five random number values of "5 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. The judgment value that becomes a big hit may be different. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are used. The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. With this configuration, the jackpot probability can be made different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player wins the jackpot. Can have the expectation of.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203g is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first hit random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches "7", it is determined that the random number is the jackpot of the special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). ), The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202c, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). Of A to K), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1) and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A (the number of rounds is In the 15th round, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 107), and "20 to 79". If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot is B (the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot).

If the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). If it is judged to be a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times, and if it is in the range of "115 to 164", the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 and the jackpot is irrespective of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). It is determined that the game state after the end is the jackpot type set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol).

Further, if the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not a low probability state and a time saving state). In the case (in the case of the normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the jackpot ends. It is determined that the game state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Further, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2), as in the case of the special diagram 1 described above, it is based on the contents specified in the first type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to K). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to K) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108). When the process of S307 is completed, the process shifts to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (out of order) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of off is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off-symbol, and the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area) is set. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203b), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, or complete. Set whether it is off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), the normal reach, Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach and special reach. When the process of S309 is completed, the process shifts to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set ( S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127).

Next, the fluctuation number subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation number subtraction process (S221). In this fluctuation number subtraction process (S221), the time saving medium counter 203h and the specified number of times counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter that measures the remaining number of times that the time saving state is set, and the time saving number of times is set when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit. The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is a specified number of times based on the contents of the state transition table set after the jackpot ends. Is set.

When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the time reduction counter 203h Set the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of (S403). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current game state, that is, the remaining time reduction number of times in the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction number command received as a part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S403 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is then 0, that is, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 by the processing of S402, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h becomes 0. It is determined (S404). If it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S404 (S404: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S404, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the processing of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S406. Further, in the processing of S401, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0), the processing (S402 to S405) related to the time saving / medium counter 203h is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S406. ..

In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406). In the processing of S406, when it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S407), and the remaining value indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is shown. The fluctuation number command is set (S408). The remaining fluctuation number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining variation number of each state status from the residual variation number command received as a part of the state command, that is, the residual variation number until the game state and the reference variation pattern selection table are switched. , Stored in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S408 is completed, the value of the specified number counter 203j is then 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number counter 203j by the processing of S407, the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes 0. It is determined (S409). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), the state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202f, and the corresponding status command is set (S410).

In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value "4" of the specified number of times counter 203j set for the status status ST3a is subtracted to become "0". When the status changes from ST3a to ST3, the information indicating the status status ST3 and the information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as the status commands.

Then, when the processing of S410 is completed, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of S406 that the value of the specified number counter 203j is not larger than 0 (0) (S406: No), the processing related to the specified number counter 203j (S407 to S411) is skipped. This process ends.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 140. When there is a start prize, the number of reserved balls for each special symbol is added, the values of the corresponding counters are stored in each reserved ball storage area, and the stored values of the various counters are used to determine the special symbol. A look-ahead process for determining the lottery result in advance is executed.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S504). .. Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 136) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S505, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the ball has not won (winned) in the first winning opening (entry opening) 64 (S501: No), or in the processing of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (4) (S503: No), the start winning process for the special symbol 1 is skipped and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each of the processes of S507 to S512, the same process as that of each of the processes of S501 to S506 is executed for winning a prize (winning ball) in the second ball entry port 140. The only difference between the processes S507 to S512 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 140 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S507 to S512 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S513), and the main process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S513). In this look-ahead processing (S513), when there is a new winning (winning) in the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 140, the lottery result of the special symbol for the winning (winning) is obtained in advance. A process of setting a command for determining (pre-reading) and outputting the pre-determining (pre-reading) result to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (winning) information command) set here, the effect on the winning (winning) information stored on hold is based on the winning (winning) information. It is possible to execute it before the special symbol change is executed.

In this look-ahead processing (FIGS. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (winning ball) in the first entry slot 64 or the second entry opening 140 (S601: Yes), from the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball). Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) The value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to this prize, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variable type counter CS1 Get the value (S602).

Next, among the determination results defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (a)), the hit determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S603). Among the determination results defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

When the processing of S604 is completed, then, among the determination results defined in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the variation pattern selection table 202d is obtained. Among the determination results specified in (see FIG. 108), the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the variation indicating the variation type determination result acquired in the processes of S603 to S606 described above are obtained. The winning information command including the type information is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

The winning (winning) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for showing in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning). I wish I had it. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for the lottery of the special symbol, or the same selection table as the above-mentioned various selection tables may be provided for the look-ahead processing.

Further, in the processing of S607, the winning (winning) information command is provided with the gaming state information for indicating the gaming state when the special symbol change based on the winning (winning) information that is the target of the pre-reading processing is executed. May be included. Here, the game state information will be described. In this control example, the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state can be set as the game state, and the lottery result of the special symbol (big hit judgment result, big hit type, and fluctuation pattern) is configured according to each game state. ) And the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is configured to shift based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the gaming state, the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal state on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state. Will be migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol based on the winning (winning ball) that is the target of the look-ahead processing is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is used as the game state information. It is configured to be included in the winning (winning ball) information command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the lottery (variation) of the special symbol based on the ball that has won (winned) the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 140 while the game state is shortened, the game state is changed to the normal state. Even if it is executed after the transfer, it is possible to set a winning (winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed. Furthermore, as the winning (winning) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (winning) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The method of setting the winning (winning) information command by the look-ahead processing is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (winning) information command. Any configuration may be sufficient as long as it is possible to suppress a problem that the content of the effect (look-ahead effect) to be performed is inconsistent with the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the gaming state.

For example, when a winning (winning) information command is set in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110, the winning (winning) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states can be set so as to be configured in the voice lamp control device 113. The game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed is determined, and the pre-reading effect is set based on the winning (ball winning) information corresponding to the determination result. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, it is not necessary to perform the process of pre-reading the gaming state, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (winning) information command corresponding to the plurality of gaming states described above, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result of winning the jackpot in any gaming state, the gaming state is probablely changed. Set either the second judgment result in which the jackpot is won only in the state, or the third judgment result in which the jackpot is not won in any game state, and the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the game state. It may be configured so that the judgment result of the jackpot can be acquired, or the information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the look-ahead processing is output as it is as a winning (winning) information command, and the voice lamp control device. The 113 may be configured so that the lottery result can be determined based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the look-ahead process).

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entry port 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708). Specifically, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0. If the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S708: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second random number table 202b for high probability time. Based on the above, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S708: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table 202b, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S709 or S710 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S711), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S711: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S712). In the process of S712, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process shifts to S714. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S711: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714), and if it is in the normal symbol time saving state (S714: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S715) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (S714: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this process is performed. To finish. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability (when the time is shortened), the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability (normal state). Therefore, the lottery frequency of ordinary symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols increases, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 140. It becomes a state.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game state of the normal symbol is configured so that the normal state is set when the special symbol is won during the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege because the game state of the normal symbol is also in the advantageous state during the jackpot that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the period in which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (the jackpot period of the special symbol) and the period in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open (the winning period of the normal symbol) overlap, which is the most advantageous variable winning for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric accessory 140a obstructs the winning of the ball to the device 65.

Explaining the above-mentioned contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 140a, and there is a problem that the ball cannot sufficiently win the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, an electric accessory 140a is arranged at a lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and a ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open). It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by using a configuration that makes it easy for the variable winning device 65 to win a prize, but in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is limited.

On the other hand, in this control example, since the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state (normal state) during the jackpot of the special symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electric accessory 140a during the jackpot period, and the above-mentioned problem is solved. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S717 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S717: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S717, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S718, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. (S719). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S719: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state (S720), and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. (S720: Yes) sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 (S722), and shifts to the processing of S723. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S720, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S720: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 , "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the electric accessory 140a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or the process of S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S719, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the processes of S720 to S723 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S803).

Even if the ball does not pass through the normal entry port 67 (S801: No), or the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power failure occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (1 second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S812 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 of FIG. 136, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1004: No). S1007: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this first control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entry port 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the first control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device is used when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or the process of S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S712 or the process of S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 132). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this first control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (4 msec). S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process is shifted to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238, 239 in the first control example), it becomes 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 134 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S1001 in FIG. 135). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 136). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the opening command is set (S1202), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1203). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1206). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1207, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special game state (all round games set as jackpots (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed. To determine.

In the process of S1209, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: Yes), the ending command is set (S1210), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1211: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing when all the big hit games are finished, it is based on the first hit type selection table 202c. Then, the contents of the probability change flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are set (S1212). By the process of S1212, the game state after the end of the big hit corresponding to the winning big hit type (whether or not there is a probability change state, whether or not there is a time saving state, and setting of the time saving number of times) is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, the state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and the state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination is performed. Based on the table 202f, the state status and the specified number of times counter 203j are acquired (S1213). For example, if "high probability time reduction (probability change state)" is set as the game state and "big hit G" is won as the jackpot type, "state transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination and the status is changed. Of the transition table 202f (see FIG. 111 (a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111 (c)) corresponding to “state transition 2” is referred to.

After that, a state specification command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state (high probability state (probability change state), low probability state (normal state)) of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed ( S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting accompanying the power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S3118 (see FIG. 139) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S3115: Yes in FIG. 139), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S3118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S3118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and is S3118 in FIG. 139. It was started after the execution of the power off processing was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S3118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the power off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power of S3118 is turned off. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3118 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S3009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the process shifts to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, so that the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process shifts to S3010.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that when the processing of S3008 is reached via the processing of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and a time setting process for setting reference timekeeping information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S3012). , Move to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (effect) in S3102 to S3112, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3113 and the variation display setting process of S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S3105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period flag indicating that the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, when the validity period flag is set to ON, it is next determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set, and this process is terminated.

The validity period flag described above is provided for each effect executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, if the background of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the validity period flag (first validity period flag) for indicating that is turned on. If it is the period during which the operation effect for changing the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on the press of the frame button 22 is executed (the period during which the press of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), the operation effect is set to The validity period flag (second validity period flag) for indicating the effect is set to on.

Further, the plurality of validity period flags described above are prioritized in advance according to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of validity period flags are set to be on. If it is set to, the process based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag having the highest priority among the plurality of validity period flags set to be turned on.

With this configuration, when the periods for effectively accepting the pressing of the frame button 22 overlap, for example, the period in which the background can be changed (the period in which the first effective period flag is set) and the operation effect Is based on the pressing of the frame button 22 based on the second validity period flag set with a higher priority when the period during which is executed (the period during which the second validity period flag is set to be turned on) overlaps. Since the processing is executed, it is possible to execute an effect having a high privilege value for the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second validity period flag is set to ON. Therefore, since only the effect corresponding to the valid period set with a high priority is executed, the player can operate the operation timing while watching the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, as a method of setting the priority for each validity period flag, a configuration in which the priority is set for each validity period flag is used in advance, but other configurations may be used, for example, a frame. In the button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether the validity period flag is set to ON in order from the highest priority. As a result, even when a plurality of validity period flags are set to be on at the same time, the process based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag having a high priority, so that the player It is possible to execute a production with a high privilege value, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S3110 is completed, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter update process, a process for updating the various counters used in the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, the counter values of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y are updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counters 223y1 to 223y6 are counters used for selecting fluctuation patterns, selecting various effects, and the like, respectively. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 msec). (Every time), the update process is executed so that the values are different.

In this first control example, when a plurality of effects are selected based on the values of the effect counters, a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used. Therefore, when a plurality of effects are selected in the main process. Even if it is, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effect is biased. However, for example, a plurality of effect modes selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the two, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

Further, in the first control example, a plurality of counters having different update patterns (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) are used. For example, a random value is used by using the update value of one effect counter. May be calculated, and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the update values of the effect counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the last second digit, and the last digit and the lower of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit. It is preferable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the process of S3111 is completed, the effect update process (S3112) is then executed. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), control is executed for the effect (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the jackpot) regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process that performs a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S3113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the variation display setting process, the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is used to execute the effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (the variation effect of the third symbol and other effects) in the third symbol display device 81. The display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S3115 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off process is executed. (S3118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to the process of S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S3201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3201: Yes). S3203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3207). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the hold ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received hold ball number command is displayed. , Stores the value included in the received reserved ball count command (S3208), and ends this process. Specifically, when the hold ball number command received this time is the hold ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the hold ball number counter 203d of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is transmitted from the received hold ball number command. A value (number of hold times N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command received this time is the hold ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special) from the hold ball number command received this time. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When any of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. The number of reserved balls command for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, an accurate number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Dn4 of the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the winning information command processing is executed (S3210), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning information command processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, and the information included in the received winning information command corresponds to the winning information storage area 223a. Executes the process for storing in the area (holding storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information targeting the winning ball, such as information on the winning / failing judgment result of the special symbol, information on the stop type, and information on the fluctuation pattern, but includes other information. It may include, for example, winning information about a ball that has already won a prize (a winning information command has been received in the past).

When the winning information command processing (S3210) is executed, first, the received winning information command information (look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the prize information storage area 223a can store up to four prize information commands for special symbol 1 and up to four prize information commands for special symbol 2, for a total of eight prize information commands. It is configured, and the winning information commands are stored in the designated storage area according to the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more as the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). If it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is fluctuation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), then the specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, predetermined from the start of the fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is variable type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the variation display currently being executed is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In the process of S3234, the time managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time) is used. The remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

If it is determined in the processing of S3234 that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it means that a period during which a precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed is secured, so that the display is added. The precursor command is set (S3235), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to on (S3236), and this process is terminated. By executing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute a precursor effect that straddles a plurality of variable displays as a suggestive effect for the specific effect C that is executed in the variable display from the next time onward. As a result, the specific effect executed at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation), that is, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed with only one variation display is set. Since it is possible to execute a suggestion effect by using a plurality of variable displays even for a specific effect that is executed at a timing that cannot be secured, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the suggestion effect and to set a range in which the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to expand it, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the production regarding the variable display.

In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, when the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the fluctuation display during execution cannot be secured, the execution is in progress. This process ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if it is not possible to secure a period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the variation display during execution (S3234: No), the variation corresponding to the prize information determined to have the countdown effect in the current prize information command processing (S3210). When setting the display, a specific effect is set within a range in which the suggestion effect can be executed with only one variation display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have passed from the start of the variation), and the suggestion effect is set.

With this configuration, the timing at which the winning information is generated (the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot) with respect to the fluctuation to which the winning information is given to indicate that the countdown effect is executed. Depending on the timing at which the ball enters the 140), the effect of the countdown effect can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation) is set to another period (for example, the specific effect). It is stipulated that the effect shows that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect (specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation). That is, it is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is easier to select the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect C can be executed.

As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the fluctuations from the next time onward. Further, it is possible to enthusiastically store the reservation of the special symbol so that the suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this control example, a plurality of fluctuation displays are straddled based on the prize information included in the received prize information command as described above and the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the fluctuation display during execution). Is used to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to execute a precursor effect as a suggestion effect and set a specific effect at the timing of starting the next variation display when it is determined whether or not to execute. , A specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed (a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With this configuration, the suggestion effect is produced based on the game situation after the suggestion effect is started (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)). Aspects can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined in advance and then executed.

Further, in this control example, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays, the fluctuation display being executed and the fluctuation display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the fluctuation display are displayed. Although the suggestion effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display that is executed one after another from the variable display that is being executed, or is executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect to the executing variable display or the next variable display based on the timing when the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It is advisable to provide a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, a holding display area in which the number of reserved balls of a special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation starts before.

Further, in this first control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot is referred to, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is configured to determine whether or not it is (whether or not there is a villa on hold), and to set the effect during the jackpot game or after the jackpot is over based on the determination result. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state, the effect content is selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (look-ahead effect) referring to the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is executed, a flag indicating that fact (pre-reading effect) For example, if the look-ahead effect in progress flag is set to on and the look-ahead effect in progress flag is set to on, when a new prize information command is received, the prize included in the prize information command is included. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without a gap, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, a control other than the above-described contents may be used to solve the above-mentioned problem. For example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of look-ahead effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. A look-ahead effect with a high priority rank is compared with the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that is given and currently executed and the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command. May be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the initially set end timing. You may.

In addition, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank so that the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. Should be set to be high. By this. When the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received (S3211), and if the winning related command is received (S3209: No) S3211: Yes), the hit-related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the hit-related command process is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3212). In the hit-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the jackpot medium effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then the opening effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 for display. The opening command is set (S3303), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the contents of the jackpot medium effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot medium effect setting process (S3302). In this jackpot production setting process (S3302), the holding status at the time of winning the jackpot (contents of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the counter value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 (holding ball number)) The process for setting the effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed based on.

Specifically, the result of determining whether or not there is winning information indicating that the special symbol has won the jackpot, and the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4). Based on the above, the effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected using the jackpot effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 115 (c)).

When the jackpot production setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the extracted winning information and the reserved rank corresponding to the number of reserved balls are read from the reserved rank selection table 222b (S3404). The process proceeds to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 in the process of S3403, "1" is read as the hold rank and the process proceeds to the process of S3406.

In the hold rank selection table 222b, the hold rank is stored at the time of the big hit in order to select the hold rank based on the expectation that the winning information for winning the big hit again (the winning information in the hold) may exist in the hold at the end of the big hit. The result of determining whether or not the jackpot winning information is included in the winning information, and whether or not new winning information may be stored during the jackpot (whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit). The hold rank is selected based on the result of determining (?). Further, when the number of reserved balls is "0" at the time of winning the jackpot, since there is no winning information, the reserved rank "1" is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls and the content of the winning information, that is, , The hold rank is selected based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Based on the hold rank selected here, the effect executed during the jackpot is selected in the process of S3406 described later.

With this configuration, the production corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, the winning / failing judgment result is executed during the jackpot. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player on winning the big hit, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting the content of the game after the big hit.

In this control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the hold rank selected in the above-mentioned contents, but other than that, for example, the number of jackpots included in the winning information and , Hold rank based on information such as the type of fluctuation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all the changes of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball are completed). May be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned hold rank, the type of jackpot executed this time, the number of times the jackpot winning is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within 50 times), and the player is advantageous. It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive villas, such as the number of big hits won in a state where the game state continues, and the operation information indicating the operation content for the operation means of the player. As a result, more various effects can be performed during the jackpot.

Further, in this control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-mentioned hold rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86 (a)). The mode is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the contents during the jackpot, and a common jackpot middle effect is executed using the entire main display area Dm, and a part of the main display area Dm is used. As a sub-effect to be executed using the above-mentioned, a jackpot effect selected based on the above-mentioned hold rank may be executed, or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub-display device, a lamp) may be executed. The device, the frame of the pachinko machine 10, and the audio output device) may be used for execution. As a result, while sharing the effect of showing that the jackpot has been won (the effect of showing that the jackpot is in progress), it is possible to suggest the game content after the jackpot to the player based on the hold rank. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to execute an effect that gives expectations after the jackpot ends.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. In the process of S3406, the jackpot middle effect is read out with reference to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c based on the read hold rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 (S3406). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot medium effect read out this time is an additional effect (S3407), and if it is determined to be an additional effect (S3407: Yes), the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3408). , The display jackpot middle effect command corresponding to the read jackpot middle effect is set (S3409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3407, if it is determined that the jackpot medium effect read out this time is not an additional effect (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S3409.

Return to FIG. 142 to continue the description. In the process of S3301, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306). ).

Here, when the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), the process related to the additional effect is executed at the timing when a new round is started (that is, the timing when the round number command is received). Therefore, the process during the additional effect is executed (S3307), then the additional effect command for display is set (S3308), and the number of display rounds command according to the number of rounds extracted this time is set (S3309). ), End this process. The display addition effect command and the display round number command set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 136) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 136). In S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the content of the additional effect processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional effect processing (S3307). This additional effect processing (S3307) is a process executed when the additional effect is selected as the effect during the jackpot in the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the additional effect is This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86 (a)) displayed when the game is executed.

This additional effect in-process (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3304: Yes) in the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142). That is, during the jackpot, the above-mentioned additional effect during production process is executed every time a new round is started. As a result, it is possible to select the fixed number display mode Dm4 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the running round number display mode Dm3.

Further, in this control example, as the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot (for example, 10 rounds) is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to add up the number of jackpot rounds (for example, 15 rounds). In this control example configured in this way, by executing the additional production process (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute an additional effect that reflects the content, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the additional production process (S3307) is executed, first, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set for the currently executing jackpot is read (S3501), and then In addition, all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included in the winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the processing of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the currently executing jackpot) and the winning information The total processing (S3508 to S3511) of adding up the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the above is executed. The total processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: No), the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The number of display rounds displayed as the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 (“10” in the case of FIG. 86 (a)) is read out (S3504), and the number of hit rounds read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The number of displayed rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the process of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds recognizable by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds that are determined to be executed internally, that is, the number of rounds that the player can recognize The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, the number of additional rounds is selected by referring to the number of additional rounds selection table 222d based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence or absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, and the number of display rounds is stored in the display round number storage area 223g. (S3506), the additional display process is executed (S3507), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the total process is executed. In this total processing, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3508), then the number of rounds read in the processing of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the processing of S3508 are used. The total number of rounds is calculated (S3509).

Next, the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g, that is, the number of display rounds displayed as the fixed number of fixed rounds display mode Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). In the case of a), “10”) is read (S3510), and the number of display rounds read in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the process of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds recognizable by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds that are determined to be executed internally, that is, the number of rounds that the player can recognize The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the process of S3506 described above, the additional display process is executed to end this process.

Among the processes during the additional effect (S3307) described above, the processes S3501 to S3511 are processes for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 during the execution of the additional effect. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to execute the process for setting the display mode of the effect related to the number of rounds at the optimum timing.

The execution timing and processing contents of the process for setting the display mode for displaying as the number of rounds display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. For example, in this control example, a new round is used. By configuring the process to execute the process during the additional production when is started, the process of determining the winning information (process of S3502 and S3503) and the process of setting the number of display rounds (S3504 to S3506, SS351 to S3506). Processing) and is configured to be executed integrally, but the above-mentioned determination processing of the winning information is executed in advance at the timing when the winning information command is received, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. It may be configured to execute the above-mentioned display round number setting process.

Further, in this control example, when the number of rounds command is received (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), the process during the additional effect is executed, but the additional effect is performed during the round game (interval period). It may be configured to perform intermediate processing. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the additional production during the round game (interval period) in which the amount of processing is relatively small during the jackpot where various control processes are executed, and the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to prevent the processing load of the above from temporarily increasing.

In this case, the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command that has already been received, and the above-mentioned additional effect processing is executed based on the determination result. Good. Further, in this control example, the additional production processing is executed every time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even number round or a multiple of 5 rounds) is started. It may be configured to be executed only in the above, or a lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect processing may be performed and the lottery result may be executed.

In this control example, the processes of S3501 to S3511 are executed every time a new round is started. For example, after the process of S3502, a new prize is won from the time when the previous round is started. A process for determining whether or not information has been added may be provided, and if new winning information has not been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing executed every round.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 144. When the process of S3506 is completed, next, the additional display process (S3507), which is a process for executing the effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506, is executed, and this process is terminated. Here, the additional display process (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional display process (S3507). This additional display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for the additional effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the process during the additional effect (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds in the jackpot is a predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, that is, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of display rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4) ) Is updated to the number of rounds immediately before the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5) (that is, 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds), and the next round (predetermined number of rounds n). ), A precursor effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) suggesting that the number of display rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4) is updated is executed.

When the additional display process (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds and 10 rounds) at which the number of rounds this time is the update timing of the number of rounds (timing to additionally display the confirmed number of rounds) , 15 rounds, which is a multiple of 5), and determines whether the number of rounds is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the number of rounds is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) this time (S3601: Yes), a precursor effect for displaying the confirmed number of rounds in the next round (Fig. 85 (b)). ) Is executed, the corresponding additional display selection command is set (S3602), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, the effect mode of the above-mentioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85B) is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g. For example, the number of display rounds is stored. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, it is displayed in a production mode in which the number of "treasure boxes" displayed during the precursor production is reduced (see FIG. 86 (b)) or during the precursor production. A production mode (see FIG. 86 (b)) is displayed, which is a luxurious display mode of the “treasure box”. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the effect content of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

In this control example, the effect mode of the precursory effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223 g, but other than that, for example, it is internally determined. It may be configured to set the production mode of the precursory effect based on the number of rounds (when the number of consecutive villas in the hold is fixed, the number of rounds including the number of rounds set in the jackpot in the hold). As a result, the player can predict the number of rounds that are internally determined based on the effect mode of the precursor effect and the effect mode of the additional effect that adds the number of display rounds, and is executed during the jackpot. You can continue to be interested in the production.

Further, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the precursory effect, the player can develop the additional effect performed during the jackpot in the future. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed. For example, the display of the "arrow (selected image Dm8)" for selecting the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" is used. The mode (for example, color or size) may be changed, or the lighting pattern of voice or LED may be changed. Further, it may be configured so that the period during which the precursor effect is executed is different.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3601, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), then the number of rounds this time is n rounds (S3601: No). It is determined whether it is the 5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603), and if it is determined to be the nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of display rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223 g is set (S3604), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not the nth round (S3603: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

The additional display command for display set in the process of S3604 described above is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221). Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display additional display command, the display control device 114 displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the number of display rounds set in the process of adding to a specific round (number of rounds n) is displayed (the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is changed (added)). However, the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 may be changed (added) at other timings, for example, for determining whether or not to add and update the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4. The lottery means may execute the lottery every time a new round starts, and set the timing to execute the effect of adding and updating the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to make the timing at which the content of the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 is updated irregular, and it is possible to continuously play the game during the big hit while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Return to FIG. 142 to continue the description. If it is determined in the process of S3306 that the additional effect flag 223h is not on (off) (S3306: No), it is not necessary to execute the process during the additional effect (S3307), so that the processes of S3307 and S3308 are performed. It skips and executes the process of S3309 described above, and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3310). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), the display ending command is set (S3311), the jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the jackpot post-effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the after-hit effect setting process (S3312). In this jackpot post-effect setting process (S3312), the effect executed during the jackpot is continuously executed during the period when the jackpot ends and the special symbol is changed, and the effect is executed during the jackpot. This is a process for setting a post-hit effect corresponding to the executed effect.

When the jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the jackpot is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that the effect is for addition (S3702: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is prize information that has won a big hit in the prize information storage area 223a (whether or not the villa is on hold) (S3703).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information that won the jackpot (S3703: Yes), a command after the jackpot for display is set (S3704), and this process is terminated. That is, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that won the jackpot (S3703: Yes), all the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 of the process during the additional production (S3307) of FIG. 144 is displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the additional effect continues until the next jackpot is executed (until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information is completed). Set the additional effect after jackpot command for display so that it is displayed.

The display additional effect jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command after the jackpot for the additional effect for display, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the additional effect for display while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. 88 (a)). With this configuration, even after the jackpot is finished, the effect executed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In this control example, the number of display rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) even for the number of rounds set for one jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). Because of the configuration, from the effect content of the additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it may be that the additional effect is executed during one big hit, or a plurality of big hits (the first big hit). It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect that is executed during the special symbol fluctuation period) that is executed from the end to the start of the second jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of jackpots won or the number of rounds set for one jackpot in an incomprehensible manner while the additional effect is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to continue the additional effect for a long time (the jackpot continues for a long time).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 146. In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is no winning information that won the jackpot (S3703: No), all of the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 of the process during the additional production (S3307) of FIG. 144 is the number of display rounds. The additional effect flag 223h is set to off (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not an additional effect (S3702: No), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is a continuous hit effect. (See FIG. 84). Here, if it is determined that the effect is for continuous hitting (S3707: Yes), a command after the large hit for continuous hitting effect for display is set (S3708), and this process is terminated.

The display continuous hit effect jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command after the continuous hit effect jackpot for display, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the continuous hit effect while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. To do. With this configuration, even after the jackpot is finished, the effect executed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the effect is not continuous hit (S3707: No), that is, when the normal hit effect is executed during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is in a probable change or a time saving state. If it is determined whether or not there is (S3709), and if it is determined that the state is probable or shortened (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and "4000" is set as the value of the elapsed time counter 223k. Set (S3711) and end this process.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the effect during the jackpot is selected with reference to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c shown in FIG. 115 (c). As shown in FIG. 115 (c), the normal winning effect is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time when the holding ranks "1" to "4" are all, that is, when the big hit is won. It is configured as an effect that can be executed whether the (holding symbol) contains the information that the jackpot has been won (when the holding is in the villa) or not (when the holding is not in the villa). There is.

Then, when the game state after the end of the big hit in which the normal hit effect is executed is a probability change or a time saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to on, and the ending display displayed during the big hit is set to a predetermined value after the end of the big hit. It is displayed until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89 (a)). With this configuration, the special symbol is changed while the jackpot ending display is displayed, and if the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the ending display screen (Fig. 89 (Fig. 89 (Fig. 89)). b) See). As a result, even when the normal hitting effect is executed, it is possible to give expectations to the reserved inner consecutive villas, and when the reserved inner consecutive villas are executed, the effect during the big hit can be continuously executed.

Further, in this control example, as the period during which the jackpot ending display is continuously executed even after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or 4 seconds after the jackpot ends until any of the conditions is satisfied. The period is set, and by setting the value of "4000" in the elapsed time counter 223k in the processing of S3711, the time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot (after the special symbol can be changed). I try to count.

By setting the period for executing the jackpot ending display based on the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot, for example, instead of setting it based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (for example, 4 times), for example, the jackpot Even when the change of the special symbol is not executed after the end (when the special symbol is not held), the jackpot ending display can be executed only for a limited period.

In this control example, if the special symbol is not changed after the jackpot ends and the elapsed time from the jackpot end has passed a predetermined period (4 seconds), the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be displayed.

In the processing of S3709, if it is determined that the game state after the end of the big hit is not a probability change or a time saving state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the big hit is continued during the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed after the big hit. The value of the display round number storage area 223 g is cleared (S3712), and this process is terminated without executing the process of displaying.

Return to FIG. 142 to continue the description. If it is determined in the process of S3310 that the ending command has not been received (S3310: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3313), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether the status command has been received (S3213), and it is determined that the status command has been received. (S3213: Yes) extracts the current game state from the received command and stores it in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

In the process of S3214, when the state specification command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current gaming state is received. Separately, a process of storing the game state set after the jackpot ends is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state and the state specification command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is completed) can be separated. Can be remembered. In addition, after the jackpot ends, a state command indicating the current game state will be received. At that time, the contents of the state command indicating the current game state and the contents of the state specification command indicating the planned game state will be received. You may use a configuration in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the commands match is provided, and whether or not the game state is properly set is determined based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of variably setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

If it is determined in the process of S3213 that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S3114). This variation display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3813 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S3802), and then in the processing of S3203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140). , The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from RAM 223.

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803: Yes), the extension management process is executed (S3804), and S3811 Move to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect that continues (extends) the ending display during the jackpot even after the end of the jackpot. A detailed description of this extension management process (S3804) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is not set to on (set to off) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e. Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic change or a time saving state (S3805). If it is determined that the state is a probability change or a time saving state (S3805: Yes), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to the process of S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting an effect mode of a continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in a probable change or a time saving state. A detailed description of this continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a probabilistic change or a time saving state (S3805: No), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the expectation degree effect based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. Determine (S3807). If it is determined in the process of S3807 that it is a fluctuation pattern for executing the expectation degree effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation degree effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to the process of S3811. The expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting an effect mode (see FIG. 102) for suggesting an expectation degree that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit. A detailed description of this expectation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3807, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the expectation degree effect (S3807: No), the current fluctuation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. If it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is to be performed (S3809), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern for executing the countdown effect (S3809: Yes), the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811 Move to the processing of. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) notifies the player of the timing at which a specific effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result of this special symbol is highly expected to be a big hit during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 98). A detailed description of this countdown effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

In the processing of S3809, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: No), or when the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, and S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

When the processing of S3812 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3813: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. The process (S3114) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), it is acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223f. The hit information (the number of rounds of the jackpot, the information on the game state set after the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot type is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, if it is determined that the type is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3818 as it is.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and the display stop type command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set based on the set stop type (S3819). ), End this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 of FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), among the end conditions of the jackpot ending display that is continuously displayed after the jackpot ends, a process of managing whether or not the end condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the fluctuation counter “5” is set as the display end condition (display extension end condition) of the jackpot ending display in the value of 223j (S3902), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3901, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 0 (1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to 4th time after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. When it is the timing to set the variation display for the second time, the value of the variation counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is “1” (S3904). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223j is "1" (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display of the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If this is the case, since one of the display extension end conditions, "up to 4 special symbol fluctuations", is satisfied, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S3905), and this process is terminated. To do.

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter is not "1" ("2" or more) (S3904: No), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is performed. finish. With this configuration, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension while the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, the fluctuation corresponding to the next special symbol fluctuation is performed. The display extension flag 223i is set to off at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from ending during the variable display of the special symbol, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, when a probability change or a time saving state is set after the big hit ends, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (special fluctuation pattern table 202d4) is used for a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the big hit ends). , A short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the upper limit (4) after the end of the big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (4 rotations) is set as the end condition of the extension effect rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds). Based on the termination condition is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period when the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, many special symbols are changed to see a special effect (see FIG. 89 (b)), and the game is always held with the reserved ball secured. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the end conditions of the extended effect, the effect update process (every 1 msec) executed periodically (every 1 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 136) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is executed in S3112). A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

Next, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting an effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the probability change or the time saving state. Specifically, as the continuous production (battle production), the production mode of the final mode production (battle reach) that notifies whether or not the probability change or the time saving state ends, and the final mode production (battle reach) are executed. The production mode of the production up to (pre-battle production) is stored in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct, the fluctuation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle production. The process of setting with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h is executed.

In this control example, the above-mentioned continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the probability change or the time saving state ends. With this configuration, if the probability change or time saving state continues for a long period of time, one continuous production (battle production) will be delayed and each production (for example, battle production) executed during the continuous production (battle production) will be delayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the continuous value (HP value) from being increased or decreased) from being lowered.

In addition, when the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final mode effect (battle reach) occurs at a timing when the game state does not change from the probability change or the time saving state, the final mode effect (battle reach) "Draw" is selected as the production result of (Battle Reach), and the pre-battle production is configured to start again. In this way, in the configuration where the continuous production is repeatedly executed, one continuous production period is long. If you try to suppress the change, the final mode production (battle reach with victory or defeat) to show that the game state shifts, and the final mode production other than the final mode production (draw battle reach) are frequently executed. , There was a problem that the player got tired of the final mode production at an early stage.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) since the last final mode effect (draw battle reach) was executed is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol). If the number of fluctuations is less than 6 times), the final mode effect (draw battle reach) without winning or losing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the production at an early stage because the draw battle reach is frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in this control example, it is configured to suggest to the player the result of the hit / fail judgment in the hold of the special symbol and the remaining period of the probability change or the time saving state depending on the effect mode of the draw battle reach. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entire continuous production.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when the probability change or the time saving state continues for a long period of time and the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, the continuous production (battle production) of a different production mode can be executed, and the player can perform the production early. It is possible to prevent getting bored with.

Here, to briefly explain the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in the variable display this time, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect or before the battle. A process for determining whether to execute the effect (execution effect selection process), and a process for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process (first effect mode setting process) or , The process of setting the effect mode of the battle reach (second (final) effect mode setting process) and the process of setting the effect mode are executed.

As described above, in this control example, every time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pre-battle effect or the battle reach in the current variation display. It is possible to smoothly switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current variation display is a hit variation (a variation in which a special symbol is won) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (S4001: No), then whether the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach can be executed). ) (S4002), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

In the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not on (S4004: No), that is, if the continuous effect is not executed, the continuous effect mode is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e (S4005). , The selected continuous effect mode is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m (S4006), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added by 1 (S4007), and the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

When it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is not on in the process of S4004 described above, the first variation display is set after the probability variation or the time saving state is set as the game state, or the previous variation display is the final. This is a mode effect (battle reach), and is a case where a new continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is set in the variable display this time.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect executed from the current variation display is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the continuous effect mode selection table 222e shows the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuous effect mode (modes 1 to 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223y3, and the selected continuous effect is selected until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed. Pre-battle production based on the mode is executed.

In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to off, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is pre-read, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the pre-reading result. Although the configuration is used to execute the process of setting the variation display mode based on the continuous effect mode set every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is read ahead. However, as long as the configuration is such that the effect based on the pre-reading result is executed, the configuration other than the configuration used in this control example may be used. For example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to off, the winning information storage area 223a may be used. The stored winning information is pre-read, and the display mode of the variable display executed this time based on the pre-reading result to the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are set in advance. It may be configured to do so.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4004 that the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or when the processing of S4008 is completed, the value of the continuation counter 223p is added by 1 (S4009). .. As a result, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q can be made different when the next continuous effect mode is selected, and it is possible to suppress the continuous selection of the same continuous effect mode.

In this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous effect mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (timing when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is 1), a specific condition (holding hit). ) Is satisfied, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added by 1 in order to enable the execution of a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), but the same continuous effect mode is continuous. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection.

For example, the value to be added to the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be determined by lottery (for example, the value from −5 to 5 is drawn by lottery). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity of selecting the continuous effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the operation result of the frame button 22 by the player, or the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot (the game state shifts to the normal state). The value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuous effect mode is selected.

After finishing the processing of S4009, the continuation value setting processing is executed next (S4010). The details of the continuous value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4011, an effect command indicating the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuous value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as the display effect command. ..

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the display control device 114 executes the display of the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81.

The processes S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) described above correspond to the execution effect selection process, and the processes S4004 to S4011 set the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode). It corresponds to the setting process).

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the current variation is a hit variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to the process of S4013. Further, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, when the pre-battle effect continues for 6 or more special symbol fluctuations, the process of S4013 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the effect mode of the battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014). The final display mode command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the final display mode command, the display control device 114 uses the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81 for battle reach (see FIG. 93 (a)). Is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

After finishing the processing of S4014, next, the continuation effect flag 223r is set to off (S4015), the continuation effect mode storage area 223 m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). , End this process.

As described above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations executed while the probability variation or the time saving state is set as the game state, and one specific one. It is configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) for special symbol fluctuations (hit fluctuations of special symbols and deviation fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds selected), but other than that. Also, for example, it may be configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) by using the variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) is displayed in each variation based on the prize information (win / fail judgment result and fluctuation pattern in the hold) stored in the prize information storage area 223a (based on the look-ahead result). It is good to configure it so that it corresponds to. As a result, the final mode effect (battle reach) that is executed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be smoothly executed.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the final mode effect (battle reach) is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations, a plurality of display modes displayed in the final mode effect (battle reach) are targeted. It may be configured to be set in advance for each special symbol change, or only the battle reach effect content, that is, the attack pattern and the effect result may be set in advance, and the increase / decrease display control of the continuous value (HP value) may be performed. May be configured to be set each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final mode effects (battle reach) that are preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuous value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). This continuation value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuation value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuation effect. In this control example, when setting the value of the continuation value (the value of the continuation value after the variable), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbol (the value of the hundreds digit of the opponent's HP) and the effect It is set so as to add up the value selected based on the lottery for (the value of the tens digit of the opponent's HP). This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displayed continuation value.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 continues based on the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. Determine if the pattern changes the value.

In this control example, as described above, the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a measuring means for measuring the number of times that the fluctuation pattern that does not change the continuous value is continuously selected is provided, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), it is forced. When the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measuring means is a specific number of times (for example, once), a change controlling means which does not change the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern is used. It may be provided. With this configuration, the continuation value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous production (during the pre-battle production), and the player gets tired of the production (pre-battle production), or the continuous value is frequently used. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the (HP value) is changed and the content of the production becomes difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player's frame button 22 and the pre-reading result of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Further, the continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuation value (HP value) selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. The frequency may be changed.

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the continuous value change timing (S4101: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: Yes), the hundreds digit value of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value) is selected. The continuation value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n (S4103). Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuation value is variable is the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main. It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104), and if it is determined to be 200 or more (S4104: Yes), the first When the effect value (tens digit value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) (S4105) and it is determined that the value is less than 200 (S4104; No), the second The effect value (tenth digit value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) (S4106). A continuation value is calculated by adding the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and 117 (c), the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 are selected effect values (values in the tens digit). ) Are different, the range of the effect value that can be selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is defined as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 can be selected. The range of the effect value is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, in the second continuous value subselection table 222g2, a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, for example, when "0" is selected as the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f in the pre-battle production, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n). Although "0" is set as the stored value, the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect value is not "0" (for example, "20"). ") This is a configuration for suppressing the display of the value and the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In this way, a configuration is used in which the value of the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In the normal case (continuation value is 200 or more), the continuation value (HP value) can be changed in both the plus direction and the minus direction, increasing the variation of the production and increasing the continuation value. When it is less than 200, the value of the continuation value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction to prevent the occurrence of contradiction in the production.

Then, when the processing of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (value of the tens digit) selected by either S4105 or S4106 are then displayed. To calculate the continuation value (HP value) (S4107), set the display summation command corresponding to the calculated continuation value (HP value) (S4108), and end this process.

As described above, in this control example, the variable management of the continuous value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increased / decreased) while the continuous effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (the value of the hundreds digit) and the continuation value selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g (the continuation value). The value of the tens digit) and the value obtained by the sum of the digits are not added, but only the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is used. With this configuration, the number of patterns for variably managing the continuous value (HP value) with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced. And the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, even if the continuation value (HP value) is variably managed only by the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value (HP value) is further controlled. ) And the display content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to differ from each other. Can be executed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g, and information (command) indicating the selected continuation value is displayed. Output to 114. Then, only the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and the increase / decrease management of the continuation value is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuation value.

A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, a display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, an attack pattern display mode to be executed. And the variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are set and displayed by the display control device 114. That is, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the total continuous value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuous value output from the voice lamp control device 113. The difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time is calculated, and the attack pattern display mode and the attack pattern display mode are calculated based on the calculated difference value. A variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

With such a configuration, the continuous effect can be suitably executed while reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a continuation value subselection table 222g for selecting the continuation value for the effect, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for the effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting the continuation value for the effect (for example, the continuation value subselection table 222g). With such a configuration, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Further, in this control example, when the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value for the effect is selected by referring to the continuation value subselection table 222g. Other configurations may be used. For example, even when the continuation value is not selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f (for example, in the case of S4104: No in FIG. 149), the continuation value for production (for example, the continuation value for production) ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the tens digit value). As a result, the increase / decrease display of the continuous value (HP value) executed during the continuous effect can be set in more detail, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, only the value less than the current continuation value (continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value increased from the current continuation value may be selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuous value is selected, the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not a normal attack effect but a continuous value. It is preferable to configure so that the recovery effect of recovering (HP value) is executed. In this way, by using the configuration in which the continuation value (HP value) is increased during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase / decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, and also to continue. It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit value (for example, "0") even if the value (HP value) is frequently changed (increased or decreased).

In this control example, the character's HP is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect, but in addition to that, a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous state (probability change or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player). ) May be configured to suggest to the player based on a value that changes whether or not it is set. For example, it is set based on the success rate (%) of the effect to be executed and the operation content for the frame button 22. The number of operations (times) to be performed may be used.

Further, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0", it is set as the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In order to prevent a value larger than "0" from being set, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), it is used for production. Although it is configured so that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, other configurations may be used. For example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0". May be configured not to execute the selection of the continuation value for the effect (selection using the continuation value subselection table 222g).

Further, as in this control example, among the different control devices (voice lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) performs a process of setting a rough effect content. In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing the process of setting the display mode of the specific effect on the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control) The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (voice lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) sets a rough effect content. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the permissible range, and if it is within the permissible range, the next effect content is set as it is. If the process is out of the permissible range, the information about the rough effect content set at the time of the previous effect content setting is corrected, and the process of setting the next effect content is executed based on the correction result. If the processing result is not received from the second control device (display control device 114) at the timing of setting the next effect content, the process of postponing the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, the next effect can be set for the player in accordance with the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114). It is possible to continuously execute the production without giving a sense of discomfort. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is out of the permissible range, the processing result is in a wider range than the error range set as the permissible range. If it is within the limit range, if the determination result is within the limit range, the effect can be continuously set by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, it is described above. It is advisable to forcibly end the production without making any corrections.

Next, the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808). This expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode displayed during the change effect of the special symbol, and determines whether or not the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, as the expectation degree effect, three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102 (a)) are displayed corresponding to the passage of time of the special symbol variation. Then, among the respective expectation display modes, the expectation increase mode Dk4 for changing any of the display modes to the display mode with high expectation is displayed, and any of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. Performs the effect so that is variable. In addition, a process of setting the display timing for setting the timing at which the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, since the timings at which the above-mentioned three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed are different, the expectation level increases depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed. The target of the expectation degree display mode in which the display mode changes depending on the mode Dk4 can be different. As a result, even when the same expectation increase mode Dk4 is used, different effect contents can be obtained only by changing the display timing of the expectation increase mode Dk4, and the storage capacity of the image data is reduced. can do.

In this case, only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data may be configured to be displayed in correspondence with an expectation degree display mode that raises the expectation degree. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect with a small amount of data.

Further, in this control example, the display modes that serve as the reference for the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are predetermined according to the level of the expectation effect mode. Thereby, the display modes of the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 composed of a plurality of combinations can be set, and the processing load of the display process can be reduced. Further, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is defined according to the expectation degree effect mode level, it is possible to prevent the degree of increase in the expectation degree from being biased.

In addition, it is set according to the final display modes of the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (display modes that can be displayed after the end of the expectation effect) and the expectation effect mode level, which are set based on the fluctuation pattern. Since the expected degree increasing mode Dk4 is displayed when there is a difference in any of the expected degree display modes from the standard display mode, the player is already shown a high degree of expectation. The effect can be executed while expecting that the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is changed to the display mode showing a higher degree of expectation.

When the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current degree of expectation is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i (S4201), and then the reference display mode is based on the expectation degree effect selection table 222j. The expectation degree effect mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation degree effect mode level, the display mode of each expectation degree display mode predetermined in the expectation degree effect mode level and the actual expectation degree effect mode (each expectation degree display set based on the fluctuation pattern). The difference from the display mode of the mode) is extracted (S4203).

When the processing of S4203 is completed, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference. The display timing of the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the differences for each expectation display mode are totaled (S4207), and the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expectation increase mode are determined based on the total difference (S4208), in order to display the expectation effect. The display expectation degree effect command is set (S4209), and the display good expectation degree target mode notification command for notifying the expectation degree display mode that is the target of the expectation degree increase mode is set (S4210).

To specifically explain the process of S4208 described above, first, the display mode determining process for determining the display mode (for example, “3UP”) corresponding to the difference value added by the process of S4207 is performed by the display mode determining means. Will be executed. Further, the expected degree display mode in which the difference occurs is discriminated by the difference discriminating means, a plurality of timings in which the expected degree display mode can be set are determined based on the discriminating result, and among the determined plurality of timings. One timing is configured to be selected based on the expected degree selected with reference to the expected degree selection table 222i. As a result, among a plurality of timings in which the difference between the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by the expectation increase effect. Therefore, since one timing can be set to set the expectation degree increase mode Dk4, it is possible to increase the variation of the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the above-described example, the display mode of each expectation display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. , The display mode of the expectation display mode Dk4 is set based on the expectation selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222i in advance, and the display content of each expectation display mode is determined based on the setting content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes the countdown effect. As a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the variable display, the countdown effect that accurately notifies the execution timing of the specific effect. The process of setting the effect mode, the process of setting the effect mode of the precursor effect for suggesting that the countdown effect is executed, and the process of determining the specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect are executed. To do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). When it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is not set on (set to off) (S4301: No), the suggestion effect can be executed among the plurality of specific effects included in the current fluctuation pattern. One specific effect set for the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects a and b (see FIG. 100 (b))) other than the specific effects (specific effects c (see FIG. 101)) that are executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestion effect. Set either.

After finishing the processing of S4302, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern (S4303). When it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern (S4303: Yes), the precursor display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (FIG. 100 (b)) is used as the start timing of the precursor effect. (See))) is set (S4304), and in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a non-winning (missing) fluctuation pattern (S4303: No), it is set as the start timing of the precursor effect. The precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) that suggests the execution timing of the specific effect can be set based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the variation.

In the above-mentioned example, a configuration is used in which the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is set based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the fluctuation, but based on other conditions. The start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be set. For example, the operation result of the player's frame button 22 and the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a may be determined. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) based on the result (look-ahead result), the time measurement result of the time measuring means (for example, real-time clock) for measuring the time, and the past game history. You may.

In this way, a plurality of timings (suggestion effect startable points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (precursor effect) are prepared in one variation display (variation pattern), and the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestion effect startable points is set based on the above, the degree of freedom of the suggestion effect to be executed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestion effect) is set in the process of S4304 or S4305, then the countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestion effect) ( S4306).

To specifically explain this process with reference to FIG. 100 (b), in the process of S4302, the specific effect targeted for the suggestion effect in the current variation display is executed as the specific effect a (30 seconds after the start of the variation). When the precursor display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set as the start timing of the precursor effect in the processing of S4304, the countdown period is 7 Seconds are set, and the specific effect targeted for the suggestion effect in the current variation display in the processing of S4302 is set to the specific effect a (specific effect executed 30 seconds after the start of the variation), and the precursor effect in the processing of S4305. When the precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set as the start timing of, 3 seconds is set as the countdown period.

Next, the timing at which the countdown effect is started (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the start timing of the precursor effect and the display timing of the countdown effect are The interval, that is, the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the process of S4307, it is determined whether the calculated interval (precursor effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode of the precursor effect (precursor). When a short effect mode is set as the effect mode) (S4309) and it is determined that the interval (precursor effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), a long effect is performed as the precursor effect mode. Aspects are set (S4310).

When the processing of S4309 or S4310 is completed, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, precursor effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: Yes), that is, when the winning information command processing (see S3210 in FIG. 141), the precursor effect has already been executed (plural). (When the precursor effect is executed across the variation display), the plurality of variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and then the above-mentioned process of S4311 is executed to end this process.

Here, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple variation effect setting process (S4312), a precursor effect continuous execution process for continuously executing the precursor effect executed during the previous variation display and a countdown effect for a specific effect corresponding to the precursor effect are set. The process to be executed is executed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display precursor command, the display control device 114 displays the precursor effect on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time as the start of the current variation (including a time difference to the extent that the player cannot identify it). With this configuration, it is possible to continuously display the precursor effect from the previous fluctuation display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example is a means for determining whether or not the precursor effect is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display ends (the precursor setting flag 223t is turned on from the voice lamp control device 113). When it is determined that the precursor effect is being displayed at the timing when the variation display ends, the precursor effect being executed is determined by the means for determining that a command indicating that the setting has been received) and the precursor effect being executed. The effect data storage area that temporarily stores the data together with the time data indicating the timing when the fluctuation ends, and the precursor effect data stored in the effect data storage area when the display precursor command is received, are stored in the previous effect data storage area. It has a restart display means for restarting and displaying from the time when the fluctuation display of is completed, and when a precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of precursor effects (for example, a car as a destination) is provided. It is possible to execute the effect of running toward (see FIG. 98 (a)) without interruption.

Further, in this control example, since it is configured to output a display precursor command as a display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, it straddles a plurality of variations corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) executed in. Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the special symbol variation ends is displayed. The continuous effect can be executed by using the processing, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In such a configuration, when the continuous effect of continuing the dynamic display even during the stop period of the special symbol (symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds)) is executed, it is based on the variation pattern command. A continuous effect of a length obtained by adding the above-mentioned symbol determination period to the calculated fluctuation time is set. As a result, the continuous effect can be smoothly executed even during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, that is, during the period between the continuous fluctuation patterns.

In addition, when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a configuration other than this control example may be used as long as the configuration can be executed so that the series of precursor effects is not interrupted. For example, Execute the precursor effect without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variation display, and set the end timing of the precursor effect based on the timing when the countdown effect is executed in the current variation display. It may be configured as.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 153. When the processing of S4403 is completed, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to off (S4405), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the effect update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101). When it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0) (S5101: No), that is, when the elapsed time count is not executed, the process related to the measurement of the elapsed time is performed. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is subtracted by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (1 or more) (S5103: No), the process proceeds to S5108 as it is.

When it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 in the processing of S5103 (S5103: Yes), then the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S5104), and the special symbol is currently changing. It is determined whether or not there is (S5105). In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: No), a normal display effect for notifying the display control device 114 that the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot is finished. A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5107. With this configuration, when the extension effect (the effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot) is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed) which is one of the end conditions of the extension effect. ) Is established, if the special symbol has not changed, the extension effect is immediately terminated, and if the special symbol has changed, the display extension flag 223i is set to off, and the next special symbol change starts. Sometimes the extension production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extension effect suddenly ends during the change of the special symbol and confuses the player, and at the same time, a complicated effect setting process when the extension effect ends during the change of the special symbol can be performed. Since it is not necessary to execute it, the processing load can be reduced.

In the process of S5108, other processes related to the update of the effect are executed. Specifically, for example, a process related to the effect based on the time information acquired from the real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 155) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the present boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) in this way, all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 155. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simple display setting process so that the image at power-on is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140, and the main instruction was to start the variable effect. When the control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple variation effect is produced. It can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (a). FIG. 157 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). FIG. 157 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (off) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (a). FIG. 159 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501). Here, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, when the precursor effect is continuously executed from the previous fluctuation, the precursor effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation. In order to do so, the variable display data table corresponding to the precursor effect is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to off (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is displayed. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extracted information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursor effect executed during the previous special figure change is configured to be executed in the current special figure change. .. As a result, the precursor effect can be smoothly displayed even when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In this control example, the content of the precursor effect executed during the previous fluctuation is memorized, and the continuation of the memorized precursor effect is executed in this fluctuation, but other configurations are used. For example, the display data table corresponding to the precursory effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is discriminated, and in this change, the previous change is performed. It may be configured to execute the effect block set next to the effect block executed in. This makes it possible to simplify the management of precursory effects that are executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, in this control example, as the precursor effect that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor effect for two fluctuations can be executed. Therefore, in the processing of S6501, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. If it is determined that this is the case, this fluctuation will be the end fluctuation of the precursor effect, so the precursor effect flag 233m is set to off in the processing of S6503. For example, the precursor effect is 3 fluctuations or more of the special symbol. A counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period during which the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to be on (the number of fluctuations of a special symbol) if it is configured to be executed across the above. And a storage means (for example, a means for storing the number of times the effect is continued) for storing how many fluctuations the precursor effect being executed continues, and a value of the precursor effect counter each time the variation pattern command process is executed. Is updated, it is determined whether the updated value matches the value stored in the effect continuation number storage means, and if it is determined that the updated value matches, the precursor effect flag 233 m may be set to off.

In the processing of S6501, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233m is not on (off) (S6501: No), or when the processing of S6503 is completed, the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command is next. A variation display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the variation effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ((not shown). S6504).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6504, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6508), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is changed by the process of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6505 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is obtained. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, when the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), the variation display data table corresponding to the precursor effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command are used, respectively. Is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the precursor effect is preferentially displayed at the place where the display data overlaps. Specifically, when the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided with priority over the layer in which the normal variable effect is executed and displayed, and the display process is executed for each layer, the precursor is executed. The content displayed on the production layer becomes visible to the player.

It is sufficient that the mode corresponding to the precursor effect is displayed with priority over the mode corresponding to the normal effect, and as a method other than the above-mentioned example, the display data for the precursor effect and the received variation pattern command are used. It may be configured to discriminate from the display data for the normal effect set based on the above and set only the display data to be visually recognized by the player in the display data table buffer.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variable type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). FIG. 159 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S6603) to end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display hit related command among the unprocessed commands. This display hit-related command is a command that is referred to when a jackpot is won. Specifically, a display opening command for indicating the start of a jackpot, a display round number command, and a display ending. It is executed when a command etc. is received.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (S6409). The hit-related command process (S6409) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the hit-related command processing (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701), and if there is a display opening command (S6701: Yes), the opening command processing is executed. (S6702), this process is terminated. A detailed description of this opening command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 161 (a). On the other hand, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

If it is determined that there is a display round number command in the process of S6703 (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process is terminated. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161 (b). Then, in the processing of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and if there is a display ending command (S6705: No). Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process is terminated. A detailed description of this ending command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. If it is determined that there is no display ending command in the process of S6705 (S6705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening command process (S6702) executed in the hit-related command process of FIG. 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6803). S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S8702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is set to the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) are completed. Since it is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, if the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect ends. After that, a lot of waiting time is generated from the time when the ending effect is started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (16 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. , Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, which may give the player anxiety or discomfort as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Absent. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in this control example, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation is not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command process. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number production table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect of the data table storage area 233b. It is read from the table storage area (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command processing, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the back is determined. If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S6411). This rear image change command process (S6411) executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process (S6411), first, the rear image change flag is set to on (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear A to C and special rear A to C corresponding to the time effect), the rear corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command. The image discrimination flag is turned on, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to other back image types is set to off (S7102) to end the rear image change command process and return to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is changed. Specify the back image type of. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data is displayed. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is rear A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back side A to C or the special back side A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed depending on the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the back image is specified. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the above is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more rear image change commands may not be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and there is an error command. If (S6412: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (b). FIG. 163 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (S6413), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to on (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, the process corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the continuation value-related command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing continuous value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value-related command process (S6415) executes the process corresponding to the continuation value-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the continuous value related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total is stored in the total value storage area 233k. The value (the total value set when the previous command was received) is read out (S7302), and the difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured so that the total value indicated by the command received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed can be stored in the order in which the command is received. Further, the difference value calculated in the process of S7303 is also memorable.

As a result, for example, when the received total value values continuously satisfy the predetermined conditions (for example, when 7 is continuously added to any of the total values), it is calculated in the processing of S7303. A special attack pattern display data table can be set when the values of the differences are continuously a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more).

When the processing of S7305 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7309), the continuation value-related command processing is terminated, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, only the command indicating the total value of the continuous value (HP value) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and the total value set in the previous continuous value related command processing is output. , And the value of the difference is discriminated on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed by the display control device 114 based on the discrimination result. Running. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 while diversifying the display of the continuous value (HP value) in the continuous effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 is a difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. The configuration is such that the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means is set, but the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a means for setting a first continuation value (a continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) in order to change the continuation value (HP value). Then, all the other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value subselection table 222g) for changing the continuation value (HP value)), the sum previously set. A difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the total value set this time, and a means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Display control device 114 Or, among the above-mentioned means, only the attack pattern may be set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expected degree effect related command (S6416), and it is determined that there is an expected degree effect related command. (S6416: Yes) executes the expectation degree production related command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation degree effect-related command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a command process related to expectation effect (S6417). This expectation degree effect-related command processing (S6417) executes a process corresponding to the expectation degree enshutsu-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the expectation degree effect-related command processing (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation degree effect-related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7402, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, in the expectation degree effect setting process (see S3803 of FIG. 151) set and executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the display mode at the start time of the expectation degree effect (see FIG. 102 (a)) , A display mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) which is an effect result (final display mode), a display expectation effect command for indicating, and an expectation display mode to be notified in the expectation effect. The display expectation target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103 (b)) and the information indicating the display timing are set.

Then, in the command processing related to the expectation degree effect (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode (see FIG. 102 (a)) at the start time of the expectation effect is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation effect is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation increase effect is displayed. (See FIG. 102 (b)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the current expectation increase effect includes information for notifying the expectation display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. Display at the timing. After that, the display mode (see FIG. 103 (a)), which is the effect result (final display mode), is displayed.

If the player can select which of the plurality of expected degree display modes to be displayed as the target of the expected degree increase effect, the selection result (correct answer or correct answer). A command for indicating (incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and whether or not to display the final display mode is determined based on the content of the received command. That is, when the player's selection result is correct, each information included in the display expectation effect effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) is processed by the expectation degree effect related command processing (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, out of the information included in the display expectation effect production command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing), the execution is performed as set in. The setting information related to the display of the final display mode is cleared, and the display process is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 158. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no command related to the expectation effect (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417). If it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect in the process of S6417 (S6417: Yes), the command process related to the countdown effect is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command processing (S6419). This countdown effect-related command process (S6419) executes a process corresponding to the countdown effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501), and when it is determined that there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501: Yes), that is, the previous fluctuation. When executing the precursor effect that continues from the display, set the additional precursor data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional precursor command for display in the display data table buffer (S7502), and correspond to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be transferred is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7503, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, when it is determined that there is no display use precursor command (S7501: No), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7507, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there is another display command, and if it is determined that there is another display command, each command is assigned. The corresponding process is executed (S6420). Here, as other display commands, for example, a display hold ball number command indicating an increase / decrease in the number of hold balls, and an effect (so-called continuous notice) targeting a specific change across a plurality of changes are shown. There is a continuous notice command for display and a time effect command for display indicating a time effect based on a measurement result by a time measurement means (so-called real-time clock) possessed by the voice lamp control device 113.

When the display hold ball count command is received, the new hold ball count flag is set to on. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received display number of reserved balls command, and the number of reserved balls is updated based on the extracted number of reserved balls to display the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Update display. Also, when the continuous notice command for display is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to on. Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubbles is extracted from the continuous warning command for display. Next, the continuous notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted distribution, and the continuous notice corresponding to the updated content is displayed.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image when the power is turned on is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the display data table buffer is set to 233d. Since the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235, S6502 In the process, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7601: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7602 and S7603 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7602), the error occurrence flag Is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, the pointer update process is executed (S7605). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7605). This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7801, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7803), and if it is a demo display data table (S7803: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7805), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7803: No). S7806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 167 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed by the processing of S7606 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position and the display coordinate position are set for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7609: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, in order to set the confirmation display of the third symbol, S7610- The process of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the definite display data table is read from the definite display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the content is cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7612).

When the processing of S7612 is completed, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing, from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, and the identification is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7609, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7609: Yes), the processes of S7616 to S7621 are executed in order to set the display mode of the demo effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7616). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7616: No), the demo display data table is read, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then the Full data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7619).

When the processing of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the on state is set to on (S7621), the main processing is completed, and the V-interrupt is performed. Return to the embedding process.

As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be automatically set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. First, FIG. 170A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S7902) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7901 (S7901: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7902), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (b). FIG. 170B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S8001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8001: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8002). In the process of S8002, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S8002 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8002: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S8003. Further, as a result of the processing of S8001, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S8003.

In the processing of S8003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S8003: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S8003 (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is displayed as a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S8102), and if it is the transfer data information (S8102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to the process of S8105.

Further, in the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S8102: No), the processes of S8103 and S8104 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S8107. Further, as a result of the processing of S8105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S8105: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S8107.

In the process of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S8107: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8107: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S8109). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S8110), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8111). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S8111, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The discrimination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S8113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S8113 (S8113: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S8202 (S8203). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol to the player, a specific effect (for example, "PUSH display" for operating the frame button 22 is displayed. As a suggestion effect for notifying the timing when a specific effect occurs, a countdown effect set based on the timing at which a specific effect is set, and a period from the start of the suggestion effect to the start of the countdown effect. It is configured to execute the precursor effect set to.

Therefore, the period for executing the suggestion effect (the period for executing the precursor effect) can be freely set as compared with the case where the suggestion effect for notifying the timing when the specific effect occurs is executed for a predetermined period. ..

In the first control example, the timing for starting the suggestion effect and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect can be selected from a plurality of types. With this configuration, it is possible to set various periods during which the suggestion effect is executed by various combinations.

Further, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing of starting the suggestion effect and the timing of executing the specific effect, and based on the determination result, the mode of the precursor effect or the countdown effect is determined. It is configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the effect to be executed in the future based on the content of the effect to be executed.

In addition, even based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, the mode of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is changed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is won, a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as the period for executing the countdown effect. As a result, depending on the mode of the countdown effect, the game can be performed while expecting that the variable display this time corresponds to the special symbol that has been won.

In addition, as an aspect of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, an aspect other than the aspect of the first control example may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the suggestion effect period is long. The mode may be set. In this case, a part of the effect mode is configured to be variable according to the period (suggestion effect period) in which the suggestion effect is executed, and the length of the suggestion effect period and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined for the player. It suffices to inform the correspondence in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, the color of the display mode of the character displayed during the suggestion effect is variable according to the length of the elapsed period (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color). It may be configured so that the step index (for example, the degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestion effect can be changed according to the length of the elapsed period.

Further, the jackpot expectation may be set to be different for each of the plurality of specific effects, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the target specific effect. In this case, a place where a specific effect can be executed is provided at a plurality of points during the variable display period, and a special symbol lottery is performed for the specific effect to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestion effect among the plurality of points. It may be configured to be set based on the result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after the player knows at what timing (the point during the variable display period) the specific effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed as the specific effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which effect is executed, and it is possible to entertain the suggestive effect until the end.

In this first control example, an effect mode (an effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect) is used to indicate the period of the precursor effect for the effect executed as the precursor effect among the suggestion effects. In this way, in addition to the effect for showing the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting the content of the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect to the player, and the variable display of this time. In the above, the effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect is executed may be set.

Further, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) and the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately. The suggestion effect can be executed so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Thereby, even for the specific effect set at the initial point of the variation display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the variation), the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set during the variation display immediately before the specific effect. As a result, the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect can be increased.

When the above-mentioned technique is used, a suggestion effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays based on the contents of a plurality of winning information already held and stored, or a variable display of a special symbol is executed. A means for discriminating a winning ball (a winning ball that becomes the next fluctuation) is provided while the ball is being played, and when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period, a suggestion effect is provided so as to straddle a plurality of fluctuation displays. It may be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the hold memory (when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first hold memory (hold memory used for the next change) occurs during the change, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of change displays. As a result, the chances of executing the suggestion effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol is generally configured so that a long fluctuation time is easily selected when a jackpot is won, and the longer the suggestion effect period in which the suggestion effect is executed corresponding to this, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. It is configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the jackpot expectation degree for the current fluctuation display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestion effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestion effect is started and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, so that the suggestion effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestion effect is started. It is configured in. Further, even if the suggested effect period is the same, the period during which the precursor effect is executed and the period during which the countdown effect is executed are variably configured. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect, one of the specific effects having different jackpot expectations can be selected.

In this first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect period of this time, the specific effect to be targeted, the period of the precursor effect, and the period of the countdown effect are used. Is predicted at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

In this first control example, as an effect mode executed during the countdown effect, a countdown display in which the numbers are regularly decreased (for example, every second) is used, but the timing at which the specific effect is executed is played. Any configuration may be used as long as it can accurately notify a person. For example, a plurality of divided areas are regularly filled (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. You may. In this case, the number of divided areas is a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Further, the configuration may be other than this.

In the first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as the display data displayed during the countdown effect, and is executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggestion effect to be performed, the corresponding amount of display data is displayed. By having the display data in this way, the storage capacity can be reduced.

In the first control example, the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is set based on the start timing of the specific effect set for the target variable effect, but the countdown is performed. It suffices if the end timing of the effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. For example, when the specific effect is executed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting is made based on the end timing of the specific effect. It may be configured.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestive effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the period (time) for executing the countdown effect is calculated back from the set end timing to set the countdown effect period. As a result, the countdown effect for a predetermined period can be easily set according to the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the above-described first control example, as the period for executing the suggestion effect, the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestion effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestion effect starts (the timing at which the precursor effect is started) and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started) is set in advance, and the timing at which the precursor effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to execute the display control so as to switch from the precursor effect to the countdown effect based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the precursor effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. Further, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the period during which the countdown effect can be executed is predetermined, and the countdown effect can be executed at the timing when the predetermined operation is executed for the frame button 22 during the precursory effect. It is preferable that the precursor effect is switched to the countdown effect only when the timing is reached, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 during the precursor effect is executed at various timings. With such a configuration, the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect may be executed during the precursor effect. By executing this pseudo countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the precursor effect has been completed, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect can be easily executed when the jackpot is won, so that the game can be performed while expecting that the executed countdown effect is a pseudo one. Until the countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) is completed, the effect that is continuously executed can be watched.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursory effect period executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursory effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration that does not determine the length to be executed may be used, and for example, an effect mode of the precursor effect may be set based on the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the precursory effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort at any timing as the effect mode executed as the precursor effect, for example. , It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule such as an effect that a car keeps running at a constant speed on a road.

By using such an effect mode, even if the precursor effect is executed without determining the length of the precursor effect period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Even when such an effect mode is used, as described above, the display mode (for example, color) of a part of the effect mode (in the above example, the car) is changed according to the elapsed period of the precursor effect. Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, the length of the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed may not be determined in advance, but only a part of the period may be determined. For example, it may be divided into a first precursor effect period of the first half portion and a second precursor effect period of the second half portion, and the length of the period may be determined in advance only for the second precursor effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a specific precursor effect only during a predetermined period (second precursor effect period) retroactive from the end timing of the precursor effect (start timing of the countdown effect), and more smoothly. The production can be switched from the precursor production to the countdown production.

As described above, in the above-described first control example, the gaming state is more favorable to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric support) (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)). The configuration is such that an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the time saving state (low probability, with electric support) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

Further, the above-mentioned battle production is composed of a production (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends, and a production (pre-battle production) for determining the production mode of the battle reach. It is configured. With this configuration, the battle is performed during a period other than when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is determined by the lottery of a special symbol that the gaming state shifts to the normal state). Since the production can be continuously executed, the player feels anxiety that the player is expected to continue the favorable game state and that the player is considered to have finished the favorable game state. You can continue to play the game while holding it in your arms.

Further, during the above-mentioned battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) for suggesting whether or not the gaming state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is executed. .. This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, and the like.

Here, when the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value (HP value) described above is increased to execute a variety of effects, the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. It was necessary to perform complicated management in which the remaining period and the displayed continuation value (HP value) were associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of the effect while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the above-mentioned expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, and the like ( The sum of the main continuation value (for example, the value of the 100th place) and the value set for the purpose of increasing the effect variation (the sub-continuation value (for example, the value of the tens place)) is continued. It was configured to be displayed as a value (HP value).

In this way, the display pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased by adding up the values actually managed and set and the values set in an effect manner.

Further, in the first control example described above, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually notify the player of the increase / decrease in the continuous value, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In the first control example, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value is "weak attack" as the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150), and the large difference amount (attack pattern). For example, it has "strong attack" as a display mode corresponding to (range of 350 to 550) and "medium attack" as a display mode corresponding to the difference amount between them (for example, the range of 151-349). , When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, the player roughly grasps the decrease amount (difference value) of the continuation value (HP) by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then concretely by the updated continuation value. Numerical value will be grasped. By displaying in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of information about the game step by step, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned first control example, when the above-mentioned display mode (attack pattern) is set in order to reduce the control load of the effect, the main continuation is not the difference value of the total continuation value (HP). It is configured to set the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the values. With this configuration, the pattern of continuation values (continuation value before update, continuation value after update) or difference value used when setting the display mode (attack pattern) can be reduced.

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuation value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuation value, the continuation value (third symbol) on the display is set. The difference value of the main continuation value and the sub-continuation value displayed on the display device 81) and the difference value of the main continuation value do not match, and the display mode is different from the apparent range of the difference value. There was a problem that the (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the first control example, when the continuous value (HP) value is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value of the continuous value (HP) on the display and the main continuous value are used. The difference value of is configured so that the set display mode (attack pattern) is the same. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, a main continuation value discriminating means for discriminating the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and the sub-continuity value set for the effect is set based on the discriminating result of the main continuation value discriminating means. The selection table for selection is configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the main continuation value is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or more, the selection table in which "-20 to +20" is defined as the range that can be selected as the sub-continuation value is referred to and predetermined. If it is less than a value (for example, 200), a selection table in which "-30 to 0" is defined as a selectable range as a sub-continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, when the main continuation value becomes 0, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the sub-continuation value.

In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle reach) are used to indicate the period (advantageous period) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. ) And the unit production (battle production) is configured to be executed. In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the unit effect described above is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while maintaining a sense of tension. ..

Further, by making it possible to execute the unit effect a plurality of times while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which one unit effect continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production content from being delayed.

In this first control example, as a condition for ending one unit effect (a condition for executing the second effect), the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (an opportunity for the advantageous period to end). In addition to the case where the lottery result is) or the remaining period of the advantageous period is 0, the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined number is used. As a result, the second effect is executed even when the advantageous period does not end, but the second effect is executed when other conditions are satisfied. May be good.

In addition, if the second effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player gets tired of the second effect early, so the first control In the example, it is suppressed that the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of the effect is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the unit effect is executed is counted, and when the counter value is less than the predetermined number of times, the pseudo second effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the second effect at an early stage.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation degree effect modes for gradually suggesting the expectation degree that the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit are provided, and any one of them is displayed as the expectation degree effect mode. It is configured to execute a variable expectation (increasing) effect that changes the effect mode to an effect mode in which the expectation level, which is a big hit, is set higher than the effect mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expected degree effect modes described above is configured so that the display timing is different, and the expected degree variable (increasing) effect determines which expected degree effect mode the expected degree is variable. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp.

In the first control example configured in this way, it is notified that the effect mode of any of the expectation effect modes is variable (increased) by executing the expectation variable (increasing) effect. In this state, the player is made to pay attention to the effect while expecting that the desired expectation effect mode (for example, the expectation effect mode in which the expectation degree is already set to be high) is further variable (increased). Can be done.

In the first control example, the target expectation degree effect mode is changed by changing the timing at which the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect is executed. Specifically, it is configured so that the expected degree effect mode displayed after the expected degree variable (increasing) effect is executed is targeted. As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the timing at which the variable expectation (rising) effect is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the expected degree variable (increasing) effect is configured so that the effect mode of a plurality of expected degree effect modes can be changed, and the variable amount to be changed for each expectation degree effect mode. It is configured to display a variable amount to indicate the total value of (steps). As a result, the expected degree variable (increasing) effect is executed, and after grasping that one of the expected degree effect modes is variable, the player can be made to grasp the amount by which the expected degree effect mode is variable in this effect. it can.

Further, after the variable expectation (increasing) effect is executed, the notification mode for notifying the player of the target for increasing the expectation in this effect is displayed, so that the player can be informed of the target expectation effect mode. It can be easily grasped.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation degree production modes having an effect mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation degree stepwise are provided, and the stages are configured and displayed so that each expectation degree effect mode can display different stages. It is configured to predict whether or not this change is a big hit by grasping the display contents of each expected degree production mode in combination.

With this configuration, it is possible to complicate the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting, but on the other hand, the display content of each expectation production mode can be displayed. There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Further, when the effect mode for increasing the expectation degree is biased, specifically, among the plurality of expectation degree effect mode, only one expectation degree effect mode can be changed to the effect mode indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high. If the remaining expectation production mode remains the production mode indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, the player will have excessive expectations for the jackpot winning, and the production content will be distrustful. There was a problem of giving.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in a plurality of expectation degree effect modes, the expectation degree effect mode before being changed by the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect is set in a plurality of patterns, and a special symbol is provided. It is configured to change (increase) the expectation degree of the expectation degree production mode set by the pattern according to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result of. With this configuration, the above-mentioned plurality of problems can be solved.

<Additional production example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181, an additional effect example of the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (title-giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content for the frame button 22 is added to the above-mentioned first control example. This title-giving effect was operated during the period when the operation effect requiring the frame button operation was generated, the number of operations of the frame button 22 (effective operation number) for the operation effect, and the operation effect was not executed. It is executed so as to make the privilege (title) given to the player different based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (the number of invalid operations).

By using such an effect, it is possible to provide the player not only to operate the frame button 22 as instructed but also to enjoy performing other operations (including non-operation), so that the player can play the game early. It is possible to prevent getting bored with.

Further, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 (for example, the effect of dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) is variable based on the privilege (title) given to the player. It is configured to let you. As a result, the operation effect is frequently displayed for the player who is enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, and the frequency of the operation effect is displayed for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. It can be lowered.

Further, as compared with the case where the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation effect in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation effect can be adjusted to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation effect executed during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operations performed by the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173 (b) is an effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversation effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents.

As shown in FIG. 173 (a), in this additional example, the accessory unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover the upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters "I can talk with the button PUSH" prompting the operation of the frame button 22 are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area Dm as if the accessory unit 450 is making a comment. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect capable of having a conversation with the character unit 450 is executed. The accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173 (b) (for example, a position lowered so as to cover the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, for example, a discriminating means for discriminating the accessory position and a comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in the display area corresponding to the accessory position determined by the discriminating means may be provided. .. As a result, the characters "Hello" can be displayed in the main display area Dm as if the character unit 450 is always commenting regardless of the position of the character.

Further, the discriminating means for discriminating the position of the accessory may be a means for directly detecting the position of the accessory unit 450 using a proximity sensor, a drive motor for driving the accessory unit 450, or a drive of the drive motor. A detection means for detecting the driving state (for example, the number of steps) of the transmission means (pulley or the like) for transmitting force may be provided, and the accessory position may be determined based on the detection result of the detection means, or the accessory unit. When the 450 is driven based on the operation scenario, a means for determining the position of the accessory based on the progress of the operation scenario may be used. When using the latter configuration, it is possible to grasp the future character position in addition to the current character position based on the content of the operation scenario, so the comment display position according to the character position can be changed. It can be set in advance. Further, the operation scenario of the accessory unit 450 may be configured to store information regarding the display position of the comment in advance, or a plurality of the above-mentioned means may be combined.

On the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (increased) based on the game history (game period, game result, production content, etc.), and in this additional example, "3rd grade" to "Sennin". Levels up to are provided in stages (see FIG. 176 (c)), and in FIG. 173 (a), the lowest level "3rd grade" is displayed.

The title is a privilege set based on the above-mentioned level (set value) and the operation content for the frame button 22. Although detailed description will be described later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set according to the game content (operation content of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173 (a).

In FIG. 173 (b), a comment is displayed from the accessory unit 450 and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 is increased based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173 (a). "Level 2" is displayed, and "half serving" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. The comment content of the accessory unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous information for the player (for example, the expected degree of hit during fluctuation and the current game state). Information about the game) is set to be easy to display. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

Next, the content of the accessory drive effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). FIG. 174 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory drive effect. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), when the accessory drive effect is executed, the characters "press the button and drop the accessory" are displayed in the main display area Dm as an effect to encourage the operation of the frame button 22. At the same time, an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Further, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "chance if dropped" suggesting the detection result of the accessory drive effect are displayed. During the period during which this accessory drive effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the frame button 22), when the frame button 22 is operated and the accessory falls to a position covering the main display area Dm, it is changing. It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol has won the jackpot. In this way, in the operation effect of operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to quickly detect that the jackpot has been won, thereby enthusiastically for the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, the frame button 22 is configured to be given different benefits (titles) depending on whether the frame button 22 is enthusiastically operated or not, so that when the operation effect is executed. In addition, the player can be made to select whether or not to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this additional example, since different benefits (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, even if the game is continuously played with one title system, the game is performed. It is structured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, since the title system is set according to the operation content of the frame button, all the benefits (titles) cannot be obtained unless the operation content of the frame button 22 is devised. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and can provide the player with various effects to be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22. The effect can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, in order to obtain various benefits (titles), it is necessary to set different title systems, so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the histories based on the games that have been played continuously are initialized, there is a risk that the motivation of the player will be lowered. ..

Therefore, in this additional example, the player has a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all the histories or delete the histories to the stage where different title systems can be set. FIG. 174 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen during this change operation.

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the main display area Dm, the characters "from the beginning" and a part of the history are set as the all-erasure selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection unit to be selected when initializing all the history. The characters "from the middle" are displayed as the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 indicating the selection unit to be selected when erasing. Here, when the all erasure selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set as initial values. This all erasure selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing the operation history of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected, the display traced back to the stage where different title systems can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, as long as the level (set value) is low, the same privilege (title) is given to any title system, and the level (set value) is given. When is higher, one of the plurality of title systems is configured to branch into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the content displayed retroactively when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected can be different depending on the level (set value) and title when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected. It should be noted that a title system that is not set unless the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected may be provided. As a result, it is necessary not only to add (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (decrease) the level (set value), so that it is possible to provide a more varied game.

As described above, in the first control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect straddling the multiple jackpot games is performed. (Continuous jackpot effect) is configured to be executed, and the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game is configured to suggest the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed to the player. However, if the gaming machine has a special gaming state other than the jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine having a small hit game in which the benefits that can be given to the player are set to be less than those of the jackpot game, the game machine has a small hit game during a predetermined period. When a small hit game or a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as a hit game) is executed a plurality of times, a hit effect (continuous hit effect) straddling the multiple hit games is executed. You may. As described above, in the above-mentioned first control example, the content explained for winning the big hit may be executed for the game result other than the big hit (for example, the small hit), and the content other than the big hit may be executed. The game results include various game results that have conventionally existed as well-known configurations.

Further, in the first control example, as a game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed, the player is suggested to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (in the hold memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by the winning effect executed during the winning game. For example, the number of jackpots (including small hits) won in the hold memory and the winning jackpot (including small hits) Benefits (including small hits), game status (probability change state or time saving state) after the end of the jackpot (including small hits) won in the hold memory, and multiple game results (big hits, small hits) If it is a target, it may be configured to suggest the type of the game result and the order in which it is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the content of the jackpot effect is changed based on not only the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed but also the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that With such a configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, it is possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and the player can be interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, as a jackpot continuous effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed based on the number of stored ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of stored ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed, a plurality of timings for suggesting (notifying) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the reserved memory) are different. It is configured so that the jackpot production of.

Among them, in the specific jackpot effect (additional effect) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (the number of entry information) of the special symbol is not the upper limit, new entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the entry information is obtained. When the jackpot is won, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed so as not to be noticed by the player.

In the specific jackpot effect described above, the jackpot game (multiple round games (for example, 15 round games)) executed during one jackpot is partially notified (for example, notification for 5 rounds). Since the effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player of how many rounds of the jackpot game has been executed in an incomprehensible manner while the specific jackpot effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the game state after the big hit in advance by the number of rounds set for the big hit game.

In this control example, the additional display of the jackpot game (additional display of the number of rounds) by the additional effect is configured to be executed every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). Then, the length of the inter-round interval period in the predetermined round is set to be longer than the length of the other inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the jackpot ends every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the special symbol fluctuation for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) executed after the jackpot is completed is configured to be executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period of the above and the special symbol fluctuation period between the jackpots.

In addition, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation period of the special symbol for a predetermined period executed after the end of the jackpot is always constant regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table that selects the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot is defined as 0.5 seconds fluctuation for the entire period if the lottery result is out, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, It is preferable to specify that the 1st rotation is changed by 2 seconds, the 2nd rotation is changed by 1.5 seconds, the 3rd rotation is changed by 1 second, and the 4th rotation is changed by 0.5 seconds. As a result, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol fluctuates four times or the period until the jackpot is won) is fixed (2 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol for four rotations after the end of the jackpot. be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to match the predetermined period (2 seconds) described above, the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the jackpot interval It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the special symbol change period.

Further, in the first control example, as a jackpot effect executed during the jackpot, a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot is won again within a predetermined period (in the hold memory) during the jackpot game (during the round game). Has a production. When this normal jackpot effect is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (special symbol 4 variation, or It is displayed continuously (for 4 seconds). Then, if the jackpot is won again within the period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the jackpot, the continuous hit effect in which the jackpot effect is started again via the end display mode is executed.

With this configuration, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation executed during the predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol or 4 seconds) after the end of the jackpot game is acquired after the end of the jackpot game. Even if the acquired ball entry information is a big hit, the continuous hit effect can be executed. That is, since the ball entry information acquired after the end of the jackpot can be included as the execution condition of the continuous jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot is continuously executed, the rate at which the continuous jackpot effect is executed can be increased. , The effect can be enhanced.

In this first control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on whether or not there is the winning information for winning the jackpot in the hold memory, but other than that, the hold memory If there is information on the winning ball to win the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic state) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed, and continuous based on the determination result. You may decide whether or not to perform the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is disadvantageous to the player is once set after the jackpot executed this time is completed, the player is given the game state as the game state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) is set, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the determination result.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, as in the second control example described above, in a gaming machine having a fall lottery configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the fall lottery is performed using the continuous jackpot effect described above. The lottery result may be notified to the player.

Specifically, a means for determining the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot, a means for determining the game state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a fall lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. A means for discriminating the lottery result of the above may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on the discrimination result of each of the above-mentioned discriminating means. The state is a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, the continuous jackpot effect is executed only when the game state of the special symbol has fallen due to the fall lottery, or the special symbol is high after the end of this jackpot. The continuous jackpot effect is configured or falls only when the probability state is set and it is determined by the fall lottery that the game state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state by the time the next jackpot is won. The game state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state by the lottery, and the continuous jackpot effect is executed when the game state of winning this jackpot and the game state of winning the next jackpot are in the high probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used, but the time when the jackpot game is executed. As long as the timing is after the jackpot game is confirmed to be executed, any timing may be used. For example, the timing at which the symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, or the jackpot game is started. It may be a predetermined timing within the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the jackpot effect. Further, the timing at which the change of the special symbol won by the jackpot starts or the predetermined timing within the period during which the change is executed may be used.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support), the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)), and the time saving state (low probability, with electric support). )), The effect (battle effect) for indicating that the game state is continuing is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

<About the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the ROM 222 in this additional example is a point in which the contents of the variation pattern table 222a are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114). The difference is that the title system selection table 222aa, the title selection table 222ab, and the accessory operation level selection table 222ac are added. Other configurations are the same as ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176 (a), the contents of the variation pattern table 222a for the accessory operation added in this additional example will be described. FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a (for accessories). As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the variation pattern table 222a (for accessory) includes the accessory operation level (1 to 3) selected by the accessory operation level selection table 222ac, which will be described later, and the extracted variation pattern (1 to 3). The accessory operation frequencies (low) to (high) and (none) are defined in association with a to z). With this configuration, even when the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the accessory operation frequency can be changed.

Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of the valid operation and the invalid operation of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio at the time of executing the operation effect.

FIG. 176 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. In this title selection table 222ab, the current level (set value) ("3rd grade" to "Sennin") and the title, which is a privilege given to the player in association with the title system (1 to 3), are defined. There is. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 176 (c), while the level (set value) is low (3rd grade to 1st grade), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set, so that the player is currently It is not possible to grasp the set title system. Therefore, the title system currently set is grasped immediately after the game is started, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation of changing the title system.

Next, the contents of the accessory operation level selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 177 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory operation level selection table 222ac. The accessory operation level set in the accessory operation level selection table 222ac is referred to when using the variation pattern table 222a (for the accessory) described above with reference to FIG. 176 (a).

As shown in FIG. 177 (a), the accessory operation level selection table 222ac defines the accessory operation level in association with the set value (level) and the title system, and in particular, a plurality of title systems. Of these, only in the title system 3 where the set value can reach "Sennin", the accessory operation level 3 is configured to be selectable. In this way, by providing the accessory operation level that is selected only when the level (set value) is raised while a specific title system is set, the accessory operation executed during the fluctuation effect can be achieved. It is possible to give a special feeling and enhance the effect of production.

FIG. 175 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), the RAM 223 in the present modification is different in that the effect setting group 223aa is provided for the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example described above. .. Other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (b). As shown in FIG. 177 (b), the effect setting group 223aa includes an operation effect number counter 223aa1, an effective operation number counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a set value storage area 223aa5, and an invalid operation number. The counter 223aa6, the change flag 223aa7, and the accessory operation level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

The operation effect number counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times the operation effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) determines that the operation effect count counter 223aa1 is a variation pattern for executing the operation effect (S3851: Yes in FIG. 178), the operation effect counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 and the frame button is input. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The effective operation count counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the effective operation count counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation effect, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. (See 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), which is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179). , Also referred to when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In this additional example, the value of the effective operation count counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation effect. For example, the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. It is determined whether or not the operation conditions such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the case of an operation effect to be performed, and the success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times at the right time are satisfied. Then, when the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation count counter 223aa2 may be added by 1. As a result, the counter value can be fairly added regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Further, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added regardless of the instruction content (pressing, repeated hitting, timing pressing, long pressing, etc.) of the operation effect for the frame button 22. However, for example, the effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of the operation effect for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 can be classified in more detail, so that the content and frequency of the operation effect can be changed to those more suitable for the player. Can be done.

In the operation ratio storage area 223aa3, all operations of the frame button 22 are performed based on the value of the valid operation count counter 223aa2 (value of the valid operation count) and the value of the invalid operation count counter 223aa6 (value of the invalid operation count) described later. This is an area for storing the ratio of the number of effective operations (button operation ratio) to the number of times. The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated by S5060 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated by the processing of S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing the title system selected by using the title system selection table 222aa described above.

The set value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing the game content and the level (set value) set based on the change operation.

The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation valid period (the operation valid period of the frame button 22 during the operation effect).

The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to be turned on when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected by the change operation. When this flag is set to ON, an effect suggesting to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system is executed.

The accessory operation level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the accessory operation level selected by using the above-mentioned accessory operation level selection table 222ac. The appearance frequency of the accessory operation effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222a (for the accessory) with reference to the accessory operation level stored in the accessory operation level storage area 223aa8.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described. The same elements as the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the variation display setting process 2 in this additional example will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 in this additional example. In each of the variable display setting processes 2 of this additional example, S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817, the same processes as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed.

When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example described above are executed, and then the variation pattern of this time is executed. Is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect count counter 223aa1 is added by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the process of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the accessory operation level (S3851). Specifically, a variation pattern table for accessory operation (FIG. 176 (FIG. 176)) based on the accessory operation level selected based on the accessory operation level selection table 222ac and the extracted variation patterns (az). The accessory operation frequency specified in a)) is set, and the current variation display mode (variation effect display and presence / absence of accessory operation) is determined. Among the variation display modes determined here, the display variation pattern command is set by the process of S3812 for the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the display control device 114 is notified, and the content related to the accessory operation is a command output process (see FIG. 139) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113. S3102) sets a bonus operation command to be notified to the device (other device 228 (see FIG. 4)) that drives and controls the bonus unit 450. When the process of S3853 is completed, the same processes of S3812 to S3817 as those of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). Here, if the pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051: Yes), then it is determined whether the current period of the operation effect is the valid period of the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) (S5052). When it is determined that the conversation effect is valid (S5052: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation count counter is added by 1 (S5054), and S5060. Move to the processing of.

The display pressing command set in the process of S5053 is configured to set the content of the command based on the position of the accessory unit 450, the accessory operation level, and the selected title. Sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the character unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the character operation level and the selected title. Is set. The display press command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the display control device 114 displays a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 in the third symbol display device 81, so that the accessory does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to display an effect as if talking with the unit 450.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation valid period of the conversation effect, a display pressing command is set and a comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, when the accessory unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covering the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the accessory unit 450 and the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation effect (comment display) based on the discriminating result may be configured to be different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22. That is, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display showing the jackpot expectation degree). When it is determined that the display areas (display areas indicating the stopped symbols) overlap, the timing at which the above-mentioned display areas do not overlap, that is, the position of the accessory unit 450 moves. The comment is commented until the display area of the comment is variable, or the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 progresses and the display area of the main part is variable so that the display areas do not overlap. May be configured to delay the display of.

With this configuration, both the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects, can be suitably executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done. It should be noted that, without using the above-described configuration, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, If it is determined that the display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit and the display area indicating the symbol to be stopped overlap with each other, the conversation effect may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5052, when it is determined that the period is not the valid period of the conversation effect (S5052: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the effective period of the accessory operation effect among the operation effects (S5055). When it is determined that the valid period of the accessory operation effect is (S5055: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5056), and the value of the valid operation count counter is added by 1 (S5054). , S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the valid period of the accessory movement effect (S5055: No), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057:). Yes), the change process is executed (S5508), and then the process proceeds to S5060. The content of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

Here, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that the change is not in the valid period (S5057: No), since the pressing operation this time is not in the valid period of the operation effect, the value of the invalid operation count counter 223aa6 is added by 1. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, the effective operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation count counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation count counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and the effective operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. Store in (S5062). After that, the title setting process is executed (S5063), and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the change process (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the change operation (see FIG. 174 (b)), and various information is executed based on the operation contents of the player. This is a process for clearing (information on the title system, set value (level), button operation ratio referred to when selecting the title system, and information on the effective operation ratio).

When the change process (S5508) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation content of this time is all reset (whether all erase selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). When it is determined that all resets have been performed (S5101: Yes), all the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation effect count counter 223aa1 and the effective operation count counter 223aa2. All the values of the invalid operation count counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this process is terminated. As a result, all the information based on the operation contents of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173 (a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the reset is not all (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that the reset is partially performed (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to on (S5106), the information of the set value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. .. If it is determined in the process of S5105 that the reset is not partially performed (S5105: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, the title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

After that, the display setting value command is set (S5204), the title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and the display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207), and if it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223aa7 is set to off (S5209), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5207, if it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is not on (off) (S5207: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the above-mentioned additional example, the effect mode (for example, appearance frequency and effect content) of the operation effect, which is the effect for operating the frame button 22, is set to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ) Is variably configured. As a result, the desired effect mode is set without causing the player to feel annoyed, as compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation effect to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation history of the player, the operation effect can be set in order to make it possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players. Although a plurality of effect modes are prepared, the same operation (for example, when the operation effect is executed, the frame button 22 is always operated more than necessary amount) is repeatedly executed for the frame button 22. However, there is a problem that only the same production mode is set, and it is not possible to provide various operation effects to the player.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, different benefits (titles) are given to the player by accumulating the game contents, and the type of the benefits (title) is at least the player's frame button 22. It is configured to be different according to the operation content (operation history) to.

With this configuration, various operations are executed on the frame button 22 in order to obtain different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the contents of various operations executed on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating the game contents, a set value (for example, a level) is variably set stepwise according to the accumulation status of the game contents and set. It is common to use a configuration that grants benefits (titles) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, it is necessary to acquire more benefits (titles). There was a risk that the motivation to play would be reduced because it became impossible to play. Further, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be given is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. In this way, the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game contents, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Further, in the above-mentioned additional example, since the erasing means for erasing the past game contents is provided, the operation contents (operation history) executed in the past when a system different from the currently set system is set is set. It is possible to suppress the setting of the system based on. In this additional example, an erasing means for erasing the past operation contents (operation history) is used in order to prevent the system from being set based on the operation contents (operation history) executed in the past. , Other configurations may be used, for example, input that a different system setting is desired (input by executing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), and in that case, a predetermined period It may be configured not to set a new system until (the period of the operation history referred to when setting the system) has elapsed.

Further, in the above-mentioned additional example, as the erasing means, there are a total erasing means for erasing all the past game contents and the operation contents, and a partial erasing means for erasing a part. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the different system can set the past operation contents (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase to the state. As a result, when setting different systems, it is not necessary to restart the game from the beginning, so that the player can enthusiastically set different systems.

In this additional example, when the partial erasing means is operated, a configuration is used in which a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is erased and a process of setting an initial value as a set value (level) is executed. However, by operating the partial erasing means, it is better that a system different from the currently set system can be easily set rather than restarting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the full erasing means). The set value (level) may be continuously deleted and only a part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be deleted. Further, the player may specify a desired system and delete a part of the past operation contents (operation history) until the designated system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation contents (operation history) in order to set a system different from the currently set system, the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not properly operated for the effect, a different system will not be set, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Specifically, if the operation effect is digested in the same operation mode as before after operating the partial erasing means, there is a risk that the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means will be set. There is.

Therefore, in this additional example, a guidance notification means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set after operating the partial erasing means is provided. By digesting the operation effect based on the content notified by this guidance notification means, it is possible to easily set different systems. In addition, since the guidance notification means sets a different system, an operation content different from the conventional operation content is notified. Therefore, the operation effect is produced by digesting the operation effect according to the notification content by the guidance notification means. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation effect different from the conventional one, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

The content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may be simply a content that prompts an operation effect different from the conventional one, or a content that indicates a specific operation content to be executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is satisfied may be provided. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is digested so that different systems are set.

Further, it can be set only when a predetermined erasing means is operated when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions in the system set in the above-mentioned additional example. A system may be added. By providing such a system, for example, a dedicated system can be set only when the all erasing means is operated while the set value has reached the upper limit, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit value. In the case of the set value of, the dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

In addition, the system that can be set may be different based on the erasing timing by the erasing means. Specifically, when the erasing means is operated during a jackpot game or a specific variation effect is being executed. Only, a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned specific variation effect to be executed only when the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, and it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the above-mentioned additional example, a configuration in which a privilege (title) is set in advance corresponding to each setting value (level) of each system is used, but other configurations may be used and have already been acquired. A storage means for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage means.

In the above-mentioned additional example, as the content (title content) of the privilege (title) given to the player, the content suggesting the setting condition of the system currently set is used. As a result, by grasping the contents of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary for setting different systems.

Further, when the predetermined game conditions are satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting the desired system, or among the available benefits (titles), the benefits already acquired. The number and ratio of (titles) may be notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in order to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be given is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. If the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system, the system currently set based on the granted privilege (title). There was a problem that it became easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned additional example, the same privilege (title) is given until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period after the predetermined system is set), the player can grasp which system is set. It can be difficult.

The operation content (operation history) for the frame button 22 referred to in the above-mentioned additional example includes, for example, operation effect number information for indicating the number of times the operation effect is executed, and a frame button for the executed operation effect. Operation execution count information for indicating the presence / absence of an operation on 22; operation success count information for indicating the success count of the operation effect (the number of times when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), and a period during which the operation effect is not executed (operation) Any information may be used as long as it is information for indicating the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22, such as information on the number of invalid operations for indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (outside the valid period).

Further, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, a timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing and a frame button 22 being operated a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period. A continuous hit operation effect to be operated and a long press operation effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation contents (operation history) for the frame button 22 to be managed for each type of the executed operation effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player dislikes simply operating the frame button 22 or dislikes a predetermined operation (continuous hit, long press, timing press) for the frame button 22. Will be possible. Therefore, when setting the operation effect corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation effect more suitable for the player, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of operating means, each information may be configured to be managed for each operating means, or the operation contents for all the operating means can be combined and managed. It may be configured. Further, when an operation effect for operating different operation means is executed according to the jackpot expectation, information for indicating the number of executions of the operation effect and the number of operations of the operation means is managed according to the jackpot expectation. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effect executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-mentioned additional example, it is referred to when determining the mode of the operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect. The system and the set value (level) are set, but in addition to the mode of operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22). , Only one of the above-mentioned system or set value (level) may be set.

In the above-mentioned additional example, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations are used. It may be an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or a touch capable of determining that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-mentioned operating means may be provided.

As in the additional example described above, when using a configuration in which the mode of the operation effect is changed based on the operation content (operation history) of the player or a predetermined privilege (title) is given, another day is used. It is preferable to configure the game so that the game can be performed while the operation content (operation history) of the game performed in is continued. Specifically, by performing a predetermined operation (end operation) at the end of the game, the day is performed. Information on the game content and operation content is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuance process), and the output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10 to continue from the acquired information. It is good to configure it so that the game of the state can be performed.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. In the first control example described above, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won and a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot ends, a gaming machine in which the probabilistic state continues until the next jackpot is won has been described.

On the other hand, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining the winning or failing of the special symbol, the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to the normal state (that is, the low probability state with a low jackpot probability) ) Will be executed every time the condition for the transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as the fall lottery) for shifting (falling) to the special symbol is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a fall lottery function in this way, even if a probability change state (high probability state) is set, a period during which the high probability state surely continues is not set, so that a special symbol change is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension each time.

Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes high and the time saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easily released Even if you win the fall lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol will be 100 times for a predetermined period (for example, after the big hit ends. (Until it reaches) is configured so that the time saving state is set. As a result, even if the player wins the fall lottery immediately after the big hit (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the fall lottery is won depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware of this.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when the fall lottery is won is executed as a low probability state. Will be done. That is, if the fall lottery is won in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded, the normal state is set as the game state when the special symbol change is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the player is informed whether or not he / she has won the fall lottery by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that has won the fall lottery, he / she falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem that it was easy to determine whether the lottery was successful or not. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, it is special. It is configured to shift the game state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in a state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded. In that case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the fall lottery was won or the jackpot lottery was won, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. it can.

Further, in the second control example, the continuous effect described in the first control example described above can be used to set an effect mode that can suggest the winning / failing status of the fall lottery to the player. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided. The contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the ROM 202 in the present control example has a fall lottery table 202ba and a fall state transition table 202bb added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the first type selection table 202c. (See Fig. 107), the content that was defined as "probability change time reduction next time" as the game state after the big hit is defined as "probability change until the fall lottery winning, the fall lottery winning or the time reduction up to 100 times" is different. , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state (fall lottery) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and is a random value value (random value) that is determined to be a fall. Counter value) is stored. In the probabilistic state of the special symbol, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the fall lottery table 202ba is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Here, the details of the fall lottery table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b).

FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), a random number value (counter value) determined to be a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two random values (counter values) of "100,101" are used as judgment values corresponding to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). ) Is specified. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba. , When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The fall lottery counter (not shown) is composed of a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed) in the range of "0 to 299". Of the 300 random values (counter values) that the fall lottery counter can take, two random values that are determined to be a fall are specified, so the probability that a fall will be determined in one fall lottery is 1/150. Is. The random number values determined to be jackpots in the probability variation state (values of the first random number counter C1) are five "5 to 9" (see FIG. 106 (a)), and the jackpots are determined in the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/48, it is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the fall lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, once the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can be expected to win multiple jackpots before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in playing the game during the probabilistic state can be improved. it can.

The fall state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when the fall lottery is won during the probability change state. The description of the same elements as the state transition table 202f described in the first control example will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (c) is a schematic view showing the contents of the fall state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182 (c), the fall state transition table 202bb stores the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 and the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d).

FIG. 182 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1. This fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 is different from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that the state status when the fall lottery is won is added during each state status, and other than that. Are the same.

Specifically, when the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 100), if the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (with low probability time reduction), which is specified. The value of the count counter continues as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0 and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time reduction).

That is, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counter is subtracted to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. The state is given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (e), the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described. FIG. 182 (e) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. This fall state transition 2 table 202bb2 differs from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that the state status when the fall lottery is won is added during each state status, and other than that. Are the same.

Specifically, when the status status is "ST2a" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 4), if the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3a (special with low probability time reduction). The value of the specified number of times counter is continued as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (up to 96) and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability time reduction) and the value of the specified number of times counter. Will continue as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0 and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time reduction).

That is, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counter is subtracted to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. The state is given.

FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is provided with the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e instead of the continuous effect mode selection table 222e for the ROM 222 in the first control example, and the final mode selection. The difference is that the final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic view showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. The continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e corresponds to the value of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation number) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above. The difference is that the correspondence of the continuous effect mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating a big hit in the hold at the time of the fall winning, it is a special state that the big hit is won immediately after winning the fall lottery (big hit in a low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a privilege effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the final aspect selection 3 table 222h. The final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example described above in that the final mode is different depending on the setting status of the fall flag 222ba. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184 (b), even if the winning / failing determination result is incorrect, if there is winning information indicating a jackpot winning in the hold, it can be suggested in the final aspect of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that the fall lottery has been won is received from the main control device 110.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special variation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, and then the value of the fall lottery counter is used. , Compare with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall (lottery result corresponding to the fall). (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained (S352: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off (S353), and the player has fallen (S353). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S354).

Then, similarly to the special fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processing of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is won after the time saving period (S355). Here, if the winner is won after the time saving period (S355: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203h is reset (S356), and then S310 and S311 are the same as in the special fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this second control example, when an advantageous state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set and the change start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a special symbol lottery (big hit) is made. Before the lottery) is executed, a fall lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state from the advantageous state to the normal state (the gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state) is executed.

Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in the state where the electric accessory 140a is easily opened (probability change state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as high probability state of normal symbol)). It is configured to shift the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state before starting the fluctuation of the target special symbol.

According to the control process of the main control device 110 in the second control example described above, it has two end conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of time saving times given to the set state), and the game state is probabilistically changed. The second end condition is that the player wins the fall lottery when the state is set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends when both of the above two end conditions are satisfied. .. Regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two end conditions are satisfied, if the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the end condition of the time saving condition is satisfied.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won in which the game state is a probable change state (next time) after the jackpot ends and the time reduction number of times is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times. As a condition, winning the fall lottery is the second end condition mentioned above. Specifically, in the above-mentioned example, when the fall lottery is won at the 10th rotation of the special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued until the first end condition is satisfied (the special symbol fluctuates 100 times) (until both end conditions are satisfied). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the two end conditions are satisfied together, and the normal symbol shifts from the high-probability state to the low-probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit exceeds 100 times (the state where the first end condition is satisfied), the fall lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied). If not), the high probability state of the normal symbol will continue until the fall lottery is won. Then, when the fall lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state, the state transition timing of the normal symbol can be diversified. In addition, when only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times). Because it is difficult for the player to know when the normal symbol will be transferred to the low probability state (whether the fall lottery will be won), the normal symbol will be in the high probability state for as long as possible for the player. You can play the game while expecting it to be.

In this second control example, the number of special symbol fluctuations of 100 is set as one of the conditions for shifting the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol to the low probability state (normal state). However, a plurality of times may be set according to the jackpot type, and for example, a plurality of times may be set stepwise such as "1 time", "25 times", and "50 times". With this configuration, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, in addition to whether or not the fall lottery is won. Specifically, if the fall lottery is won before the number of special symbol changes after the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100), the number of special symbol changes is the predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100). For example, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends when the number reaches 1, 25, 50, 100 times) and, for example, 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot. When the number of times the special symbol changes exceeds 25 times, the high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol ends immediately when the fall lottery is won.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends.

Further, in the second control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions for ending the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, but other end conditions may be provided. For example, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is the lottery result (so-called small hit winning) in which the game of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times the variable winning device 65 is operated). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is measured separately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reaches 100 times. You may set what you have done as the end condition.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) for the first control example described above, and the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186). The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S3214 is completed, the state determination process (S3251) is then executed, and then the process of S3215 is executed to end this process. Here, the details of the state determination process (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 187. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the voice lamp control device 113 side when the fall lottery is won are executed.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating the fall is set when the fall lottery is won by the special symbol change start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main control device 110 (S352: Yes in FIG. 185) (see S354 in FIG. 185). If the command indicating a fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a command indicating a fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (S3253). Here, if it is determined that the time reduction period is in progress (S3253: Yes), then the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the number of remaining time reductions is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated number of remaining time reductions is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that won the jackpot in the hold (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). Here, when the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

When the processing of S3258 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the gaming state is in the normal state has been received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state has been received (S3260), the player falls. It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, when it is determined that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, it is the timing when the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while winning the fall lottery. If it is determined, the fall flag 223ba is set to off (S3262), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, when it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: No), or in the process of S3261, the fall flag 223ba is not set to on (set to off). ), The present process is terminated as it is (S3261: No).

As described above, in this second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining the success or failure of the special symbol, the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) is changed to the low probability state with a low jackpot probability. And transition (fall) transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as fall lottery). Will be described with respect to the gaming machine that is executed every time the condition for determining the validity of the special symbol is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a fall lottery function in this way, even if a probability change state (high probability state) is set, a period during which the high probability state surely continues is not set, so that a special symbol change is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension each time.

Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes high and the time saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easily released Even if the player wins the fall lottery and the high-probability state falls to the low-probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times for a predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot ends. (Until it reaches) is configured so that the time saving state is set. As a result, even if the player wins the fall lottery immediately after the big hit (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for a predetermined period, so that the player wins the fall lottery depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to suppress being grasped by.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when the fall lottery is won is executed as a low probability state. Will be done. That is, if the fall lottery is won in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded, the normal state is set as the game state when the special symbol change is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the player is informed whether or not he / she has won the fall lottery by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that has won the fall lottery, he / she falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem that it was easy to determine whether the lottery was successful or not. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, it is special. It is configured to shift the game state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in a state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded. In that case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the fall lottery was won or the jackpot lottery was won, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. it can.

Further, in the second control example, the above-mentioned continuous effect can be used to set an effect mode that can suggest the winning / failing status of the fall lottery to the player. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second control example described above, if the fall lottery is won during the probability change state and the fall timing is during the time reduction period, the fluctuation pattern table used during the time reduction is continuously used even after the fall. It was difficult for the player to know whether or not the player won the fall lottery by using the configuration to select the fluctuation pattern, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 188. In addition, another example may be used in which a fluctuation pattern is selected using a special fluctuation pattern table when the fall lottery is won.

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 when the above-mentioned alternative example is used. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the above-mentioned alternative example, the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is added.

The contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the fall lottery during the short time period. The post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is configured so that a variation pattern of 60 seconds can be easily selected even in the case of deviation. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, each time a battle reach occurs, the player can be made to watch the production while giving a feeling of tension.

In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the effect of not winning the fall lottery at a predetermined ratio depending on the effect mode of the battle reach. Specifically, the opponent (opposite character) of the selected battle reach may indicate whether or not the fall lottery has been won, and the effect (attack pattern) executed during the battle reach may indicate whether or not the fall lottery has been won. You may suggest whether or not you have won, or you may suggest whether or not you have won the fall lottery depending on the result of the battle reach (the value of the remaining HP at the time of the draw battle reach). As a result, as the end of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, it is also important whether or not the fall lottery is won, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, if a big hit is won during the period when the fluctuation pattern table after the fall is used, it is preferable to configure the special effect mode to be executed as a special hit. As a result, the player can easily grasp that he / she has won the big hit with a low probability immediately after winning the fall lottery by seeing the effect mode executed as a special hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special hit may be set to a fluctuation time that cannot be set in other fluctuation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the immediate hit after the fall due to a sense of discomfort due to the difference in the fluctuation time.

<Explanation of another example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the effect mode of the suggestion effect composed of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is the variation display setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure variation is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a partial process, was used. On the other hand, in this alternative example, only the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is set in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started. It is configured to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect this time based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestion effect is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor effect is being executed (while the suggestion effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the case of the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a precursor effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed are provided. Since it is configured to be executable, even if a specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in another example of the suggestion effect>
Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this alternative example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. In this alternative example, for the first control example described above, the countdown effect setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used instead of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 152). The difference is that the processing content executed in S3107) of 139 is changed to the processing content of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the present alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the variation pattern is set to this time. Based on the fluctuation time and the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect), the effect mode of the precursor effect is set (S4351), the precursor effect start command for display is set (S4352), and this process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4301 that the precursor setting flag 223t is on (S4301: Yes), a plurality of variation effect setting processes are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is performed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variation display setting process (see S3114 of FIG. 147) executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the suggestion effect is produced. The start timing of the precursory effect that triggers the start is set. As a result, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect.

In this additional example, the trigger for the start of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the precursory effect) is changed according to whether or not the change in the special figure is the variation pattern in which the jackpot is won. The start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be set using other conditions. For example, the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) according to the length of the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be set. ) May be set, or a plurality of suggestion effect start triggers (precursor effect start timing) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the plurality of suggestion effect start triggers (precursor effect start timing) are set. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursory effect) of 1 may be provided, and the lottery means may be set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Further, the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be set based on the operation content in which the player operates the frame button 22 before the change of the special symbol this time is started.

Further, the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be changed based on the currently set gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the currently set gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic state), the precursor A (for example, in order to facilitate the execution of a long suggestion effect as a result) It is preferable to set a point where the period from the start of fluctuation is short (see the precursor pattern A shown in FIG. 100 (a)). As a result, the player is interested in the suggestion effect to be executed because the currently set gaming state can be suggested to the player in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Can be made. Further, as in the second control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a transition (fall) means for shifting (falling) from a probabilistic state in which the gaming state is most advantageous to the player to a time-saving state without the player noticing it. In, since it is an effect for suggesting the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect), when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the fluctuation pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of fluctuation (for example). It may be configured so that the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is set at any timing of (5 seconds, 10 seconds).

As in this additional example, when the suggestion effect is started in a state where the end trigger of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect), that is, the start trigger (start timing) of the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is not set. Is a state in which the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, so that there is a problem that the effect mode of the precursor effect cannot be set based on the set effect period as in the first control example described above. is there.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the precursor effect is set based on the variation time of the variation pattern executed this time and the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). It is configured to do. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of this time is 60 seconds or more and the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is precursor A, the effect mode of the precursor effect is a long-term precursor. A long effect mode (second path Dc2b in FIG. 98 (a)) corresponding to the effect is set, and in other cases, a short effect mode (first in FIG. 98 (a)) corresponding to a short-term precursor effect is set. The route Dc1a) is set.

In this way, by roughly setting the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the period during which the suggestion effect can be executed (the effect enablement period based on the start trigger of the suggestion effect and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation), it is set later. It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to a specific effect (effect period of the suggestion effect).

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in the present alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined based on the pressing operation on the frame button 22 executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. The process of setting is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5051), and if it is not pressed (S5051: No). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S5051 (S5051; Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the precursory effect period (S5071).

In the process of S5071, if it is determined that the current state is not during the precursory effect period (S5071: No), other processes related to the frame button operation are executed (S5078), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5071 when it is determined that the present is in the precursor effect period (S5071: Yes), next, a specific effect corresponding to the pressed content of the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the precursor effect is executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98 (a) is displayed), the frame button 22 is displayed to the player in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The operation effect to be operated is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of changing the movement mode (movement speed and movement position) of the character Dc1 that imitates a car displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed as a precursor effect based on the operation of the frame button 22. .. Then, in the sub-display area Ds that scrolls in response to the movement of the character Dc1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in this suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion acquired by the character Dc1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed in the sub-display area Ds during the precursor effect is a mode in which the player can grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect) (for example, the characters "PUSH" are added. It is displayed in the above-mentioned mode). Then, this specific effect display mode is set based on the specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol) that can be set in the special figure variation pattern of this time, and specifically, FIG. 100 (b). ), The specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is displayed. Will be done.

In this additional example, the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed are associated with each other, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. It may be configured as. With this configuration, among a plurality of specific effect display modes displayed in the operation effect executed during the precursory effect, it is possible to determine which specific effect mode should be acquired to set the period of the suggestion effect longer. It is possible to prevent a person from being grasped. Therefore, even after the operation effect is completed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entire suggestion effect, and the player can continue to enjoy the suggestion effect.

In addition, based on the content of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result), the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode acquired during the operation effect may be set. good. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to select a specific effect desired by the player, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the content of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting it, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect executed while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S5072, the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by back calculation from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is set. calculate. That is, by operating the frame button 22 as soon as possible during the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened.

Next, if it is determined whether the interval calculated in the process of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074), and if it is determined that the interval is within 15 seconds (S5074: Yes), the effect of the precursor effect currently being executed is produced. When the mode is set to the short effect mode (S5075), while it is determined that the mode is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the effect mode of the precursory effect currently being executed is set to the long effect. It is set to the aspect (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, first, the production mode of the precursory effect is roughly set based on the content of the current fluctuation pattern (variation time, jackpot lottery result) (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), The precursor effect is executed according to the set effect mode. Then, while the precursor effect is being executed, at the time when the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is set, the precursor effect is performed based on the remaining period of the suggestion effect (the remaining period of the precursor effect). It is configured to change the production mode.

With this configuration, the suggestive effect can be displayed without discomfort toward the specific effect executed during the variable display. Further, since the display mode of the precursor effect can be changed based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the precursor effect mode (the remaining period of the precursor effect is short). ) Timing operation Operate the frame button 22 at the end of the production to enjoy whether or not the long production mode is set (whether or not the fluctuation pattern this time is a long fluctuation time), or conversely. , The frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation effect, which is the timing at which the long effect mode is intentionally set as the precursor effect mode (the remaining period of the precursor effect is long), and the precursor effect is executed in the long effect mode. You can enjoy and perform the production according to the player's request.

After setting the precursor effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the above-mentioned process of S5078 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). Only is set, and a specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect this time is set based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestion effect is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor effect is being executed (while the suggestion effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the case of the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a precursor effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed are provided. Since it is configured to be executable, even if a specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to gradually variably set the effect mode of the precursor effect, which is a partial effect of the suggestion effect (the effect executed in the first half), the effect mode of the entire suggestion effect can be set. It can be set without any discomfort. In this additional example, the production mode of the countdown effect executed as a partial effect of the suggestion effect (the effect executed in the latter half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing when the specific effect to be executed this time is set (see S5073 in FIG. 190) is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and the countdown effect is produced based on the determination result. It may be configured to set the period (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configurations and technical ideas described in the above-mentioned first control example may be added to the above-described additional example, and the contents of the above-mentioned first control example and the contents of the present additional example A pachinko machine 10 may be provided.

<Explanation when various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, the first control described above is based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the pre-determination result of the fall lottery preliminarily determined based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The contents when setting the production mode of various effects described in the example will be described.

In the first control example described above, in the jackpot medium effect setting process (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the effect during the jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entry information for winning the jackpot in the reserved balls. Based on the determination result of whether or not there is, the continuous jackpot effect can be set by referring to the jackpot medium effect selection table 222c. However, in a gaming machine having a fall lottery configuration, the lottery result of the fall lottery Alternatively, it is preferable to set the jackpot middle effect by referring to the pre-determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Specifically, a second pre-determination means that can discriminate between the winning information that wins the jackpot as the look-ahead information and the winning information that wins the fall lottery in the order in which the special symbol change is executed is provided. As a judgment result, if it is determined that the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information that wins the jackpot is executed and then the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information that wins the fall lottery is executed, a continuous jackpot effect is set. It is good to configure it so that it does not. As a result, when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, the winning information held and stored at that time does not include the winning information for winning the fall lottery, so that it is added when the continuous jackpot effect is executed. It can be more valuable.

In addition, when it is determined by the second pre-determination means that the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information won in the fall lottery is executed and then the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information won in the jackpot is executed, it is continuous. It may be configured to set a jackpot effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot continuous effect without executing the fall suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving anxiety to the player due to the execution of the fall suggestion effect.

In addition, if it is determined that among the look-ahead information at the time of winning the jackpot, the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the jackpot contains information indicating that the player will win the fall lottery, the jackpot will be included. As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect that suggests that a game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit. That is, if the fall lottery is won at the start timing of the special symbol change of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is never received in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit during the big hit is executed, the player is given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player.

Next, in the first control example described above, a continuous effect (battle effect) for notifying a period in which a game state (probability change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is configured to be executable. , The production mode of the continuous production (the production mode of the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach), the lottery result of this special symbol, the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and The display mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the probability change state or the time saving state). In the gaming machine having the structure of the fall lottery, the lottery result of the fall lottery or the pre-determination result of the fall lottery preliminarily determined based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also referred to. It is preferable to configure it so as to set the production mode of the continuous production.

In each of the above-described control examples, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the prize is won. There is a problem that the fluctuation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set when the information (look-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation effect) is set by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (variation effect) is commonly executed regardless of the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The first variation pattern setting means for setting the first variation pattern (for example, the effect of varying the third symbol) and the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a are executed. It is preferable to have a second fluctuation pattern setting means for setting two fluctuation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the fluctuation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first variation pattern described above is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a by the second variation pattern setting means is used. ) Is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added is executed with respect to the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

Therefore, it is possible to set a fluctuation pattern (variation effect) based on the look-ahead information while the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit, and the effect based on the look-ahead information (look-ahead information). Look-ahead effect) can be easily executed.

Even if the timing for executing the process for setting the second fluctuation pattern by the above-described second fluctuation pattern setting means is set after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Alternatively, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern may be different according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means. With this configuration, the timing for setting the look-ahead effect can be different depending on the fluctuation pattern to be executed, so that the player can enthusiastically store the reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long fluctuation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) as the first fluctuation pattern is used. If set, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and if a relatively short fluctuation time (fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first fluctuation pattern, the second fluctuation is performed. It is preferable to set the pattern setting timing 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, if the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern setting means may not be executed. With this configuration, when a fluctuation time that makes it difficult to execute the look-ahead effect is set, the look-ahead effect is not added during the change, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, a comment display notice) executed in a short period (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, for example) Even when the long effect (for example, the chance eye stop notice) executed in 20 seconds) is configured to be settable, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means Is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), by configuring the second variation pattern setting means not to be executed, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is set for a predetermined period. In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

As described above, when the second fluctuation pattern setting means is not executed according to the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, the winning information storage area 223a is used. Among the stored prize information, the prize information for which the determination of whether or not to set the second fluctuation pattern by the second fluctuation pattern setting means has already been executed and the prize information that has not been executed are identifiablely stored. When the second variation pattern setting means is executed, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable to exclude the winning information for which the determination is executed and to execute the setting determination of the second fluctuation pattern.

Further, in addition to the above-described example, the display control device 114 issues a pre-reading effect execution command indicating that the second fluctuation pattern (look-ahead effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means has been executed by the display control device 114. When it is configured to output to the control device 113 and the pre-reading effect execution command cannot be received even though the voice lamp control device 113 sets the second variation pattern (pre-reading effect) (the pre-reading effect is not executed). In the case), it is preferable to configure the second variation pattern setting means to be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

A storage means capable of storing a plurality of starting prizes (first ball opening 64 or second ball opening 140) of a special symbol (holding storage), and a special symbol based on the information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the lottery conditions for special symbols based on the winning information stored in the storage means are satisfied), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means are stored. In a gaming machine having a pre-determination means (pre-reading means) for pre-determining, when a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the discrimination result of the pre-determination means is executed, the special symbol is preliminarily changed at the start of variation. There is a configuration in which an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation this time is provided based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the determination result of the pre-determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. It is possible to suggest both the lottery result of the special symbol and the determination result of the winning information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to execute an effect that interests the player. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination result at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect mode is set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit. There was the problem of having to. That is, the timing for setting the effect mode is the timing for executing the change of the special symbol using the oldest prize information (the prize information used for the next special symbol change) stored in the storage means (stored in the storage means). Since it is the timing when the winning information is reduced by one), it is not possible to set the effect mode when the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit, and the pre-determination means. There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variation effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of is reduced.

Further, in the above-described configuration, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, a process of determining the content of the winning information stored in the storage means and a process of setting an effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbol are performed. There is a problem that it needs to be executed, the processing is concentrated in a short period of time, and the processing load increases.

Further, as a configuration for executing the variation effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, in addition to the above-described configuration, the above-mentioned pre-determination means based on the storage of new winning information in the storage means. There is also a gaming machine that executes discrimination by, and based on the discrimination result, executes an effect (look-ahead effect) for showing a pre-discrimination result different from the variable display of a special symbol.

In such a configuration, since the pre-reading effect can be executed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means, the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means can be smoothly performed. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for showing the determination result of the pre-discrimination means, the effect showing the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content overlap with each other, and the player can see the effect. There was a problem that the display was difficult to understand. Further, since the control for executing the look-ahead effect is performed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load is temporarily increased.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation effect) is set by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (variation effect) is commonly executed regardless of the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The first variation pattern setting means for setting the first variation pattern (for example, the effect of varying the third symbol) and the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a are executed. It is preferable to have a second fluctuation pattern setting means for setting two fluctuation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the fluctuation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first variation pattern described above is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a by the second variation pattern setting means is used. ) Is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added is executed with respect to the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect described in the first control example described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, the above-described first control example is configured so that the battle effect (pre-battle effect and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high accuracy (during the probability change state or the time saving state). .. In the control content of the first control example described above, a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach can be executed (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) or a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach cannot be executed depends on the lottery result of the special symbol. (Fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) may be continuously selected. In the first control example described above, in order to prevent the player's interest in the production from being lowered, the fluctuation pattern that can execute the battle reach (the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) is within a predetermined period. If multiple selections are made (for example, within the interval in which the special symbol fluctuates 6 times), the battle reach will be executed unnecessarily by configuring so that the battle reach is not executed for the latter fluctuation pattern. It is configured to solve the problem of reducing the effect of the effect, but the fluctuation pattern that can execute the battle reach and the fluctuation pattern that cannot execute the battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In the first control example selected for, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the battle reach cannot be executed (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is continuously selected, and the pre-battle effect is produced. Remained the problem of continuing for a long time.

Therefore, in the third control example, the continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be executed during the probability change state as the game state, and the special symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the probability change state is shown. As the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table in which the pre-battle effect is executed (easily performed) and a fluctuation pattern table in which the battle reach is executed (easily performed) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (variable scenarios).

With this configuration, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, if the number of special symbol fluctuations is the predetermined number of times (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the jackpot), the battle reach must be executed. And can solve the above-mentioned problems. Further, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the probability variation state is set is configured to be selected and used from a plurality of variation scenarios having different contents. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage even when a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is selected according to a predetermined fluctuation scenario is used.

Further, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpot types are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot types Based on the fluctuation scenario corresponding to, the fluctuation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot is selected. As a result, it is possible to set a fluctuation scenario to be executed after the end of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot, so that a fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scenario is surely selected from the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot. be able to.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control. The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the contents of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 are partially changed. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 191A is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), the ROM 202 in this control example has a variation scenario setting table 202ca added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the contents of the first type selection table 202c are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202c in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as the first type selection table 202c used in the first control example described above will be omitted.

In the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example, the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot K) corresponding to the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed is further added. The subdivided jackpot types (big hits Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values "0 to 19" of the first hit type counter C2 in which "big hit A" is associated, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0,1". Is defined in association with "big hit Aa", "big hit Ab" is associated with the range of "2, 3", and "big hit" is specified in the range of "4,5". "Ac" is associated and defined, "Big hit Ad" is associated with the range of "6,7", and "Big hit Ae" corresponds to the range of "8,9". The range of "10, 11" is associated with "big hit Af", and the range of "12, 13" is associated with "big hit Ag". In the range of "14,15", "big hit Ah" is associated and defined, and in the range of "16,17", "big hit Ai" is associated and defined. In the range of "18, 19", "big hit Aj" is defined in association with each other.

That is, in the third control example, of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 types are used for 20 random values for which "big hit A" is selected. It is stipulated that the jackpot types (big hit Aa to jackpot Aj) are evenly distributed, and the ratio of selecting each jackpot type (big hit Aa to jackpot Aj) is 1%.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this third control example, when any one of "big hit Aa" to "big hit Aj" is selected, the big hit game (15 rounds) defined in "big hit A" is specified. The game) is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game state defined in "big hit A" is set. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different depending on the selected jackpot type (big hit Aa to jackpot Aj). ..

With this configuration, when a specific jackpot game is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends can be different. Therefore, for example, the jackpot type is "big hit Aa". When "Big hit Aj" is selected, it is possible to make it easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation executed after the end of the jackpot game. That is, even if the jackpot type is set to have the same game state with the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol variation after the jackpot game is completed can be different depending on the jackpot type. It is possible to give the player who wants to win the next jackpot as soon as possible to have a sense of expectation for the winning jackpot type until the timing when the special symbol change is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Similar to the above-mentioned "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", "big hit I" defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, that is, high probability after the big hit game is completed. It is stipulated that "a to j", which are subclasses of each jackpot type, are evenly allocated to the jackpot types to which the state and the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation state) are given. On the other hand, "big hit C", "big hit H", "big hit J", "big hit K", that is, a high probability state and a time saving state are not given after the big hit game is completed (a low probability state and a time saving state are given). ) For the jackpot type, the sub-classification (a to j) of the jackpot type is not specified, and a common fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured as follows.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (a). FIG. 193 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the third control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted from the first control example, and the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 and the first deviation are used. The difference is that the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

Here, the jackpot (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (b). FIG. 193 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1. The jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is in the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a fluctuation pattern (various types of super reach) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the value of "180 to 198". The range is defined in association with fluctuation patterns (various types of special reach) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. In this third control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which three attacks are unfolded by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 94). When the fluctuation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are performed is executed (see FIG. 96).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (c), the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2. The first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is in the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. There is one.

As shown in FIG. 193 (c), in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds and 5 seconds) has a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured to be easier to select than the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", a fluctuation pattern (short deviation a) with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value of "150 to 197". A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is associated with the range, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is associated with "198". Has been done.

That is, in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, among the 199 counter values (random values) that the variation type counter C1 can take, 198 random values (range of "0 to 197") Therefore, a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b), which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is defined, and a length, which is a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, is defined with respect to the remaining one random value (“198”). Since the deviation (long deviation a) is specified, the fluctuation time is short in most cases (about 99.5%) when the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2. The variation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 produces a pre-battle effect (FIG. 91, see FIG. 92), and when "short miss b" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) that increases or decreases the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is executed. In addition, when "short deviation a" is selected, for example, an effect in which the character of the other party and the character of the other party talk with each other or the other party is performed without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the other party. The effect of switching the character of is executed. In addition, when "long-off a" is selected, a battle reach (draw battle) in which three attacks are unfolded is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, the contents of the second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (d). FIG. 193 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3. The second deviation pattern table 202dc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is in the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is out. As shown in FIG. 193 (d), one of them is configured so that any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 197", a fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with it. A fluctuation pattern (long deviation b) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with each other.

FIG. 193 (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot game state is the probability variation state, and the variation time is irrespective of the lottery result of the special symbol. The variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-short deviation) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to the entire range of the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-short hit) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is applied to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). Is specified in association with each other.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 191 (a). The variation scenario setting table 202ca is a variation scenario in which the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is defined according to the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. When the jackpot control process (see S1104 in FIG. 137) executed by the main control device 110 determines that the variable scenario setting table 202ca is the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game (FIG. 137). S1211: Yes), which is referred to for setting the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca is associated with each fluctuation scenario (variation) in association with the jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (a to j)) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Scenarios 1 to variation scenarios 11) are defined.

That is, in the third control example, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot ends (the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot ends) according to the winning jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won. The range in which the fluctuation pattern of is selected) can be made different. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game, and the fluctuation pattern set after the jackpot game can be made different. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the fluctuation scenario set after the end of the jackpot differs depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the game state when the jackpot is won is the state without time reduction (common to the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the special symbol), which jackpot type (small classification of the jackpot type (a to j))). Even if is set, if a common fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set and the game state when the jackpot is won is a state with a short time (common to the high probability state and low probability state of the special symbol), , The fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (a to j)) is set.

With this configuration, the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is larger when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won than when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won without the time reduction. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware of the game state when the jackpot is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this third control example, when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the time reduction state, rather than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state without time reduction. Each fluctuation scenario is configured so that the set fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 2 to fluctuation scenario 11) has a larger number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time, but the variation scenario is not limited to this, and for example, there is no time reduction. Each fluctuation scenario may be configured so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time increases when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state. With this configuration, for example, the privilege video can be executed for a long time in the effect mode that can be set only when the probability variation jackpot is won in the state with time reduction.

In addition, among the fluctuation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) set when a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state with time reduction, some fluctuation scenarios are changed to jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in the state without time reduction. You may set the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time to be smaller than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) that is set when you win, or if you win the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) without shortening the time. , A plurality of fluctuation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (subclassification of jackpot type (a to j)).

Next, the contents of each fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 (b) to 196 (d). FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 1. First, the contents defined in the fluctuation scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (b). The fluctuation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game is the number of fluctuations 1) and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern table to be used is specified in association with each other.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set as the game state is won after the jackpot game is completed, the corresponding variation scenario is set by the variation scenario setting table 202ca, and the variation scenario is set. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the contents specified in.

As shown in FIG. 194 (b), in the fluctuation scenario 1, table A (special (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when the number of fluctuations is “1 to 4”, and the number of fluctuations is defined. Table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as the variation pattern referred to when is "5".

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), this fluctuation scenario 1 is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) is given are won in the state where the time saving state is not given as the game state. Will be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (e)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the jackpot ends, and the special symbol is used. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result.

Then, after the fifth rotation of the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, the deviation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see FIG. 108 (d)) is used, and the fluctuation time is 7 to 90 seconds. The variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. Since the fluctuation scenario 1 is a scenario set when the game state is a probable change state, if the jackpot of the special symbol is won while the fluctuation scenario 1 is set, as described above, the jackpot is used. (Probability variation) The variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table 202dc1.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (c). As shown in FIG. 194 (c), in the fluctuation scenario 2, the number of fluctuations is in the range of "1 to 4", and the table A (special (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is associated with the fluctuation scenario 1 described above. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "5 to 13", and table D (for the second deviation (second deviation)) when the number of fluctuations is "14". Probability variation) Fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is specified.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 9, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is "5 to 199", the fluctuation pattern is changed using the table D after executing the special symbol fluctuation 9 times in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, in the battle effect executed during the period when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the special symbol variation in which the pre-battle effect is executed (short deviation using table C (short deviation a) , Special symbol variation in which short deviation b) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed (special symbol variation in which long deviation (long deviation a, long deviation b) is selected using table D). , Can be set in advance, so that the production mode of the pre-battle effect can be changed toward the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C, a slight long deviation a (a deviation fluctuation of 60 seconds) is selected. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when the battle reach is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when the fluctuation time in which the battle reach can be executed (the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more) is selected), the player is given a big hit. You can play the game while expecting that you have won.

As described above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to set in advance the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle reach are executed, it is possible to hold the player for a long period of time (for example, hold) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle effect during the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is larger than the upper limit of the memory), but each time the battle effect is executed, the same fluctuation scenario is set. If the based production is executed, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the battle production itself.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends are the same jackpot type (for example, "big hit A"). On the other hand, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "big hit Aa" to "big hit Aj") in which different fluctuation scenarios are defined are provided so that the player cannot easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenario during the battle production. It is configured.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit (monotonic effect) due to the scenario while having the advantage (providing a long-term effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort) due to the scenario of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, since the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends are configured in a plurality of variable scenarios for the same jackpot type (for example, "big hit A"). Even if the player grasps the game content of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp in which fluctuation scenario the special figure variation is executed after the jackpot ends. .. Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) based on a variable scenario or a battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning a jackpot. It is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In this control example, the jackpot types to which "a to j" are assigned are defined for all of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", and "big hit I". However, the jackpot type specified for each jackpot may be different. For example, when the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit A" is executed, a specific variable scenario (for example, a variable scenario) is executed. It may be configured so that only 2) can be set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time to understand the relationship between the game content of the jackpot and the variable scenario. Therefore, when the battle reach is executed at a timing different from usual after the end of the specific jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit A"), the expectation for the jackpot can be increased.

Then, the table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with the range in which the number of variations of the special symbol is "200 to". With this configuration, it is not necessary to create an infinite number of fluctuation scenarios in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit as in this control example, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be done. In this third control example, the variation reached when a lottery of 4 times or more of the jackpot probability (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (a)) of the special symbol in the probability variation state is executed. When the number of fluctuations exceeds "200", the table B (disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3) is configured to be executed, but when the number of fluctuations exceeds that, table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation) is executed. ) Fluctuation pattern table 202d3) may be configured to be executed. For example, table B is used when the number of fluctuations "500" reached when a lottery of 10 times or more the jackpot probability is executed is exceeded. It may be configured so that the selection of the fluctuation pattern that has been performed is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations "200", which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed, but other than that. A table may be used, for example, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A may be executed until the next big hit is won, or the fluctuation may occur from the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario "200". During the period of the number of times "399", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A is executed, and when the number of fluctuations exceeds "400", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed until the next big hit is won. It may be configured as follows.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the fluctuation scenario for the special symbol fluctuation within the range of the number of lottery that can normally be won as a big hit. However, when the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario (the number of fluctuations “200”) is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a privilege effect such as providing video or audio that cannot normally be seen by the player or giving points collected by the player is executed. This makes it possible to give special benefits to players who have not been able to win the jackpot for a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-mentioned privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set in order to smoothly execute the battle effect executed in the probability variation state. Because it is possible to do so, the degree of freedom of privilege production can be increased.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (d). FIG. 194 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation scenario 3. The fluctuation scenario 3 is configured so that the period during which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C and the table D is different from that of the fluctuation scenario 2 described above (see FIG. 194 (c)). Specifically, in the fluctuation scenario 3, the number of fluctuations is defined in the range of "1 to 4" in association with the table A (special (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) as in the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2, and the number of fluctuations is defined. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5-9", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table) when the number of fluctuations is "10". 202dc3) is specified.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 5, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is "5 to 190", the fluctuation pattern is changed using the table D after executing the special symbol fluctuation 5 times in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed can be different depending on the type of variable scenario that is set, so the battle reach based on winning the jackpot ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory or a defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production.

Then, as in the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2, when the number of fluctuations is in the range of "190 to 198", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined and the number of fluctuations is "199". Table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations being "200 to".

In this way, the period of pre-battle production (the period when the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") corresponding to the final battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") is irrespective of the jackpot type. By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the contents of the effect to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end (a production that makes the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach different from the usual ones) for each jackpot type, so that the capacity of the production data can be increased. Can be reduced.

For all jackpot types, it is not necessary to unify the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effect will end (the effects that make the pre-battle effect and the battle reach effect different from the usual ones), and at least 2 Configure the variable scenario so that the production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end for one jackpot type (the production that makes the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach different from the usual) is unified. For example, the amount of production data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4. In this fluctuation scenario 4, the same contents as the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)) are specified in the period when the number of fluctuations is "1 to 14", and the contents specified after that. Is configured to be different from the fluctuation scenario 2. In this way, by defining the same content for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot and making the content different after the lapse of the predetermined period, a plurality of variable scenarios are set this time for the player. It can make it more difficult to understand what the fluctuation scenario is.

FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 5. Unlike the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, this fluctuation scenario 5 is a special symbol variation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D after the number of fluctuations "1 to 4" in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table A. Is executed. That is, the battle reach (draw battle) is executed without executing the pre-battle effect. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a great sense of discomfort with respect to the battle effect as compared with the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of a big hit for the battle reach executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Since other contents are the same as those of the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. 195 (c), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A, and a special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D. Is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that is set continuously. Since other elements are the same as those of the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, also for the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation pattern table defined in the fluctuation scenario is made the same and associated with each fluctuation pattern table. A fluctuation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195 (d)) in which only the number of fluctuations is different is provided. As a result, even when the variation pattern is selected using the table C after the end of the jackpot (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the end of the jackpot), the variation set this time for the player. It can make it difficult to understand what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the fluctuation scenario 8 is different from the above-mentioned fluctuation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period during which the fluctuation pattern is selected is set longer using the table A. .. Specifically, Table A is defined in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is in the range of "1 to 10". With this configuration, it is possible to extend the period for selecting the fluctuation pattern using the table A in which the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Can provide big hits in a short period of time.

Further, during the period in which the table A is associated and specified, in the third symbol display device 81, a display similar to the extension display of the first control example described above, that is, an ending screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed. It is configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, the fluctuation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196 (b), this fluctuation scenario 9 is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that the fluctuation pattern table first defined after the end of the jackpot is replaced with table A and table B. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the probability change state is not set as the game state after the end of the big hit. After that, when the period (the period of the number of fluctuations "1 to 4") specified in association with the table B elapses, the fluctuation pattern using the table C and the table D is selected as in the other fluctuation scenarios. Since the battle effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the selected fluctuation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

FIG. 196 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the variation scenario 10 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting the variation pattern using the table D is not set. That is, in this fluctuation scenario 10, since the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period when the battle effect is executed, a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the fluctuation scenario. It will not be done.

In the present fluctuation scenario 10, when the acquisition value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when selecting the fluctuation pattern using the table C is “198” and the fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected. Alternatively, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1, the battle reach is executed. .. Therefore, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning the jackpot when the battle reach is executed can be increased as compared with the case where the other fluctuation scenarios are set.

Further, in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the probabilistic jackpot is given a probabilistic state as the game state after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot. It has a normal jackpot that is given a normal state as the game state after the end, and in the battle reach executed during the battle production, a winning battle is executed when the probability variation jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot is won. It is configured so that a defeat battle is executed in the case, and a draw battle is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

That is, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the frequency of execution of the draw battle can be reduced as compared with the case where another fluctuation scenario is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect when the battle reach is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. When the fluctuation scenario is set without using the table D as in the fluctuation scenario 10, the pre-battle effect may be executed for a long period of time. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern that can be selected using the table C ( It is preferable to use a table (table C2) in which a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds to 5 seconds (for example, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) can be selected. .. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed.

Next, the fluctuation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (d). FIG. 196 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 11. In this fluctuation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196 (d), the fluctuation pattern table first defined after the end of the jackpot is set as table C, and after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the jackpot (the special symbol changes 249 times). It differs from other fluctuation scenarios in that table A is specified in) and the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario is set to "400".

According to the fluctuation scenario 11, since the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table D as in the fluctuation scenario 10 described above, there is a possibility that the jackpot is won when the battle reach is executed. (The possibility that a victory or defeat battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can pay attention to the production content of the battle reach.

In addition, since Table A is defined in which the number of fluctuations per unit time is the highest when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), the probability change state is set as the game state. Dissatisfaction felt by the player when the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol change is executed 10 times the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). The feeling can be suppressed.

As described above, in this third control example, a plurality of (10 types) fluctuation scenarios can be set for the jackpot types in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw) based on the fluctuation scenarios is configured. (Battle) and battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning a special symbol jackpot are difficult to understand, but the types of variable scenarios are not limited to this, and more types Variable scenarios may be configured to be configurable.

Further, in the third control example, a variable scenario is defined for all the periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the contents of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be discriminated in advance. Only a part of the period when the battle effect is performed (for example, the period from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol change is executed 50 times, or the period for 10 special symbol changes calculated back from the timing when the battle effect ends) It may be configured to define a fluctuation scenario.

In this third control example, a configuration is used in which a fluctuation scenario of special symbol fluctuation is set based on the winning jackpot type, but other elements for setting (variable) the fluctuation scenario may be used, for example. Although the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the question, even if it is configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when the lottery result (so-called small hit) gives the player a smaller amount of benefits than the big hit. Alternatively, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when a fall is won. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery to change the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to do so.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 used in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (b). FIG. 191B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a variation scenario storage area 203ca is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing the variation scenario set by using the variation scenario setting table 202ca. In the third control example, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca. In this fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type is stored, and the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (executed every time the special symbol is changed) ( (See FIG. 204) (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, from winning the jackpot (after executing the process of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won) to executing the fluctuation of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Since the fluctuation scenario is stored in between, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends can be reliably selected based on the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The points, the variable scenario storage area 222ca, the first continuous value main selection table 222cc, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd, and the continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222ce are It differs in that it has been added. Since this third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above, it is a continuation of the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The description of the elements not related to the production is omitted, and the other elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information for indicating the contents of a plurality of variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca of the main control device 110 is stored, and is output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation scenario is updated on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the command for indicating the setting status of the fluctuation scenario (for example, the command for indicating the jackpot type and the command for indicating the set fluctuation scenario). Information used for management is stored.

When it is determined that the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the voice lamp control device 113 has received the state command including the related information related to the variation scenario, the variation scenario storage area 222ca (S3271: Yes in FIG. 205). ), The variation scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variation scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

With this configuration, the fluctuation scenario set by the main control device 110 and the fluctuation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be synchronized, so that the fluctuation pattern selected in the future by the main control device 110 can be synchronized. (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are discriminated, and based on the discriminating result, the specific winning information (for example, the third prize information). For the winning information in which the special symbol change is executed), a long-term change period is used for the special symbol change (the first and second special symbol fluctuations executed in the winning information) that is executed before that. However, for example, when a plurality of winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it becomes difficult to execute a long-term effect. At the same time, the maximum value of the range in which long-term production can be performed is the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation corresponding to the maximum number of prize information that can be stored in the prize information storage area 223a, so that the production period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol can be managed in a scenario, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, the degree of freedom can be increased for long-term production.

Further, in the third control example, since the voice lamp control device 113 has the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca, it is not necessary to output all the contents of the fluctuation scenario in which the main control device 110 is set, and the settings are made. Since it is sufficient to output information for indicating the fluctuation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type and identification information capable of specifying the set fluctuation scenario from among a plurality of fluctuation scenarios), the main control device 110 The amount of information to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when a power failure occurs), the main control device 110 is restored when the power supply is restored. To the voice lamp control device 113, a recovery process for outputting the game state stored just before the power supply is cut off (or from the time when the power supply is cut off until the processing of the main control device 110 is stopped) is executed. In the information for indicating the game state output in the recovery process, at least the jackpot type that was won last time and the current setting are set as the information for indicating the currently set fluctuation scenario. Includes information to indicate one of the fluctuation scenarios, the update status of the currently set fluctuation scenario, and information to indicate any of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed since the end of the previous jackpot. It is configured to be. As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, the update content of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 after the restoration and the fluctuation managed by the voice lamp control device 113 You can easily synchronize with the updated contents of the scenario.

In this case, a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol changes a plurality of times (5 times)) after the update management process of the fluctuation scenario by the voice lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery process. The update content of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 manage the period until the fluctuation pattern is switched and the fluctuation pattern table specified in the fluctuation scenario is switched. It is good to use it as a confirmation period to determine whether the updated contents of the fluctuation scenario are updated correctly. As a result, the update management process of the fluctuation scenario can be restored more accurately. In addition, during the above-mentioned confirmation period, in order to show that the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the restoration are being performed based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 without being based on the fluctuation scenario. It is good to configure so that the recovery display of is executed. As a result, the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The first continuous value main selection table 222cc is a table to be referred to when the continuous value (HP value) is updated when the continuous effect (battle effect) is executed, and until the battle reach is executed. This table is referred to when the period (remaining period) of is 4 or more (for example, when the number of special symbol changes until the special symbol change corresponding to the battle reach is executed is 4 or more).

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. In the first control example described above, the main continuation value for updating and managing the continuation value in the voice lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The sub-continuation value of is set by referring to the corresponding table, the total value of the set main continuation value and the sub-continuation value is calculated, and the information command for indicating the total value is displayed. In contrast to the output to 114, in this third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 is shown. An information command including information for the purpose is output to the display control device 114, a sub-continuation value is set based on the information command received on the display control device 114 side, and the total value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuation value, which is a value managed in order to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol or the fluctuation scenario, is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. , It is configured to be stored, and all other processes are configured to be executed by the display control device 114. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

Here, the contents of the first continuation value main selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuation value main selection table 222cc. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cc, the ratio of the selected selection value (main continuation value) being different from the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n). It is stipulated to be.

The selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) in which the value of the dedicated effect counter (not shown) can be taken. Further, in the first continuous value main selection table 222cc, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as "400". This is because, as described above, the first continuous value main selection table 222cc has a special symbol at least four times when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, before the battle reach determined by the fluctuation scenario is executed. This is because the table is used when it is necessary to make fluctuations, so that unnecessarily low selection values are set, and it is possible to prevent the progress of the continuous value increase / decrease effect from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cc becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle reach is started soon, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value can be executed without discomfort.

Explaining the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "1000", the ratio at which "1000" is selected as the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected. 5%, "900" is selected 50%, "800" is selected 30%, "700" is selected 10%, "600" is selected 3 %, The ratio at which "500" is selected is specified as 2%.

Here, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the increase / decrease in the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, the effect corresponding to the increase / decrease of the total value obtained by adding the main continuation value selected by the voice lamp control device 113 and the sub continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. .. Since the effect to be executed is configured so that the sub-continuation value is selected so that the increase / decrease range of the main continuation value and the increase / decrease range of the total value are the same as in the first control example described above. Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cc.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is "1000", the "control" effect is executed, and the effect that the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen does not increase or decrease is executed. Will be done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cc, a command indicating that fact is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the command indicating that is output. The display control device 114 is configured so that the sub-continuation value is not selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sub-continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases.

Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" effect that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is executed. The detailed production mode of this "attack" effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. When the difference value is 100, it is "weak attack", and when it is 200, it is "medium attack". In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack" is set, and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. With this configuration, the amount of decrease in the continuous value (HP value) can be predicted from the effect content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. You can be interested.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "900", the ratio of selecting "900" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, "800". Is specified at 50%, "700" is selected at 30%, "600" is selected at 5%, and "500" is selected at 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223n is "800", the ratio of selecting "800" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 20%, and the ratio of selecting "700" is 20%. Is specified as 50%, the ratio of selecting "600" is specified as 20%, and the ratio of selecting "500" is specified as 10%.

Further, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "700", the ratio of selecting "900" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, and "700" is The selected ratio is 30%, the selected ratio of "600" is 40%, the selected ratio of "500" is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "600". In the case of, the ratio of selecting "800" is defined as 10%, the ratio of selecting "600" is specified as 40%, and the ratio of selecting "500" is specified as 40% in the continuous value storage area 223n. When the stored value is "500", the ratio of selecting "900" is 10%, the ratio of selecting "700" is 10%, and the ratio of selecting "500" is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "400", "900" is selected at 30%, "700" is selected at 20%, and "500" is selected. The percentage selected is defined as 10%, and the percentage selected as "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, as an effect executed on the display screen, a "recovery" effect in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party rises is executed. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuation value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cc used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is 4 or more, the ratio at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually reduces the main continuation value is selected. Is set higher than the ratio at which other effects are selected. As a result, even if the pre-battle effect is executed for a long period of time, the continuous value increase / decrease effect can be advanced. Further, even if the rate at which "weak attack" is selected is set high, the effect mode executed on the display screen is changed according to the selected sub-continuation value, as in the first control example described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various production modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The second continuous value main selection table 222cc is used when selecting the production mode of the pre-battle effect when the hold internal hit flag 223cc is set to on, that is, when the special symbol is changed several times and then becomes a big hit. The table used. Next, the contents of the second continuation value main selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc has "777" and "333" as selectable selection values with respect to the first continuous value main selection table 222cc described with reference to FIG. 198. There is a big difference in that "300" to "0" are added. Hereinafter, the differences from the first continuation value main selection table 222cc will be mainly described. Of the contents specified in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, detailed description will be omitted for the elements that are the same as the first continuous value main selection table 222cc or that have different selection ratios. ..

The second continuous value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuous value values in order to notify in advance that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot exists in the hold. There is. When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 continues as a sub-continuation. It is configured so that no value is selected. As a result, even though the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, the sub-continuation value is selected, and the continuation value (HP) on the display is selected. It is possible to suppress the situation where the value) increases or decreases.

In this third control example, when the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is selected, the main continuation value is prohibited for the player by prohibiting the sub-continuation value from selecting the value. The value of the value ("777", "333") is configured to be able to be notified, but other configurations may be used, and when a command regarding the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is received. In addition, when the display control device 114 is configured to select the sub-continuation value using the dedicated selection table and the value (sub-continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0". Only, "777" and "333" may be displayed as the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, as the values that can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", the value to add "23" and "13", or "7" and "17". It is preferable to configure the value to be subtracted from to be selectable. With this configuration, when a value other than "0" is selected as the sub-continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "777" has been selected as the continuation value, and the added value of displaying the continuation value (HP value) indicating that the jackpot is won on the display screen. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222cc, "300" to "0" can be selected as the selection value. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle reach will be executed soon. .. Although the details will be described later, also in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is 3 or less), "300" to "0" are used as the selection values. It is configured so that it can be selected with a selection ratio lower than that of the continuation value main selection table 222cc. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be further increased.

In addition, in FIG. 199, a plurality of values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as the current continuation value and the selected value, but in reality, the contents are independent of "1000", "900", and "800". Is specified, and since the contents specified for each are the same, a plurality of values are described together.

Further, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, when the revival effect is executed, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as the selected value regardless of the currently set main continuation value value. The ratio is set high. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation values to indicate that the jackpot is won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle production after the game, by increasing the continuation value (HP value) to the range where the main continuation value to indicate that the jackpot is won can be selected, the player can win the jackpot again. In order to show, the game can be played while expecting that the main continuation value is selected.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The third continuous value main selection table 222cd shows the case where the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is 3 or less, that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the battle reach set based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is 3 or less. It is a table used when selecting the production mode of the pre-battle production. Next, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd has similar contents to the second continuous value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. 199. The point that the ratio of selecting the main continuation value ("777", "333") for indicating is set to "0", the point that the ratio of selecting "0" as the selection value is set to "0", and the whole The difference is that the ratio of low values (“300” to “0”) selected as the selection value is lowered, and the other contents are the same to some extent with a slight difference in the selection ratio.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect in the continuous effect. Here, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. When the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce reaches the upper limit of the variation scenario with respect to the continuation effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above (the number of changes of the special symbol is 200 in the state where the probability variation state is set). The difference is that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded. The other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third control example, a fluctuation scenario is set for the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set using the fluctuation pattern table specified in the set fluctuation scenario. It is configured to be selected. Then, in consideration of the data capacity of the main control device 110, the fluctuation scenario is set up to a range in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of the numerical value obtained by multiplying the numerical value of the denominator of the jackpot probability by 5), and thereafter. Is configured to select a variation pattern using a specific variation putter table (Table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

In the third control example configured in this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous effect using the variation scenario, so that the special effect mode "Mode 6" is selected as. When "mode 6" is selected, the battle effect is completed, and the specification corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 108 (d)) specified in the deviation pattern table 202d3 (table B) is specified. The production is executed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot normally be seen is executed, such as an effect in which a party is held by reconciling with an opponent who has not been settled during the battle effect.

In this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won in the probabilistic state is long. It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, but in addition to that, for example, it is set when a jackpot is won in a specific jackpot type (for example, small classification "k"). Only in the specific fluctuation scenario to be performed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, may be set to "20" so that the above-mentioned privilege effect can be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (minor classifications "a" to "k") are provided for jackpots (for example, major classification "big hit A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, the game is played for each minor classification. It is possible to make different benefits (easiness to execute a specific effect) given to a person, and even after winning a jackpot, it is possible to make an interest in the winning jackpot type.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example has the point that the duration counter 223p is deleted from the RAM 223 of the first control example, the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca, the remaining number counter 223cc, the hold internal hit flag 223cc, and the continuation setting flag 223cd. The difference is that In this third control example, another control example relating to the continuous effect of the first control example described above is described. Therefore, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are described. The description is omitted.

The variation scenario update area 223ca is an area that is updated and managed so that the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the variation scenario can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. When it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) that the variation scenario update area 223ca has received the variation scenario-related information for indicating the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 (FIG. 205: S3271). : Yes), the variation scenario corresponding to the received variation scenario related information is selected from the plurality of variation scenarios stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variation scenario is set, and the variation display setting process ( The progress of the variation scenario is updated each time (see FIG. 147) is executed. Based on the update status of the variation scenario set in the variation scenario update area 223ca, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the jackpot is won, the set fluctuation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is reached. Is configured to run. The remaining number counter 223cc calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), and calculates the number of fluctuations. The value is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cc (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number counter 223cc is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207), and the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect is performed. It is referred to when determining whether to execute. Further, in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 206), when it is determined that there is a winning prize in the hold (S3251: Yes in FIG. 206), the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is referred to, and the winning prize in the hold is dealt with. The special symbol variation to be executed, the special symbol variation corresponding to the battle reach executed when the value of the remaining number counter 223 cc becomes 0, and the special symbol variation to be executed first are determined (). S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The hold internal hit flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not the winning information for winning the jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and when it is set to ON, the winning information storage area 223a. It shows that there is prize information that wins the jackpot.

This hold internal hit flag 223cc is not always set to be turned on when the winning information for winning the jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot is changed. , When it is determined that the execution is executed before the value of the remaining number counter 223cc becomes "0" (S3253: Yes in FIG. 206), the value is set to ON. In the continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), when it is determined whether the hold internal hit flag 223cc is set to on (see S4151 in FIG. 208) and it is determined that it is set to on (see FIG. 208). S4151: Yes), the hundreds digit of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set in the probability change state, and when it is set to ON, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set. It shows that it is.

When the continuation setting flag 223cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) that the setting status is determined (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and is not set to on (set to off). (S4051: No in FIG. 207), after the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 of FIG. 207, when it is determined that the value is set to ON (S4051: Yes in FIG. 207), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223 bb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number counter 223cc from being reset in a state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cc. As a result, after the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 of FIG. 207). The update status of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the fluctuation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be easily synchronized only by executing.

Further, in the processing of S3254 executed in the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the fluctuation scenario, that is, a value indicating the number of special symbol fluctuations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed is When the remaining number counter is set to 223 cc, subtraction based on the value can be surely executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example adds a continuous value storage area 233ca to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 with respect to the display control device 114 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the first continuous value subselection table 234a3 and the second continuous value subselection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a of the above.

The continuous value storage area 233ca is an area for storing the continuous value calculated based on the continuous value command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113, and in the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), the continuous value storage area 233ca is used. The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode executed this time is not a winning battle (S8305: No in FIG. 211), the stored value is referred to (FIG. 211). S8306).

The first continuous value subselection table 234a3 and the second continuous value subselection table 234a4 are the first continuous value subselection table 222g1 provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above (FIG. 117 (b)). The table has the same contents as the second continuous value subselection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)), and the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. In this control example, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) for the first control example described above, and the number of fluctuation subtraction processing (see FIG. 129). The difference is that the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of (see FIG. 204), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). In this special symbol variation processing 4, the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S214: Yes) with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above, and the lottery result this time is a big hit. The difference is that the content of the process executed when the determination is made (S216: Yes) is partially different, and the same process is executed for the other elements. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S216 as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. Then, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), then, the big hit type selected by referring to the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) is selected. Based on this, set the opening scenario of the specific winning opening. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, and the last round (for example). , 15th round), including the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, a scenario will be set in which the specific winning openings will open in this jackpot.

When the processing of S217 is completed, next, the probability change flag 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the state command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the same process of S220 as in the first control example described above is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (out of order) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as the above-mentioned first control example is executed, and the process of S220 is executed. Is executed to end this process.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command including at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time is set. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, it extracts information on the jackpot type from the status command, and responds from the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca of ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variation scenario is selected, and the selected variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp which fluctuation scenario is used to select the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the timing when the jackpot game is started and after the jackpot ends. .. As a result, for example, the information command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the command for indicating the fluctuation scenario set this time are output at the same time when the jackpot ends and the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. It is possible to set the production corresponding to the scenario.

Further, in the third control example, since the state command set at the timing when the jackpot game is started includes information for indicating the fluctuation scenario set after the jackpot ends, it corresponds to the content of the state command. You can also set the production during the big hit. Therefore, since it is possible to suggest a variable scenario set after the end of the jackpot to the player by the effect executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect executed during the jackpot. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the content of the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation number subtraction process 4. The variation number subtraction process 4 is a process (S451, S452) for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca with respect to the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above. The differences are in the additions, and the others are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 is executed, the same processes of S3709 and S401 to S411 as the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above are executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation scenario is stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca (S451), and if it is determined that the fluctuation scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored fluctuation scenario is updated (S451). S452), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation scenario is not stored (S451: No), the present process is terminated without executing the process of S452.

Here, the update contents of the fluctuation scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). As a result, the fluctuation scenario can be reliably updated when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special symbol is started.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208. In this control example, for the first control example described above, the command determination process 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), and the winning information command process (see S141) is replaced. , The difference is that the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129). Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as those of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of S3214 is completed, it is next determined whether the received state command includes the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271), and the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is included. If it is determined to be (S3271: Yes), the variation scenario corresponding to the variation scenario related information included in the received status command is selected from the variation scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca (S3272). .. Then, the display status command is set (S3215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing of S3271 does not include the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271: No), the processing of S3272 is skipped, the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, the winning information command processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 4.

When the winning information command processing 4 is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231), and is the information corresponding to the jackpot included in the winning command received this time? Whether it is a winning prize) is determined (S3251). In the processing of S3251, if it is determined that the winning is a winning prize (S3251: Yes), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is based on the place where the winning information received this time is stored in the winning information storage area. Is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is larger than the fluctuation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is larger (S3253: Yes). , The value set in the remaining number counter 223cc, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (the number of special symbol fluctuations) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the set fluctuation scenario, is won as a big hit. Is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

This makes it possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the actual battle reach is executed, so that during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed The content (content of increase / decrease in continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next battle reach is executed. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

When the processing of S3254 is completed, the hold internal hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), other look-ahead processing is executed (S3256), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3251, if it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the processing of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the processing of S3256 is executed, and this processing is completed. To do.

Next, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. The continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the effect modes of a plurality of effects executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to on (set to off) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining count counter is based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca. A value of 223 cc is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The fluctuation scenario update area 223ca stores (synchronized) fluctuation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation scenarios set by the main controller 110. Then, using the table D, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223cc. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is changed based on the discriminating result. As a result, the continuation value set according to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is greatly reduced even though the battle reach is not executed for the time being (the situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is large).

In addition, in a situation where the battle reach will be executed soon (a situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is small), the continuation value may be greatly reduced in order to expect the player to execute a winning battle in the battle reach. it can.

Further, in the third control example, the number of changes of the special symbol up to the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed is determined in advance based on the information (variation pattern information) defined in the fluctuation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the content of the winning information stored in the hold. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect.

Although the details will be described later, the fluctuations occur in the special symbol fluctuations that are executed before the battle reach (draw battle), which is determined in advance using the fluctuation scenario, is executed in the fluctuation patterns stored on hold. Fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is out of time in 60 seconds (the variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired in the variation pattern table (table C) for the first deviation (probability variation). ) Or, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and it is determined that the special symbol is executed more than a predetermined number of times (twice) before the special symbol change is executed, the special symbol is executed. The value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until is changed is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223 cab. As a result, even if the battle reach is executed without being based on the fluctuation scenario, that is, even if the battle reach is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol fluctuation executed by the battle reach (battle). (In the previous production), the continuation value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to on (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the processing of S4052 is not executed by the discrimination processing of S4051. As a result, it is prohibited that the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is set again in the state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cc. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc that is not based on the fluctuation scenario (when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the remaining number counter 223cc set corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that becomes the big hit) is set. Even if it is, the value can be continuously maintained.

After finishing the processing of S4053, it is next determined whether the current fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is a hit fluctuation corresponding to the jackpot (S4054), and if it is determined to be a hit fluctuation (S4054: Yes), the battle. In order to set the production mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of the production, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not a hit variation (a deviation variation) (S4054: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is 0 (S4055).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cc is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol variation this time is the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (table D). In the case of (special symbol variation) in which the variation pattern is selected by using, the process proceeds to the process of S4013 described later, and it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223 cc is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: No). ) Next determines whether the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the processing of S4056, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected by using the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table (table C), and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is determined. If it is determined to be (S4056: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4013 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not 60 seconds (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

That is, in the above-mentioned discrimination process of S4054 to S4056, the pre-battle effect is set as the variation effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set in response to the special symbol variation this time, or the battle reach is determined. It is determined whether to set, in S4054, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055, it is determined whether or not the battle reach is set based on the fluctuation scenario of the special symbol. However, in S4056, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the result is a specific lottery result although the winner is out of the game.

When the fluctuation effect to be executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle effect, the value of the remaining number counter 223 cc is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 is performed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. ~ S4008 is executed, then the continuation value setting process 2 is executed (S4058), and this process is terminated. The contents of the continuous value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 208.

On the other hand, when the variation effect to be executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is battle reach (when Yes is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h. Select the mode (S4013), set the corresponding final mode command for display (S4014), set the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the hold internal hit flag 223cc to off (S4059), and set the remaining count counter 223cc. The value of is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is terminated.

Next, the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223 cc and the setting status of the pending internal hit flag 223 cc is executed. In this way, by making the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle effect different according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be obtained. It can make the player interested.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuous value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, when the short deviation b having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected in the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), it is determined that the continuous value fluctuation timing is reached. .. In the third control example, as the fluctuation patterns of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern determined to be the continuous value fluctuation timing (short deviation b) and the fluctuation pattern determined not to be the continuous value fluctuation timing (short deviation a). ), But not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a lottery means for drawing whether or not to change the continuous value, and the continuous value is changed with respect to the same fluctuation pattern. It may be configured so that it is not possible to set. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be configured to determine that it is the continuous value fluctuation timing. With this configuration, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is the timing for changing the continuous value (S4101: Yes), in order to execute the process for setting the effect mode for increasing / decreasing (variable) the continuous value in the current variable effect, the process of S4151 is executed. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuous value change timing (S4101: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether or not the hold internal hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, when it is determined that the hold internal hit flag 223 cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, when the winning information corresponding to the special symbol to win the big hit exists in the hold, the second The value of the main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc (S4157), and the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether or not there is (S4158).

In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), display control is performed to display the selected value as it is on the third symbol display device 81. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command in which the continuation value (sub-continuation value) for production is not added (S4159), and ends this process. As described above with reference to FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that wins a big hit in the hold of the special symbol, it is based on the fluctuation scenario until the corresponding special symbol is changed. When the battle reach (draw battle) is executed, the pending internal hit flag 223cc is not set to on, so that the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As a result, the battle reach (victory or defeat battle) can be executed immediately after the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is unexpected to the player.

As described above, in this third control example, the specific symbol is based on the order of change between the special symbol that wins the jackpot existing in the hold and the special symbol that executes the battle reach (draw battle) based on the fluctuation scenario. Specifically, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected according to the content corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation executed earlier, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the hold. The type of jackpot to be played is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variation jackpot in which a winning battle is executed) and a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle). The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different from the case where the determination result corresponds to the normal hit to be executed).

Specifically, for example, when the change of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is executed earlier than the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot existing in the hold. Newly sets the number of fluctuations until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed to the value of the remaining number counter 223cc, and is a fluctuation scenario rather than the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal hit existing in the hold. If the change in the special symbol on which the battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the above is executed first, the value of the remaining number counter 223 bb that has already been set is not changed. In this way, by making the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed different based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot), the pre-battle effect is produced. It is possible to predict the type of jackpot depending on the effect mode of the above, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the continuation value finally displayed in the battle reach, which is a draw battle, may be inherited as it is, and the production mode of the next battle effect may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the battle effect that is repeatedly executed a plurality of times relevant, and to make the player interested in the effect that is executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4151, when it is determined that the hold internal hit flag 223cc is not set on (set to off) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining count counter 223cc is 4 or more. (S4152), and if it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: Yes), the value of the main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222 kb. Then (S4153), the process proceeds to S4154.

Further, in the processing of S4152, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223 cab is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is calculated based on the third continuous value main selection table 222 cd. Select the value (hundreds digit of HP) (S4156), move to the processing of S4154, set the display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time (S4154), and proceed to the processing of S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the process of S4153, S4156, and S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. As a result, at the timing of setting the continuation value next time, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. When the processing of S4155 is completed, the main processing is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 158) for the first control example described above, and the continuous value related command process (see FIG. 164). ) Is replaced with the continuation value-related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), and the final mode command process (see FIG. 211) is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the third control example, the value of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) with respect to the first control example described above. Is different in that it is configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this way, by setting the value of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol and the main continuation value set based on the fluctuation scenario are set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for showing the lottery result of a special symbol or for showing the update status of the fluctuation scenario). There is no need to output a command to indicate information). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 (the processing for setting the continuation value, the processing for setting the command to be output to the display control device 114).

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4. In this command determination process 4, whether or not there is a process executed when there is a continuation value related command and a final mode command for display with respect to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above are executed, and it is determined that there is a continuation value related command in the process of S6414. If this is done (S6414: Yes), the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to the process of S6401. The continuous value-related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 210.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command in the processing of S6414 (S6414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. In the case (S6452: Yes), the final mode command processing for display is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

The final display mode command process executed in the process of S6453 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 211. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no final display mode command in the process of S6452 (S6452: No), after executing the same process of S6420 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), The process proceeds to process 6401 of S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continuous value-related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) described above will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value related command process 4. In this continuation value-related command process 4, a process for setting and displaying a continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed, and a continuation effect. A process for displaying the effect executed in the process is executed.

When the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time has a display specific continuation value command (S7351). This display specific continuation value command is a specific value ("333") for indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value in the continuation value setting process 4 (see S4058 in FIG. 208) executed by the voice lamp control device 113. , "777") is selected. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this process, when it is determined that there is a specific continuation value command for display, the main continuation value output from the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be displayed as it is on the display screen. doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) indicating that the jackpot is won is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the sub-continuation value, and the main continuation value is set. Preventing a situation in which the continuation value obtained by adding the sub-continuation value and the sub-continuation value is displayed on the display screen, and the specific value ("333", "777") for indicating that the jackpot is won cannot be notified to the player. Can be done.

In the processing of S7351, when it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, when the display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time is received. ) Is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). When it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more) in the processing of S7353, the sub-continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value subselection table 234a3, and the process of S7356 is performed. Transition. Since each sub-continuation value defined in the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) of the first control example described above. , The description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the sub-continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4, and the process of S7356 is performed. Move to. Since each sub-continuation value defined in the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) of the first control example described above. , The description is omitted.

Then, in the processing of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub-continuation value selected by the processing of S7354 or S7355 are added up (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is larger than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value subselection table 234a4 in which the subcontradiction value that cannot be a value (that is, a positive value cannot be selected as the subcontradiction value) is specified, the voice lamp control device. For the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and the probability variation jackpot is won in this battle production) , It is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed).

When the processing of S7356 is completed, next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k is read (S7357), and the total value calculated by the processing of S7356 and the total value read by the processing of S7357 are combined. The difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the processing of S7365 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7351 that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: Yes), then the total value is read from the total value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation calculated in the processing of S7352 is performed. The difference between the value and the total value read in the processing of S7361 was calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference was determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and calculated this time. The continuation value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

After finishing the processing of S7360 or S7364 described above, the continuation value calculated in the processing of S7352 is then stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above. The same processing of S7306 to S7309 as the command processing (see FIG. 164) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the contents of the final mode command process (S6453) executed in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) described above will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, a process of setting a battle reach effect mode (display mode of the continuation value (HP value)) for showing the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) and a set effect mode are displayed on the display screen. The process for displaying and is executed.

When the final mode command process (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 of FIG. 149) executed by the voice lamp control device 113. Information is included, and the final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read out (S8302), and the initial stage of the final mode data table determined in the processing of S8301. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, in addition to the production data corresponding to the battle reach production mode (attack pattern mode) of a predetermined number of patterns, data regarding the continuation value (HP value) in which various values can be set is additionally set. By making it possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the production mode of battle reach.

After finishing the process of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is read (process 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is the information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, the information for indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118 (a)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the final mode command processing for display may be executed including dedicated information for showing the final result of the battle.

If it is determined in the processing of S8305 that the final result is not a victory (defeat or draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the total value storage area are stored. The difference from the total value is calculated (S8306), and the subtraction value of the first own attack effect data among the effect data of the determined final mode data table is changed to the subtraction value obtained by adding the calculated difference. Then (S8307), the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. , It is configured to be created by adding up the sub-continuation values set for the effect by the display control device 114. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. However, in the battle reach that displays the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen becomes as close to "0" as possible.

In such a case, for example, in the voice lamp control device 113, even if the main continuation value in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party does not become "0" is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114 There is a possibility that the continuation value (HP value) of the other party displayed on the display screen may become "0" depending on the sub-continuation value for the effect set in. That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the production, and rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the production, whereas when the displayed continuation value (HP value) becomes smaller, the voice lamp control device The error between the main continuation value set and managed in 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes a contradiction in the production result, and the production that gives the player a sense of distrust is executed. There was a problem that there was a risk of doing so.

Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the continuous effect (battle effect) of this time is determined, and the determination result is determined. In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuation value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is the attack during battle reach. I try to solve it by directing.

As a result, the above-mentioned problem caused by displaying the result of the continuous effect (battle effect) while leaving an error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen can be suppressed. Can be done. In this third control example, the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect). Since it is configured to eliminate the error with the value), it is possible to standardize the production mode of the remaining own attack patterns (for example, the second and third times).

In addition, when the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time is set to the production mode in which the attack pattern of the player is 0 times, the continuation value of the opponent does not decrease during the battle reach. Because it is an aspect, even if the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error between the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is produced. Since there is no problem of causing a contradiction in the result, the process of S8307 is configured so that the attack effect data change process is not executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, when it is determined that the final result is a victory (S8305: Yes), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8309, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

<About another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the third control example described above, the fluctuation scenario is set based on the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the set fluctuation scenario. , Battle reach and was configured to be able to be executed effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting bored early with respect to the continuous production executed according to the predetermined fluctuation scenario, a plurality of fluctuation scenarios are prepared and differ according to the jackpot type. It was configured to select a variable scenario.

Although the third control example configured in this way has a configuration capable of enhancing the effect of the continuous effect, it is set in correspondence with the storage capacity for storing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios and the plurality of fluctuation scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, since the main control device 110 needs to perform various processes related to the game and store data within the limited storage capacity, the increase in the storage capacity causes other processing and data storage amount. As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of fluctuation scenarios is reduced, in order to be able to provide a variety of continuous effects, the jackpot type is the same as in the third control example described above. In addition to the fluctuation scenario set in response to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, the fluctuation using a different fluctuation scenario for a predetermined period (for example, 10 rotations of the special symbol fluctuation) It was configured so that pattern selection was performed.

With this configuration, even when one variable scenario is set, the content of the continuous production to be executed can be different depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. it can. Further, since the effect mode during the continuous effect is set by the combination of a plurality of variable scenarios, it is possible to execute a continuous effect with abundant variations even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, the electrical configuration in this separate control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. This separate control example is different from the above-mentioned third control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are partially changed and the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in this control example, the small hit type selection table 202da is added to the above-mentioned third control example, and the contents of the first random number table 202a are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a in this separate control example is provided with a range for determining "small hit" in a part of the case where the random number table 202a is out of order as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (a). FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a in the control example according to the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the above-described third control example, the range of the random number counter value C1 per first ("5 to 5") in which "off" is defined when the game state is the probability change state as the lottery result. A "small hit" is defined for the range of "295-299" which is a part of "299"). When a "small hit" is won as a result of a lottery of a special symbol, a privilege that is less than the above-mentioned big hit but is advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, a control is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. As described above, since the "small hit" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when the "small hit" is won. It is possible to eliminate the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (b). FIG. 213 (b) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213 (b), in another control example of the third control example, the small hit type is set from a plurality of types. Specifically, out of a total of 100 counter values of "0" to "99", the acquisition value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Small hit A" is defined in association with each other, and "small hit B" is associated with the range of "50 to 99".

Then, when "small hit A" is won, a fluctuation scenario for executing a specific fluctuation pattern is additionally set, and when "small hit B" is won, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is configured so that the fluctuation scenario of is not additionally set.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca in the control example according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b). FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation scenario A1 stored in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. 214 (b) is a schematic diagram in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stored small hit post-variation scenario.

Only the above-mentioned two fluctuation scenarios are stored in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca in this control example, and when a probability variation jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , It is configured to be stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed in the probability change state, a change scenario after the small hit is set and is configured to be stored in the change scenario storage area 203ca. Then, after the end of the small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the number of times the special symbol changes specified in the small hit post-variation scenario and the content specified in the small hit post-variation scenario. There is.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in this separate control example as well, each time the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed and the special symbol variation is executed (see FIG. 204), as in the third control example described above. In the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is updated every time it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed). ..

The fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca is configured so that both the fluctuation scenario A1 and the post-small hit fluctuation scenario can be stored. If a small hit is won during the probability change state, both fluctuation scenarios are subjected to the fluctuation count subtraction process 4 (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the fluctuation scenario A1 can be updated regardless of the number of small hits won in the probability change state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit reaches 200 times. ..

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), in the fluctuation scenario A1, the above-mentioned table A (special (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the fluctuation count in the range of “1 to 4”, and the fluctuation count is defined. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of "14". Is stipulated.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 9, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is "5 to 195", the fluctuation pattern is changed using the table D after executing the special symbol fluctuation 9 times in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "195 to 198", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation) of the number of fluctuations is "199". The pattern table 202dc3) is specified. Then, in the range where the number of fluctuations is "200 to", the table B is associated and defined as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 214 (b), in the small hit post-variation scenario, the above-mentioned table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations of "1 to 9". Table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "10". 202dc3) is specified. Then, the fluctuation scenario is configured to end when the number of fluctuations exceeds 10. When the fluctuation scenario after the small hit is completed, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected according to the contents specified in the fluctuation scenario A1 in which the fluctuation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, different fluctuation scenarios are generated for a predetermined period (for example, 10 fluctuations of the special symbol). Since it is configured to be set, the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol can be different depending on the timing of winning the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the fluctuation scenario used when a small hit is won, a fluctuation pattern table (table D) in which battle reach is executed (easily) is defined. It is possible to prevent the situation where the battle reach is not executed for a long period of time.

In this separate control example, a configuration having one fluctuation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as the fluctuation scenario set after the end of the probability variation jackpot, but it has a plurality of fluctuation scenarios as in the third control example described above. The configuration may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a continuous effect of more patterns. In addition, in this control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets different fluctuation scenarios and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set different fluctuation scenarios are the same. Although it is configured to be the ratio of (50%), the distribution ratio of each small hit type may be set appropriately, the probability of winning a small hit, and the battle reach in the variable scenario A1. The variation pattern table (table D) in which is executed (easily performed) may be set based on the specified interval and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided at the time of winning the small hit.

Further, in this control example, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened depending on whether the special symbol is won as a big hit or a small hit, but pachinko is used. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device that is opened only when a small hit is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the opening of the second variable winning device to be more difficult to grasp than the opening of the variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, a small hit was won during the continuous production. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp this, it is possible to provide the player with a continuous production of various patterns without discomfort. In addition, in this case, the display of the third symbol for indicating that the small hit has been won is also displayed in a display mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, for example, the third symbol is reduced or displayed at the third symbol stop timing. It is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the third symbol in the main display area Dm of the three symbol display device 81.

In this separate control example, the first hit random number table 202a is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins a small hit, but the special symbol 1 may also be configured to win a small hit. In this case, the probability of winning a small hit may be different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a fluctuation scenario (variation scenario after small hit) different from the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol. , The case where the special symbol is won in the small hit is shown, but when other conditions are satisfied, it may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario. For example, in the second control example described above. It may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario when the fall lottery used is won.

<About another control example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another control example of the suggestion effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor of the first half part). The start timing of the effect) can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestion effect is executed without setting the execution period in advance, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the suggestion effect. In the suggestion effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestion effect. By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestion effect, it was possible to execute various combinations of the suggestion effect.

On the other hand, in this separate control example, the suggestion effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestion effect, and a predetermined condition (operation content to the frame button 22) that is satisfied during the period during which the suggestion effect is being executed). Based on the above, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is determined, and the countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. With this configuration, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be changed according to the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestion effect, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. Can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of the suggestion effect in the control example according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed according to the operation content of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestion effect. The same elements as those of the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of the suggestion effect in the above-described first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the fluctuation of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestion effect is started, the precursor display (see FIG. 98 (a)), which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed for 13 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Will be done. A button operation valid period for effectively determining the pressing operation on the frame button 22 is set for the latter 8 seconds of the display period in which the precursor is displayed, and the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period is set. Depending on the content of the operation to, the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the button operation valid period, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the display. The timing is determined by the operation timing determination means. The operation timing determining means is configured to be able to determine the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 is most timely (for example, within 0.2 seconds before and after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the specified timing from the button operation B (for example, the range of 1 second before and after the specified timing, excluding the range of the button operation B) The frame button 22 was operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) in the above range), the frame button 22 was operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 was not operated (hereinafter, no button operation). It can be distinguished at least from the case (referred to as).

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation A is performed, that is, if the button operation is performed during the button operation valid period but the operation timing is slightly different, the operation is executed during the current variation effect. Of the specific effects to be performed, a countdown effect is set for the specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Specifically, a countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as a countdown effect (values displayed in the second display area of the display screen of FIG. 98 (b) are "3", "2", "1", " The effect of counting down in the order of "0" is executed). Then, the cut-in display, which is the specific effect b, is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

Next, when the button operation B is determined by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button is operated at the right timing during the button operation valid period, the specific effect executed during the current variation effect is specified. A countdown effect is set for the effect a (PUSH display (see FIG. 99) executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Specifically, a 7-second countdown display is executed as a countdown effect. Then, the PUSH display, which is the specific effect a, is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

In addition, if the operation timing determination means determines that there is no button operation, that is, if the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period, or if the button is operated at a timing that is significantly deviated, a countdown effect is executed. Without doing anything, the suggestion effect ends at the timing when the precursor effect ends (Gase suggestion effect).

As described above, in the present-specific control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set at different timings (conditions) as in the first control example described above, and further, among the suggestion effects, , The specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect being executed is determined based on the predetermined condition (result of determining the operation content to the frame button 22) that is established during the precursor effect execution period, which is the first half part, and the second half part of the suggestion effect. It is configured to set the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, in this control example, the later the timing at which the specific effect (specific effect a, specific effect b) executed at a plurality of timings is executed, the higher the expectation that the special symbol variation this time is won as a big hit. It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed at the right time during the button operation valid period, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect having a high expectation of big hit, so that the player can be relieved.

That is, in FIG. 215, the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed is shown as an example, but among the plurality of variation patterns set in the pachinko machine 10, only the specific effect b is executed. Since there is also an out-of-order variation pattern, when the button operation A is performed in the variation pattern shown in FIG. 215, the target of the suggestion effect is the specific effect b, and the player is asked. , It is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the fluctuation pattern of this time is a fluctuation pattern in which both the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed, and the effect proceeds while giving the player anxiety. Become.

However, if the frame button 22 is operated at the right time during the button operation valid period, the countdown effect targeting the specific effect a is executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind without giving anxiety. Can be made. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game of operating the frame button 22.

In this separate control example, in the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one variation pattern, a predetermined condition (1) in which the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is satisfied after the suggestion effect is executed ( Although it is configured to be determined based on the operation content of the frame button 22), it may be configured not to display a specific effect that was not the target of the suggestion effect. Further, in the fluctuation pattern in which only the specific effect a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific effect a, which is the target of the suggestion effect, is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated in a timely manner, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the content of the suggestion effect to be executed when the frame button 22 can be operated in a timely manner, which is motivated by the player. Can operate the frame button 22.

In the other control example described above, as the operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect is started, an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner during the precursory effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed. Then, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect corresponding to the determined specific effect is set. ing.

In this case, as an operation effect, the characters "press the button at the right time" are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and an index display for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the mode and the movement display mode that moves with the passage of time so as to indicate to the player that the timing at which the movement display mode overlaps with the index display mode is the best timing. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of the operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error from the index display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display the characters "excellent" and "good" for notifying whether or not the error range is within the permissible range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to change the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance is determined. However, other configurations may be used as long as the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be changed based on the predetermined specified conditions and the actual operation content. For example, within the period during which the operation effect is executed. The number of times the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) may be determined, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be changed based on the determination result. An operation means other than 22 may be provided to determine whether or not a specific operation means has been operated among the plurality of operation means, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be changed based on the determination result.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (the effect mode of the countdown effect, which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect) is set based on the operation content for the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period. However, in order to obtain the same effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be set based on the timing at which the pressing operation is executed during the button operation valid period. Here, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. 216.

FIG. 216 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed depending on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestion effect. The same elements as those of the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of the suggestion effect in the first control example and another control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this separate control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is discriminated into the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds). It is divided as possible. Here, the effect mode of the suggestion effect set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (b) to 216 (d).

FIG. 216 (b) is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and is a timing chart of FIG. 216 (c). ) Is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and FIG. 216 (d) is a button. It is a timing chart which showed the effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the operation valid period.

First, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestion effect is specified. Then, the period from the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later is set as the precursor period (8 seconds), and the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period is started. It is set as the execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) with respect to the switching timing of the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation valid period (8 seconds). By configuring the timing to switch the production mode of the suggestion effect (switching from the precursor effect to the countdown effect) by 1 second, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds). Even if there is, it is possible to smoothly execute the process of switching the effect by using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation valid period change process for invalidating the operation of the frame button 22 is executed for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation valid period is set in advance, the operation on the frame button 22 during that period can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestion effect is specified. Let b be set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation valid period ends to the timing when the specific effect b starts. If there is no operation on the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 216 (d), the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is not set, and the button operation is valid during the button operation valid period. The precursor effect (13 seconds) is executed, and then the suggestion effect ends without the countdown effect (Gase suggestion effect).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is set based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, the above-mentioned description is given. The same effect as in FIG. 215 can be obtained.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half and second half), and different times (first half (first half (first half)) are used for each of the divided periods. 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)) are set, but it is sufficient if the operation timing to the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period can be identified. For example, the button operation is valid. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Further, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You may. As a result, different suggestive effects are executed even if the timing at which the button operation is performed on the frame button 22 is slightly shifted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the player's operation mode with respect to the frame button 22 (as a predetermined condition satisfied during execution of the suggestion effect) Whether or not there is an operation, the operation content, and the operation timing) are set, but other conditions may be set. For example, a prize generated during the execution of the suggestion effect (first entry slot 64, second entry) Even if the generation timing of the ball entry into the mouth 140, the ball entry into the general winning opening 63, the ball entry (passing) information into the through gate 67, and the content of the occurrence are set as predetermined conditions. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the firing of the ball during the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, an example in which the suggestion effect is completed during one special symbol change is shown. As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, the suggestion effect may be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this separate control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. In this separate control example, in the first control example described above, the countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided instead of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), and the frame button input monitoring / effect is provided. The difference is that the process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a hit (S4303), and if it is determined to be a hit (S4303: Yes), it is specified 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. After 30 seconds, the effect b (cut-in) is set to the specific effect a (PUSH) (S4371), and the process proceeds to the process of S4373.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (S4303: No), a specific effect b (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the processing of S4373, the button operation valid period is set in the period of 15 to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. (S4375), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5. When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), and if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5051: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the present is in the valid period of the first precursor effect (S5081), and if it is determined that it is in the valid period of the first precursor effect. (S5081: Yes), when the processing (S5082 to S5088) related to the frame button operation during the first precursor effect is executed and it is determined that the first precursor effect is not in the valid period (S5081: No), the second If it is determined whether or not it is in the valid period during the precursory effect (S5089), and if it is determined that it is in the valid period of the second precursory effect (S5089: Yes), the processing related to the frame button operation during the second precursory effect is performed. Is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the valid period during the second precursor effect (S5089: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, processing related to frame button operation (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect will be described. First, an error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5085). ), A display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086), and it is determined that the error is within 0.5 seconds. When it is determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect mode (S5087), the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 26 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5088), and the above-mentioned processing of S5077 is performed. And end this process. If it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds in the processing of S5086 (S5086: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing of S5077 as it is, and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the second precursor effect setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is the first half period, that is, the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, if it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 from the start of fluctuation. A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), then it is determined whether the present is the second half period, that is, the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the second half period (S5095). If it is determined that it is the latter half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect target (S5096), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation. The period up to is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the latter half period (S5095: No), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process is terminated.

<About another example of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the extended display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display process (the process of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot even during the special symbol change period after the end of the jackpot) will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extension display is executed, or a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the extension display is executed. If the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the third symbol is used. The demo display was performed on the display device 81, and the demo display was continued until the special symbol variation in which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) was set was completed.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and after the extension display is completed, the fluctuation for a short period (0.5 seconds). When the special symbol variation for which the time is set is executed, the variation effect is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation for which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) is set. There is.

Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which the variation effect is executed for a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds). For example, the remaining number of variation of the special symbol is 2 times (this variation). (Including), a 2-second variation effect is set, and if the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 (including this variation), a 3-second variation effect is set, and the remaining variation of the special symbol is set. If the number of times is 4 (including the current fluctuation), a 4-second fluctuation effect is set.

Then, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variation effect which is the specific period effect is being executed, the remaining period of the variation effect that has already been executed is newly executed. It is set so that the variable effect is rewritten so as to be.

With this configuration, when the extended display is executed after the jackpot ends and the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations or 4 seconds) after the jackpot ends wins the jackpot. On the other hand, in order to continue the production during the jackpot without feeling uncomfortable, when a short period (0.5 seconds) fluctuation time is set for a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within the predetermined period (4 seconds), it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Here, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 220 about the difference from the first control example described above. The present alternative example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed, and the other processes are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 6 in this alternative example. When the variation display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not on (off) (S3803: No), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between the time when the extension display is executed after the end of the jackpot and the time when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times).

When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223j is not 1 or more (0) in the processing of S3871, the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above is the same as that of S3811 to S3817. Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3871 when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), then the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is determined (S3872). , A specific period effect command for display is set (S3873), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S3874), and the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above is the same as S3812 to S3817. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this alternative example, a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between the execution of the extension display after the end of the jackpot and the change of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (4 times). , When the special symbol fluctuation is started, the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (value of the fluctuation count counter) is executed, so that the predetermined period (4) after the end of the jackpot is completed. Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within (seconds), it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When using the configuration of another example described above, the period for executing the extension display (number of special symbol fluctuations) may be longer than the maximum number of reserved symbols (4) of the special symbol 2, for example, extension. Set the maximum number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 0.5 second fluctuation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display end conditions, as the extended display end condition. You may. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the production during the big hit, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, it is executed in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the extension display after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times). If a jackpot is won with a special symbol variation, the jackpot game is started after the special symbol variation of 0.5 seconds variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5. In addition to the special symbol variation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute a variation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the variable effect using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<About another control example of the expectation suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another control example of the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. In this separate control example, as in the first control example described above, the effect period during which the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display Dk3, which are the expectation degree display modes displayed in one variation effect, can be displayed respectively. And the period during which the expected degree increase mode Dk4, which is the sum of the variable amounts in which each expected degree display mode is changed during the variable effect, can be displayed, is set in one variable effect (see FIG. 221), and each effect period is set. The operation validity period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set.

Further, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected when setting the variable effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. It is configured. With this configuration, the points earned in the expected degree increase mode Dk4 can be used for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol change during execution, so that the player can be enthusiastically used. You can participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the contents of the effect in the control example according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation degree suggestion effect in the control example according to the present invention. The description of the same elements as the expected degree suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221. When the variation effect in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed is executed, the expectation for notifying the expectation increase mode Dk4 in the current variation effect for 10 seconds from the time when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the variation. The variable degree suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102 (b)). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222 (a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222 (a), the display contents displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect will be described.

FIG. 222 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in the period from the notification of the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 to the execution of the expectation degree increase effect. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), the value (“3UP” in this figure) acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2. The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 221. After that, when 33 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the expectation increase effect in which the first operation valid period of 5 seconds is set is executed (FIG. 221 (c). In this state, FIG. 222 (b) shows. The indicated display screen is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the display mode of the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 is changed, and the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 is changed. The value is displayed as a subtraction. By operating the frame button 22 during each operation valid period in this way, the display mode of the corresponding expectation display can be changed, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22. It will be possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation degree 1 display is displayed over a plurality of operation valid periods, no matter which operation valid period the frame button 22 is operated. , The display mode may be variable. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation valid period, the display mode of the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 is not variable, or the variable amount is small, that is, the intermediate stage of the variation effect (first operation). It is possible to prevent the player from losing his expectation for a big hit at an early stage (during one operation valid period).

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in another control example of the expectation degree suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the expectation degree is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, the points to be given in the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 are set based on the selected expectation degree (S4252), and the effect executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the expectation degree. Aspects are set (S4253).

When the processing of S4253 is completed, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the effect mode is set. If there is a non-existing period (vacant period) (S4254: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information indicating a hit in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is winning information indicating a win (S4255: Yes), a hold symbol variable effect mode for changing the hold symbol is set during a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the processing of S4254, when there is no period in which the effect mode is not set (S4254: No), or in the processing of S4255, when it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a win (S4255: No), S4257 as it is. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S4257, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. Set (S4257), set the display expectation degree effect command (S4258), and end this process.

As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), the degree of expectation selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222i is used to determine the points to be given in the current variation effect and the points to be given. It is configured to set the effect mode used. Then, in the effect mode using the given points, whether or not there is a selected setting for each of the plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variation effect executed this time. (Whether or not to set the effect mode) and the content of the effect mode (type of expected degree display mode to be set, display mode) are set in the effect mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which effect mode is executed in which period (first period to third period). Further, since the number of expected degree display modes in which the display mode can be changed by using the value acquired as the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 during the expected degree variable suggestion effect period is also indefinite, it is acquired as the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. Even when the value is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of displayed expected degree display modes to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is used for the expected degree display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is lowered due to the effect result during the expected degree variable suggestion effect period.

In another control example of the expected degree suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 221, a configuration in which the expectation variable suggestion effect period is executed once in the early stage of the variable effect is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided in the middle of the variation effect (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221 (d)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221 (e))). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period for which the value acquired as the expectation increase mode Dk4 is used during the expectation variable suggestion effect, so that a large value (expectation increase mode Dk4) can be reduced. For example, when 3) is won, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be further increased. Further, the expected degree variable suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable effect.

Further, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion effect, when the effect mode using the given points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the display mode of the reserved symbol is displayed as an additional effect. Although a configuration is used in which an effect of varying the above is used, other contents may be used as an additional effect. For example, a value collected by the player (for example, in another example of the first control example described above). The effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176 (c)) described above and the effect for suggesting the current gaming state may be added.

In addition, even when the effect mode using the given points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which the operation validity period can be set, the effect selection means that allows the player to select the effect to be executed. (For example, a means for displaying a selection screen for selecting an effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting an effect to be executed by an operation means that can be operated by the player) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be changed.

In the expected effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, for display, the expected degree variable suggestion effect period is defined as a fixed period of the variable effect (a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the variation shown in FIG. 221). The expectation degree effect command is set so as to be set, but as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means for determining the selected expectation degree by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222i. The period for executing the variable expectation suggestion effect is a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 221 and a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation). A means for setting the expected degree variable suggestion effect period may be provided to set any of the periods of 50 seconds)). As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, it is configured to set the period during which the variable expectation suggestion effect is executed by the above-mentioned variable expectation suggestion effect period setting means based on the elements other than the expectation selected by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222i. For example, the period during which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed may be set based on the operation content in which the player operates the operating means, or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a may be set. It may be configured to set the period in which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed based on the information contained in the information.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7. When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 is executed, it is first determined whether the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), if it is detected (S5051: Yes), and then the hold variable effect setting. It is determined whether it is in the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is in the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: Yes), a variable display command for changing the hold symbol is set (S5902) and subtracted. A display command indicating a later grant point is set (S5903), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the pending variable effect setting period is not in progress (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation valid period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation valid period. If this is the case (S5904: Yes), a variable display command for changing the first expectation degree display (expectation degree 1 display) Dk1 is set (S5905), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set. (S5903), this process is terminated.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation valid period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation valid period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation valid period, it is determined. (S5906: Yes), the second expectation degree display (expectation degree 2 display), a display variable command for changing Dk2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , End this process.

In the process of S5906, when it is determined that it is not the second operation valid period (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and when it is determined that it is the third operation valid period, it is determined. (S5908: Yes), the third expectation degree display (expectation degree 3 display), a display variable command for changing Dk3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , End this process.

As described above, in this separate control example, as in the first control example described above, the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display, which is the expectation degree display mode displayed in one variation effect, is displayed. An effect period in which each Dk3 can be displayed and a period in which the expected degree increase mode Dk4, which is the sum of the variable amounts in which each expectation display mode is changed during the variable effect, can be displayed, are set in one variable effect ( (See FIG. 221), the operation valid period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set for each effect period.

Further, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected when setting the variable effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. It is configured. With this configuration, the points earned in the expected degree increase mode Dk4 can be used for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol change during execution, so that the player can be enthusiastically used. You can participate in the game.

The points given in this control example are set so that they can be used when the frame button 22 is operated during all the operation validity periods, and the amount of the frame button 22 not operated is changed. It may be configured so that time remains, and the content of the title-giving effect described above may be changed with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the fluctuation.

<A1 Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the A1 embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. The same configuration as described in each of the above-described examples and control examples will be described again for convenience. First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 296, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as the A1 embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment. It is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment is formed into an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It includes an inner frame 12 that is openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 229) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 226), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 229) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 227) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are shown). In addition to the rails 61 and 62 (not shown), the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), the normal symbol start opening (not shown). The through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof, which is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 penetrate through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 227.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 227) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 227) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

The first winning opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 to the left and right, and the left side of the variable display unit 80 is the left flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is the game. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured so as not to flow down the right channel. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left flow path and the game ball flowing down the right flow path can enter.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right flow path is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left flow path. The second winning opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which the game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball enters the opening. A photo sensor that detects a game ball is provided. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the opening / closing drive is driven to the front side with the variable opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with an opening solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a downward in the front, and the open state where the ball easily wins in the opening of the second winning opening 640 is temporarily held. It operates so as to repeat the open state and the normally closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. The jackpot type determined here is the 5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (big hit A), 5R time reduction, which is set corresponding to the first special symbol that is variablely displayed when the first winning opening 64 is won. (3 times) Big hit (big hit B), 15R normal big hit (big hit C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time saving (95 times) jackpot (big hit D) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed when the second winning opening 640 is won is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (big hit A)" means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 95 times after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and is 95. During the period until the second fluctuation stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and a time-saving game state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected is set. It's a big hit. "5R time reduction (3 times) jackpot (big hit B)" means that the special symbol (1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol) is changed 3 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and the 3rd fluctuation. A big hit in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state and the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected in the short game state until the stop. Is. Further, the "15R normal jackpot (big hit C)" is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set and a time saving game state is not set after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.

During the time saving (during the time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time saving, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a is applied once. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is released than during normal times. Further, during the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is calculated. , It may be changed so as to increase compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the fluctuation of the third symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying and the second symbol are variably displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the time reduction, the winning lottery (the number of variation display of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. When a ball enters the second winning opening 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate 17, so that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. , The game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and the investment for lending additional balls can be suppressed, while the lottery of special symbols can be performed during a short period of time. ..

In addition, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case of, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left flow path of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board is It is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 229), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out, but the prize ball is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls such as one ball is used. It may be configured to pay out the prize ball.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory The 640a is in an open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, the symbol "○" in the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot (it becomes a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), it is 15R at a rate of 100%. When the time saving (95 times) big hit (big hit D) is selected and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (it becomes a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the time saving game state is given. The jackpot is a jackpot of up to 5R (61% ratio when it becomes a jackpot), and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is selected. Has been done. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (a state in which the time reduction is not given in the low probability gaming state), the ball is easier to win in the first winning opening 64 than in the second winning opening 640. By making the 1 winning opening 64 win a game ball, the ratio of selecting the jackpot (big hit A or jackpot B) to which the time saving is given is set low, and the time saving is given and the ball is given to the second winning opening 640. When it becomes easy to win a prize, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol, and it can be configured so that the time saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of being given a time saving.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 capable of guiding the ball to the V entry port 600a of the V winning device 620 is arranged. When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit B or a small hit, the V winning door 600 stands upright and the ball does not enter the V entrance 600a. The ball can enter the V entry port 600a by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small hit, a 1R (round) small hit game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is opened for 1.2 seconds or until 10 balls are won and the V winning opening 600a is won. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, the V winning door is opened up to the 1st round as in the small hit game, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the open state from the 2nd round. Here, from the 2nd round, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is set in advance as 1R (round) until 30 seconds or 10 balls win the specific winning opening 65a. Round games are repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

With this configuration, whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, and it is a small hit. By configuring the game to shift to a game or a jackpot game, the game ball is similarly inserted into the V winning device 620, and the game is played with the expectation that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 624, which will be described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 of the V winning device 620, which will be described later, so that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. .. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened from the 1st round of the big hit that is started when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game.

In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, in the jackpot game of the 1st round, when the game ball enters the V winning device 620, the winning control is executed so that the game ball enters the V winning opening 624. It is configured in. As a result, even in the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, by winning the V winning opening 624, it is possible to make the variable winning device 65 seem to be opened after that (actually, 2R in the jackpot game). Eyes are running). When a ball wins in the V entry port 600a and the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls for each ball. In the big hit game other than the big hit B, since the variable winning device 65 is configured to be in the open state from the 1R (round) th, the content of the big hit game is that the big hit game is started instead of the small hit. It is also configured so that it can be identified by.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol (for example, a doublet symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the big hit lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, the small hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol (for example, a doublet symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the hit is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol is similarly displayed in the reach display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same) in the third symbol display device 81. The chance symbol symbol consisting of a combination of three symbols (display mode in which the structure is stopped) is displayed as a stop, the middle symbol is displayed as a chance symbol (the third symbol with the letters "CHANGE") is displayed as a stop, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed. It will be notified by being done. As a result, the player can perform at least a game (corresponding to a small hit game or a big hit game) in which the 1R V winning door 600 is opened by displaying the third symbol stopped at the chance symbol. It is possible to recognize that and expect the ball to enter the V winning opening 624. In addition, when a specific symbol (for example, 777 doublet symbol) is stopped and displayed in the third symbol, it is assumed that the jackpot game is executed, and the specific symbol is specified. Is displayed, the player may be configured to recognize at an early stage that a high-value-added jackpot game will be executed.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of jackpot B, from the 2nd round, in the case of other than jackpot B, from the 1st round, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward in the front, and the ball is easily opened to win the specific winning opening 65a. Is temporarily formed, and it operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80, and is attached to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guide member 622, a rotary distribution member 621, a V winning port 624, a left discharge path 623a, a right discharge path 623b, a first retention member 622d, and a flow path switching. It is composed of a member 622e.

Normally, the rotary distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and the rotary distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left-right direction at a constant cycle when the power is turned on. It is configured to. When the V winning door 600 is opened at the start of the small hit game or the big hit game, the game ball can flow into the V entrance 600a of the V winning device 620. A V entry port 600a through which a game ball can enter is formed at the abutting portion between the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, and the game ball enters the V winning device 620 from the V entry port 600a. A taxiway is formed to guide the vehicle. A photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in the V entry port 600a, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings in the V winning device 620 (V entry port 600a). The prize balls (3 balls) are paid out to the player based on the detection of the balls by the photo sensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning device 620 will be described in detail according to the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small hit game. When the small hit game is started, after the opening period (t1: 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid operates (operates ON) during the opening period (t2: 1.2 seconds) to win a V prize. The door 600 is variable to the open state. The game ball that has flowed down the taxiway when the game ball has won a prize in the V entrance 600a in the open state is configured so that the flow of the ball is restricted by the first retention member 622d shown in FIG. The first retention member 622d is configured such that the retention 1 solenoid operates (operates ON) for 4 seconds so as to project to the front side so as to retain the ball at the upper part based on the start of the small hit game. .. When one ball is retained in the first retention member 622d, the game ball that flows down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or right side. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600 elapses, 2.7 seconds after the V winning opening solenoid is activated and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, The staying 1 solenoid 209a is operated off, the first staying member 622d is retracted toward the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball staying at the upper part is configured to flow downward. Below the first retention member 622d, a flow path switching member 622e that always operates in the left-right direction is arranged.

The flow path switching member 622e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4 s by the flow path solenoid 209b. When it is turned off, it can move to a position where the inflow port of the movable guide member 622 is closed, and the ball cannot enter the movable guide member 622. In the off state, the ball flowing down from the upstream is guided to the right by the inclined portion formed on the upper part of the flow path switching member 622e and is discharged to the outside of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow path solenoid is on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side of the inflow port, the ball can flow into the movable guide member 622. It is configured.

The flow path switching member 622e is in an open state (a state in which the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side) at the timing when the first retention member 622d is retracted and the retained game ball flows down. Then, the ball flows into the movable guide member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 is formed in a tubular shape capable of allowing one ball to flow down, an inflow port into which the ball flows is formed on one end side, and the ball is discharged on the other end side. A discharge port 622a is formed. A recess 622c for holding one ball is formed in front of the discharge port 622a (upstream side), and a second retention member that prevents the ball entering the recess 622c from flowing down on the downstream side of the recess 622c. 622b is arranged. The second staying member 622b is in a regulated state in which the staying 2 solenoid 612 is activated (turned on) to project upward to prevent the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down, and the staying 2 solenoid 612 is turned off and the second staying member is turned off. The 622b is changed to a release state in which the ball rotates to the left to allow the ball entering the recess 622c to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second staying member 622b is in a state of being changed to the regulated state by operating (on) the staying 2 solenoid 612 for 2 seconds (t6) 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. , The ball that has entered the recess 622c is restricted from flowing down. The movable guide member 622 is rotated to the left by the staying 2 movable motor 610a 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game (t4) so that the inflow port side rises as shown in FIG. 231 (b). After that, for 1.5 seconds (t5), the residence 2 movable motor 610a is operated to raise the movable guide member 622 and control it to move to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231 (b)). As described above, the staying 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be off at a timing 6 seconds after the start of the small hit game, so that the second staying member 622b is released while the movable guide member 622 is rising. When the movable guide member 622 is tilted downward to the left and the tilt angle is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622c can easily flow down to the lower left.

As shown in FIG. 229 (a), when the ball that has entered the recess 622c starts to flow down, the ball that has entered the recess 622c is discharged from the discharge port 622a to the rotary distribution member 621. The discharged ball rolls on the rotary distribution member 621 and is discharged downstream. The rotary distribution member 621 is rotated left and right at regular intervals after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the V winning opening 624 and the rotary distribution member 621 arranged downstream of the rotary distribution member 621 When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at the timing when the downstream discharge port 621a coincides with the downstream discharge port 621a in parallel, the ball can easily enter the V winning port 624. On the other hand, when a ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a in a state where the downstream discharge port 621a and the V winning port do not coincide in parallel, the V winning device 620 is operated by the left discharge path 623a or the right discharge path 623b arranged on the left and right. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the V validity period for determining that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 for 2 seconds (t7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small hit is set. It is configured. Only when the photo sensor detects that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during this V valid period, the winning detection is enabled, and if a winning is made in any other period, it is invalidated and controlled. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine only the period during which the V winning opening 624 can be won, and damage caused by fraud such as when the ball is operated with a magnet or the like to illegally win the V winning opening 624. Can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when a prize is detected in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. The big hit game given when the ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is the type of the executed small hit game (small hit A or small hit B (FIGS. 244 (b) to (c)). It is configured so that the jackpot type corresponding to (see)) is set.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case where the ball does not pass through V in the small hit. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622e is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guide member 622 due to the release of the first retention member 622d, resulting in a V prize. Here is an example of what was not done. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for winning the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot is B, and FIG. 255 is a timing chart when the V winning opening 624 is not won when the jackpot is B. This is an example. Further, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set when a big hit or a small hit is made in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), when the small hit A in the special figure 1 is executed, a 5R (time saving 95 times) big hit is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal (10R normal ( No time reduction) A jackpot is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 244 (c), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, a 15R (time reduction 95 times) big hit is set, and when the small hit D is executed, 5R ( When the small hit E is executed, the 5R (no time reduction) big hit is set. It should be noted that the time reduction of each jackpot name described above indicates that the time reduction game state is set, and the subsequent number display indicates the number of changes of the special symbol as the period in which the time reduction game state is set. Normal means that it is a big hit in which the time saving game state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is executed by winning the V winning opening 624, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V winning opening 624 is not limited to this. The counter value (for example, the first type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning a prize, and may be configured to be selected from a predetermined selection table. As the predetermined selection table, a different selection table may be set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), a different selection table may be set depending on the type of special symbol, or the executed small A different selection table may be set depending on the hit type.

Here, if the variation display when the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are determined to be small hits or big hits is stopped and displayed, the small hit type is displayed. , The LED of the first symbol display device 37a is lit and displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are combined and displayed, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37a, the details of the small hit type and the large hit type are configured so as to be difficult to identify at first glance. Has been done. Further, in the case of a big hit, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type. As for the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by characters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the jackpot type, so that it is more difficult for the player to identify. As a result, even if the player is notified of the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the number of rounds of the jackpot by the first symbol display device 37 so as to maintain the fairness of the game, the notification is difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the small hit game and the big hit game before the execution, and the player can determine the small hit type, the big hit type, etc. even during the small hit game and the big hit game in the big hit B. It is configured so that you can play while making predictions. As a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the type of the big hit game given when winning the V winning opening 624 differs depending on the small hit type, so that the big hit is disadvantageous to the player. When the small hit game corresponding to the small hit type to which the type is given is executed, the game is stopped by stopping the firing of the game ball and playing the game so that the game ball does not enter the V entrance 600a. There is a risk that the disadvantage on the game store side will increase, but in the configuration of this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode in which the type of small hit is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the way of playing the game that suffers the above-mentioned disadvantages.

Further, 0.1 seconds after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, the V winning door 600 is opened and the open state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Even if the player is able to analyze and identify the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the player operates the launch of the game ball after the identification, the V entry port 600a is reached. It is configured so that it is difficult to fire the game ball so that it reaches it. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since 100 game balls are fired at equal intervals per minute regardless of the firing intensity, they are configured to fire once every 0.6 seconds. It takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V entry port 600a after being launched from the launcher. Therefore, if the game ball is not continuously launched to the right region, the V entry port 600a It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the V entry port 600a, and if the ball is not allowed to enter the V entry port 600a at the time of a small hit, the game ball is entered into the V entry port 600a for the small hit game corresponding to any small hit type. Will not be able to enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed and a right-handed notification (a notification mode for notifying the player to launch the game ball to the right-hand area) is given, the player immediately starts right-handed hitting. You can make the game play like you do.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 600a, or 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the variable winning device 65.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 in front view, and is shown in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 228, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is triggered by the ball in the first symbol display device 37. Fluctuation display is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, in the third symbol, the variation display is performed in common with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be variablely displayed at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variablely displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variablely displayed at the same time. It may be a possible configuration. With this configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of numbers from "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol string having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol sequence, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers in each symbol row, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed on the right side of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed on the right side of the middle symbol row.

In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of the "round symbol" is displayed for each reserved ball, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls from the number of reserved symbols. A maximum of four reserved balls are set for each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and each reserved ball is a reserved ball between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a distinctly different color (for example, black for the first winning opening 64 and red for the second winning opening 640).

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a normal symbol hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202aa, and a small hit. The scenario table 202ab is set respectively. Data and the like necessary for other games are also stored, but since they are unnecessary in the description of the invention in the present embodiment, the description will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the normal symbol hit random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e will be described in detail later with reference to the figures.

The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table in which a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is defined, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). The jackpot type includes the period until the game is completed), the round period (the maximum period during which one round game is set), and the interval period between rounds (the period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game). Correspondingly specified, it corresponds to the value of the scenario counter 203aa which is set when the jackpot game is started and the value is incremented by 1 periodically (every time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed). Operation control is executed.

In this jackpot scenario table 202aa, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types are defined. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), the jackpot scenario table 202aa defines different scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types (big hit A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), the jackpot scenarios a202aa1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R are the jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened is executed. A jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to a jackpot game for 15R is defined in D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game, the jackpot type B in which the V winning opening 624 or the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game is used. Hit scenario a202aa2 showing the operation content of the first half of the first round, hit scenario b202aa3 showing the operation content of the second half of the first round, hit scenario c202aa4, and the operation content of the round game from the second round to the fifth round. The jackpot scenario b202aa5 showing the above is specified.

In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, the content of the round game of the first round is the same as the game content of the small hit game (error that is difficult for the player to identify). When the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V winning door 600 is opened and the round game (V challenge) aiming at the V winning opening 624 is executed. Will be done.

Further, by opening the V winning door 600 during this V challenge, the game ball can easily enter the V entry port 600a, and the game ball entering the V entry port 600a becomes a flow path switching member. Based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown) whether or not the game ball has passed through 622e and is retained by the second retention member 622b of the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231 (a)). Based on the discrimination result, the operation contents of the latter half of the first round game are configured to be different.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) Special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided in each of these areas, and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set according to the timing of entering the ball. The values of the random number counter C1 per unit, the type counter C2 per unit, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 240. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (see FIGS. 242 (a) to 242) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Here, in the first random number table 202a1, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol are set respectively.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "0 to 3". If it is any of 3 ”, it is determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out of order), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "4". If it is "4", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 242 (c), in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the same manner as the first special symbol is "0 to 3", and " If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out of order), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "4 to 997". If it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

In this way, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, but with respect to the small hit probability, the second special symbol has a smaller hit probability than the first special symbol. Is set high. As a result, in the time-saving game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, the lottery is easily executed with the second special symbol, so that the probability of a small hit increases and the V winning opening 624 is won. Opportunities that can be made can be increased. Therefore, since the time-saving game state can be set more favorably for the player, it is expected that the jackpot game to which the time-saving game state is given will be executed even when the normal game state is set. It is possible to play the game, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). ) Are added one by one in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that serve as jackpots for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are random numbers per special symbol as described above. It is stored in the table 202a1 and the random number table 202a2 per special symbol 2. As described above, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/250".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241 (a)) for determining the type of jackpot to be executed is displayed. It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 which is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the first special symbol, and a second special A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for a symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned three types from jackpot A to jackpot C are set so as to be selected according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "0 to 44", the jackpot type is "big hit A (5R time reduction 95 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "0 to 44" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "45 to 60", the jackpot type is "big hit B (5R time reduction 3 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "45 to 60" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "61 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R time saving no jackpot)". That is, the value of "61 to 99" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, in the normal game state, the game is mainly played by winning the game ball into the first winning opening 64, but the time saving game state is 61% of the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is a big hit (big hit A and big hit B) to be given. Therefore, even if a big hit is made in the first special symbol, the time-saving game state is not necessarily given, so that the player is interested in whether or not the time-saving game is given even if the big hit is made. You can have it and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 243 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of the jackpot D described above is set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D (15R time reduction 95 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "0 to 99" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, when a big hit is made for the second special symbol (by the big hit judgment for the winning of the second winning opening 640), the big hit that the time saving game is given is always given. There is. Furthermore, the number of time reductions is set to 95, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, so that it is more advantageous to the player than the jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a big hit is obtained mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol which is easy to be executed in the time saving game state, the big hit game which is more advantageous than the first special symbol is executed, and the time saving is shortened. It is configured to be of high value when the gaming state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202e for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see FIG. 244 (a)). Is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the small hit type selection table 202e includes a special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202e1 which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the first special symbol, and a second small hit type selection table 202e. A special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202e2, which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the special symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202b1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned two types of small hit A and small hit B are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 64", the small hit type is "small hit A (5R time reduction 95 times big hit when passing V)". It becomes. That is, the value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "65 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit B (10R time saving no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "65-99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in each of the small hit A and the small hit B, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the 5R time saving 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 as the time saving game state. It is configured to set the time saving game (the period until the special symbol is changed 95 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit B, the 10R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured so that the time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set. In this way, the small hit B has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game and is set to be more advantageous than the small hit A. It is difficult to execute the lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous, and overall, it is set so that the small hit A is more advantageous to the player when the V winning opening 624 is won than the small hit B. Has been done.

FIG. 244 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202b2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned three types of small hit C to small hit D are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit C (15R time saving 95 times big hit when passing V)". It becomes. That is, the value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "50 to 79", the small hit type is "small hit D (5R time saving 95 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "80 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit E (5R time saving no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in each of the small hit C to the small hit E, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit C, the 15R time saving 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time saving game state is 95. It is configured to set the time saving game (the period until the special symbol is changed 95 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit D, the 5R time reduction 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit D is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the variable winning is executed. A jackpot in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 times of time-saving games (the period until the special symbol change is executed 95 times and stopped is displayed) are set as the time-saving game state. It is configured. Further, in the case of the small hit E, the 5R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit E is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured so that the time-saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is set.

In this way, regarding the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 624 is won more than the small hit type for the first special symbol, the small hit in which the time saving game state that is advantageous to the player is set is set. The rate at which the type is selected is set high. As a result, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. By determining that it is a small hit and winning a prize in the V winning opening 624, it is possible to easily execute the big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again. As a result, the jackpot game can be given to the player while the time-saving game state is continued, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. It is configured to. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, he / she wants to effectively use the remaining time-saving number of times to perform the game so that the more advantageous jackpot game (the jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed. .. Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only when the small hit type is not given the time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the V entry port 600a is reached. There is a risk that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter, is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variation display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of the present embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and takes 2 seconds to reach the V entry port 600a, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entry port 600a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation is stopped, and the right-handed notification is sent to the third symbol display device 81. It seems that it is difficult to insert the game ball into the V entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types unless the game ball is immediately launched to the right side area and the game is performed. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method, which is significantly disadvantageous to the game store side.

Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each hit type and the operation of the hit game will be described. For jackpot A and jackpot C, a round game in which 1R is continued until 10 balls and a game ball are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds is repeatedly executed for 5R.

In the jackpot B, in the 1st round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V entrance 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. If 10 balls are won in the 1st round, the game will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed, but in 1.2 seconds, it is impossible to actually enter 10 balls. It has become. In the 2nd to 5th round round games, a round game that continues until 10 balls and a game ball are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds is executed.

In the jackpot D, 10 balls of 1R are repeatedly executed for 15R until the variable winning device 65 wins a game ball or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the variable type counter CS1 and the lottery result (missing, big hit type, small hit), so-called short loss (7 seconds), loss (30 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display modes of various types (90 seconds), pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development 1 time production (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds), pseudo-development 3 times production (42 seconds) Fluctuation time) is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 245 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245 (a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in the normal gaming state and a time saving variation pattern table 202d2 used in the time saving gaming state. Are set respectively.

FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for normal use. The normal variation pattern table 202d1 has various variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of order, such as short out (7 seconds), out of case (30 seconds), and normal reach ( 30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuations are collated with the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value and the set judgment value. The pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", a short deviation (7 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "140 to 149", a gap deviation (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", various normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "180 to 194", various super reach (60 seconds) is selected, which is "195 to 198". In this case, the determination value is set so that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

Various normal reach (30 seconds) as a variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B). , Various super reach (60 seconds) and various special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value with the set judgment value. Will be done. Here, it is configured so that the player is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by displaying the third symbol as a doublet (sign-matched jackpot) when the fluctuation is stopped. Note that the "777" doublet is displayed only when the jackpot type is such that the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of the jackpot type in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game, the doublet other than the “777” doublet is also determined by the lottery for determining the stop symbol of the third symbol. It is also configured so that it is not known whether the time-saving game will be given until after the big hit game.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", various normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "41 to 179", various super reach (60 seconds) is selected. When it is selected and is "180 to 198", the determination value is set so that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

In addition, each fluctuation pattern selected in the case of a big hit is composed of the same fluctuation time as each fluctuation pattern selected in the case of a miss, and is finally a stop symbol (doublet) indicating a big hit. It is configured to differ depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the judgment result is wrong, the player can have an expectation for the big hit by selecting the same fluctuation pattern (variation pattern that becomes the reach) that is selected even in the case of the big hit. it can.

When the lottery result of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is a small hit or a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, the variation pattern selected is pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development 1 time production. (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times effect (38 seconds), and pseudo-development 3 times effect (42 seconds) are set respectively, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are set. The matching and corresponding variation patterns are selected. Here, when the fluctuation is stopped, the chance eye (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified that at least a small hit has been won. As a result, even if it is a big hit B, it is displayed with the same stop symbol as the small hit, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that the V winning opening 624 will win the game ball in the small hit game. it can.

Specifically, when the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", pseudo-development no effect (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is "50 to 99", pseudo-development once effect (30 seconds). 34 seconds) is selected, and if it is "100 to 149", the pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the pseudo-development 3 times production (38 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set so that they are selected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236, the third symbol display device 81 in the disengagement (30 seconds), the pseudo-development no effect (30 seconds), and the pseudo-development one-time effect (34 seconds) in the present embodiment. The displayed production mode will be described. FIGS. 232 to 233 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol when the gap is removed (30 seconds). When the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be out of alignment starts to change, each of the third symbols (left, middle, left) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 232 (a). The right symbol) starts scrolling in the vertical direction. Further, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a "round symbol" in a display area smaller than the area where the third symbol is displayed (the area where each third symbol is displayed). "And" x symbol "are alternately displayed in two columns on the left and right as a variable display. The fourth symbol is configured to be variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Outside: Round symbol in the left column, x symbol combination in the right column, jackpot: round symbol in the left column, round symbol combination in the right column, small hit: x symbol in the left column, x symbol combination in the right column) It is configured to be stopped and displayed at. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (b), the state in which three lines are drawn on the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the case of disengagement (30 seconds), 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the third symbol that was temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 is fixedly stopped (stopped from the shaking fluctuation), and the fourth symbol is synchronized with it. Is also configured to be stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), the left and right symbols are in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. The difference is that the chance symbol with the characters "CHANGE" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in the pseudo-development one-time effect (34 seconds). When it is determined to be a small hit or a big hit B and the pseudo-development one-time effect is selected, FIG. As shown in a), each of the third symbols (left, middle, right symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 starts scrolling in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed in a high-speed scroll display (speed or mode in which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. After displaying, each third symbol is shaken up and down).

After that, in the pseudo-development one-time effect, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the "5" symbol of the middle symbol and the "4" symbol of the right symbol are variably displayed so as to be interchanged. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of "345", it is set as a combination symbol that notifies the player that the re-variation is executed. By moving to and displaying the combination of "345" as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the scroll display is started again in the vertical direction. After that, through the high-speed scroll display, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the stop is displayed at the timing when 34 seconds of the fluctuation time (variation period) has elapsed. Here, in the case of the pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds) and the pseudo-development 3 times production (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if the pseudo-development 2 times production is performed, it will change again. In the case of the pseudo-development three-time effect, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the effect in which the re-variation is executed twice is executed. By executing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small hit game or the big hit B starts.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 236, the SW (switch) effect in the disengagement, pseudo-development 1-time effect, pseudo-development 2 times effect, and pseudo-development 3 times effect will be described. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects the detailed effect contents by lottery based on the variation pattern command indicating the disengagement, the pseudo-development 1 time effect, the pseudo-development 2 times effect, and the pseudo-development 3 times effect. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop is displayed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is pressed. An effect that encourages the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), if any of the pseudo-development 1-time effect, the pseudo-development 2-time effect, and the pseudo-development 3-time effect is selected, the effect is changed again. The symbol "345" suggesting that is displayed and the re-variation is executed. On the other hand, when the disengagement is selected, the temporarily stopped symbol does not change as shown in FIG. 236, and is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation period elapses. ..

In the present embodiment, the "CHANGE" symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the final stop symbol that has changed again, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "CHANGE" symbol and other symbols (for example, the middle symbol) are displayed. The "4" symbol) may be alternated, or both symbols may be displayed and scrolled to display an effect as to whether the "CHANGE" symbol is displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, if the "CHANGE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, it may be changed again when it is changed again from the stopped symbol. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to discriminate each fluctuation pattern before the player is fixedly stopped, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the start timing of the small hit game and the big hit B. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that the small hit and the big hit are displayed in a mode in which the small hit and the big hit can be identified in the fourth symbol, the attention to the fourth symbol can be reduced by the effect of the third symbol, and the small hit game is started. Can be difficult to identify. Further, since the fourth symbol is configured so that the type of the small hit cannot be identified, the first symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the launch of the game ball in the specific small hit game is stopped, etc. It is possible to suppress the special game method (strategy) of.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 238, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until the fixed stop symbol in the small hit or the big hit B is described. As explained earlier in the pseudo-development no production, pseudo-development 1-time production, pseudo-development 2 times production, and pseudo-development 3 times production, when the chance symbol indicating the final stop symbol temporarily stops, the chance symbol fluctuates. In this state, the words "Preparing to aim to the right" are displayed at the top of the chance pattern. Further, the outline of the right-handed notification symbol n for notifying the operator to operate the firing handle with the firing intensity for firing the game ball to the right side region is displayed lightly on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation time elapses and 2 seconds before the fluctuation time elapses, the characters "Now, let's aim at the right" are displayed, and the density of the outline of the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed darkly (FIG. 237). See (b)). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed not only in the outline but also in color to the inside, and the character "right-handed" is displayed on the left side thereof.

In this way, the right-handed notification is notified step by step from before the final stop, so that the game ball is launched into the right area at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is not launched in time during the period.

In the present embodiment, when the re-variation is executed a predetermined number of times and then the fixed symbol is displayed, the right-handed notification symbol is displayed in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a temporary stop is performed. When the step display of the right-handed notification symbol n is started at each timing and the display mode is changed to the right-handed notification symbol n (see FIG. 238), the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed before switching to the confirmed display mode of the right notification symbol n (see FIG. 238). May be hidden and the third symbol may be revariated again. In this case, the "CHANGE" symbol is displayed on the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when it is changed again, it is not fixedly displayed, but it is scrolled again, and when it is off, another number is displayed. It may be a fixed stop symbol that is replaced with the three symbols and is fixedly stopped (for example, scrolled (shifted) by one frame to stop) to notify the deviation. With this configuration, it is more difficult to understand the start time of the small hit, and each time the temporary stop is made, the player is made to prepare for a right-handed hit, and a special game such as not firing in a specific small hit type is performed. Can be suppressed.

Next, the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used to select a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. In the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving gaming state is out of order, the short out (2 seconds) and the short out pseudo once (2 seconds) 6 seconds), short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value with the set determination value.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", a short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "91 to 189", a short deviation pseudo once (6 seconds) is selected. ) Is selected, and when it is "190 to 198", the determination value is set so that the short deviation pseudo twice (9 seconds) is selected.

Short deviation (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol greatly shakes and fluctuates). After fluctuating and temporarily stopping for 1 second, a variable effect is executed in which the symbol is switched to the off symbol (the symbol whose middle symbol is scrolled (sliding) one frame downward from the "CHANGE" symbol) and is fixedly stopped to notify that it is out. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed. The middle symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANGE" symbol and the symbol "for example," 1 "symbol" arranged one frame next to it are alternately displayed at the stop display position. , It is configured so that the player does not misunderstand that it is a lottery result such as a small hit.

The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is speeded up again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short deviation (2 seconds) 1 second temporary stop. After starting the fluctuation and re-changing, temporarily stop for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), and then scroll down one frame from the deviation symbol (middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol). It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation effect is executed in which the (sliding) symbol) is switched to (sliding), the confirmation is stopped, and the notification of the deviation is executed.

The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short deviation pseudo 1 time temporary stop for 2 seconds. After starting and re-changing, temporarily stop for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), and then scroll down one frame from the "CHANGE" symbol (middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol). It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the pattern (sliding) is switched to (sliding) and the confirmation is stopped to notify that the pattern is out.

In the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving game state is a small hit, the short small hit (2 seconds) and the short small hit pseudo 1 time (6 seconds), short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds), short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) are set, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is collated with the set judgment value. The corresponding variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", a short and small hit (2 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "68 to 136", a short and small hit pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) is selected. ) Is selected, and if it is "137 to 167", the short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is selected, and if it is "168 to 198", the short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set so as to be.

The short and small hit (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of the fluctuation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol greatly shakes and fluctuates). It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation effect is executed in which a fluctuation is temporarily stopped for 1 second, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that a small hit is made. The middle symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANGE" symbol and the symbol "for example," 1 "symbol" arranged one frame next to the "CHANGE" symbol are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The fluctuation pattern of the short-small hit pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is fast again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short-small hit (2 seconds) 1-second temporary stop. After starting the fluctuation and re-changing, a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance (a temporary stop mode similar to the short-small hit (2 seconds)), and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that the small hit is a small hit. The variation pattern that is executed.

The fluctuation pattern of the short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short and small hit pseudo 1 time temporary stop for 2 seconds. After starting and re-changing, a temporary stop for 1 second at the chance (a temporary stop mode similar to a short hit (2 seconds)) is made, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that the hit is a small hit. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed.

The fluctuation pattern of the short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short and small hit pseudo 2 times 1 second temporary stop. After starting and re-changing, a temporary stop for 1 second at the chance (a temporary stop mode similar to a short hit (2 seconds)) is made, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that the hit is a small hit. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, the lottery result is configured to have the same fluctuation time depending on whether the lottery result is out of order or a small hit, and the fluctuation timing is the same (the elapsed timing of the fluctuation time). The third symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped at the chance. As a result, even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to make the player think that it is a variable small hit every time, and the player can be made to prepare for right-handed hit in preparation for the start of the small hit game. Further, it is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37 whether it is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit E which is a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player among the small hit types), and the game ball is launched. It is possible to suppress a problem that a special game method is used to prevent the game ball from entering the V entrance 600a by stopping the ball.

It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right-handed notification symbol in the normal game state may be executed at each temporary stop even during the time-saving game. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that even if the fluctuation is more out of the way, it will be a small hit.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 242 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

FIG. 242 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further reduced. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 240, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 274) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 273) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing place big hit type value It has 203m, a V flag 203n, and another memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 240, the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has , Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired based on winning the first winning opening 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 263 and FIG. 266). See S305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. .. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c.

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time reduction medium counter 203g, and the counter value is subtracted by 1 at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, so that the time reduction until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set in the time reduction game state ends. It is configured to set the game state.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON (see FIG. 263: S219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on and it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot middle flag 203i is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is configured to be set to off. This jackpot middle flag 203i is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203j is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203j is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203k is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to off. This small hit medium flag 203k is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The jackpot type value 203m when passing through V is a memory for storing data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 within the V valid period when the small hit game is executed. The area. As the jackpot type value 203m when passing through V, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203m when passing through V is set to be turned on. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the big hit type value 203m when passing V is cleared. This jackpot type value 203m when passing through V is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. Is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203n is set to turn on the flag corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the small hit game. The flag. By determining whether or not this V flag 203n is on at the end of the small hit game, it is identified that there was a prize in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, and the flag set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203n is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The scenario counter 203aa is a counter for advancing various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) that define the operation control contents of the big hit game or the small hit game, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is started. The counter value is set to "1", and then the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) or the small hit control process (see FIG. 275) executed in the main process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110. Each time (see S1005 of 278) is executed, the value is added by "1". Then, when various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) are added up to the end value, "0" is reset as a counter value.

The specific controlled jack 203ab is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type is completed, and is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has been completed.

The specific controlled flag 203ab is set to on when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 of FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 of FIG. 276), and the flag setting status is the jackpot control process (see S1004 of FIG. 275). ) (See S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which the special round game is executed is It is determined that the game has been completed, and a normal round game (a round game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened) for the second and subsequent rounds is executed. Then, it is set to off when the jackpot game ends (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 239. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). As shown in FIG. 251 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag 223d. At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a SW effective time counter 223g, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it differs only in that it is performed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW effective time counter 223g is a storage area in which the period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 228). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at the time of power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on From the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed against. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the serial error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit. The stop symbol according to the jackpot type is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time saving period of the normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be performed more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 259) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 260).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, in the example of FIG. 260). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 286) (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 288 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S3309 of 288 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 288 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 261) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 261, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 288 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 288 (b)). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S8202 of FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 999, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 268. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

After executing the through gate passing process, the V inlet passing process is executed (S108), and then the V passing process (S109) is executed. Here, the details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

After executing the V-passing process (S109), the launch control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 264.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, the book is used as it is. End the process.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and the process of S210 is performed. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 264. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used. Depending on the value of the small hit type counter C5, one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter C5 when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit.

In this embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is configured to notify the player of the lottery result (determination result of each type of counter) of the special symbol this time. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on and the case is off. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined, the blue LED is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to indicate the jackpot A (for example, the alphabet "a"). When the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot B (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot is lit. It is lit in a mode indicating C (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "c"), and when a jackpot D is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating a jackpot D (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "d"). Let me.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small hit type (small hit A to small hit E) as in the case of winning the big hit described above. Let me. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of a special symbol) indicating the content of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The mode formed from the lighting mode corresponding to each hit type) is configured to light the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or Even when the determined hit types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the winning type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to display that the lottery results of the special symbols are different in a lighting mode divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. ..

After the processing of S215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a big hit of the special symbol (this lottery result). S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), a V prize will be awarded in order to allow the ball to win a prize in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 624) based on the jackpot type. An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and then the start setting of the jackpot (setting of the jackpot such as 15 rounds) is executed according to the jackpot type determined in this jackpot (S218). ).

After finishing the processing of S218, next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot medium flag 203i are set to on (S219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the stop command is set (S225). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S221), and it is a small hit. If it is determined that (S221: Yes), the small hit start setting process (S222) is executed, and then the above-described S225 process is executed to end this process. The details of the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

In the process of S221, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (out of order) (S221: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S223). .. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 1 or more (0) (S223: No), the above-mentioned processing of S225 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S223: Yes), that is, when the time saving / medium counter 203g is currently in the time saving state, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224), and S225. Execute the process and end this process.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the hit / fail determination).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b). , The first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)). Compare each with the four random numbers set in. As described above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the acquired values of the random number counter C1 per first hit and the random numbers that are the jackpots. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Similarly, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value “4” which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)) match, Judged as a small hit with a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a jackpot, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random numbers may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher small hit probability. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

In the present embodiment, the first hit random number table 202a is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols wins a small hit. The first random number table 202a may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and is special only to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is advisable to set a random number value that is a small hit of the symbol. With this configuration, the benefits (small hit games) that can be given to the player can be different depending on the type of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the type of the special symbol is set within the other range (4 to 999). However, as other configurations, for example, a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that is a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small hit in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a are used to draw a special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss). As a configuration other than the above, a lottery of special symbols may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. Is determined, and when the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, the second random number table is used to determine whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. You may. By performing the lottery of the special symbol using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and fraudulent acts of manipulating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. ..

In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 264. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S232 is a big hit of the special symbol (S233). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (S234). The display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S235), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S236), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A command is set (S243), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S237), and it is a small hit. (S237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table according to the type of the special symbol corresponding to this special symbol lottery (S238), and the special symbol and the small hit type are acquired. The display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the above is set, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter, and the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (S243). This process ends.

Further, in the processing of S237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order, the outlier corresponding to the type of the special symbol The time display mode is set (S241), the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of disconnection determined this time is set (S243). This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol If the lottery result is out of the question, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the easier it is to determine the variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol does not give the player a privilege and the lottery result (missing) is displayed can be shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, so that it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery of special symbols to be played, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when a large number of reserved balls cannot be secured, the time for changing one special symbol can be lengthened, so that it is possible to prevent a state in which the special symbol does not change during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed. The fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern during execution may be shortened on condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more during the fluctuation. .. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved balls are held. The fluctuation pattern may be different based on the number, or the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time may be easily determined as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol on which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol on the side subject to the special symbol variation start processing executed this time may be used. Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). In this small hit start setting process, a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 are V. The first staying member 622d (see FIG. 231), the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), the second staying member 622b (see FIG. 231), and the rotary distribution member provided in the flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624. A process of setting a scenario for driving a solenoid for operating each of 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed.

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a scenario (hit scenario a) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario table 202ab (see FIG. 248 (b)) (S241). .. Next, the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined as the big hit type value at the time of passing V is set (S242), the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S243), and the small hit start flag 203j is set. , The small hit medium flag 203k is set to ON (S244), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in the present embodiment. This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 266, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S302). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S303: No), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S304). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S305, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S307 to S312, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S301 to S306. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S307: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the look-ahead process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S313). When the look-ahead process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (S321). If there is no new prize (S321: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize (S321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S322).

In the process of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), it is based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. As a result of the lottery, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

On the other hand, in the processing of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-mentioned process of S323 or S324 is set ( S325). Then, this process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and displays the variation of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like. This is a process for controlling.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S401). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the process of displaying the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the process of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S407).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S409). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S409: Yes), the process proceeds to S411.

In the processing of S409, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

In the processing of S408, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S408: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S411. In the processing of S411, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S407 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S411). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S410 or S411 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S412), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S412: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S413). In the process of S413, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the special symbol is currently being a big hit. Whether or not it is determined (S415). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S415: Yes), the process proceeds to S417.

In the processing of S415, unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the processing of S414, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S414: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S417. In the processing of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S412, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S412: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S419: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S422, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S422: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S422, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S413, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or the process of S418.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S424). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S424: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S425), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S425, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S416 or the process of S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 269. This through gate passing process determines whether or not a sphere has passed at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is acquired and held. It is a process for.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f The value (M) of is added by 1 (S434). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S435), and this process is terminated.

When storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty hold area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is the value. If it is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V inlet passing process (S108), first, it is determined whether the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501), and if it is not on (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501: Yes), then, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. Whether or not the game is in the round game or the small hit game is determined based on whether the set scenario is the hit scenario a202aa2 (S502). In the process of S502, if it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (S502: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S502: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S504) and this process is performed. finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620.

Next, the V-pass processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing a V-passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

When the V-passing process (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V-passing has occurred, that is, whether the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 (S601), and if it is determined that the winning has been won (S601: Yes). ), Then it is determined whether the present is in the V valid period (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203aa that counts the progress of the scenario (hit scenario b222aa3) set in the jackpot type B during the small hit game is "1" to "501", It is determined that the V valid period is in effect, and in other cases, it is determined that the V valid period is not in effect.

In the process of S602, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (S602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current small hit game is in progress (S603), and if it is in the small hit game (S603). : Yes), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of this small hit game (S604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S605), and set the time reduction / medium counter to 0. Is set to (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

That is, in the processes of S604 to S606, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, if it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type B is in progress) (S603: No), it is necessary to perform a process for newly executing the big hit game. Since there is no such thing, the processing of S604 to S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S607.

In the process of S607, a V-pass command is set (S607), and this process is terminated. The V-pass command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is followed. , Perform an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V-passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V-challenge has failed, and the V-passing command is received at the predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not, the revival effect from the unfortunate effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has won a prize is set in the V winning opening 624, but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening 624. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the only game ball that can be entered in the V winning opening 624 is the game ball (for example, one) that is retained by the second retention member 622b, so that the second retention member 622b The number measuring means for measuring the number of game balls retained in the machine, and the passage of the game balls through the left discharge path 623a and the right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls that have flowed down from the rotary distribution member 621 can flow down. The above-mentioned V non-passing command may be set when the number of game balls measured by the number measuring means is detected by the detecting means. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 620.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this process is terminated. By performing the processing of S607, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 624 is performed, or the V winning When a defect of a member attached to the mouth 624 (for example, the second staying member 622b) has occurred, it can be quickly notified to the outside.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is used. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, is initialized. Send a command (S912).

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. The payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power outage occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power failure occurrence information while retaining the data (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263), the start winning processing (see FIG. 266), the V entrance passing processing (see FIG. 270), and the V passing processing (see FIG. 271) are output to the voice lamp control device. It is transmitted to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and various commands set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278) described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. .. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed. The small hit control process (S1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 278. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or the processing of S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. It starts in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) ends, the first symbol display update process is performed. 1 Stop symbol (first symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S235, S239, S241 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 264) after ending the variation display executed by the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. ) Is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or the process of S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S413 or the process of S418 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 268). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (in the initial setting process). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot can be executed and the variable winning device 65. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263) or the processing of S1406 of the small hit ending control processing (see FIG. 279) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set. To do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on passing through a specific area (V winning opening 624) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to off, and then the set scenario is that of jackpot B. Whether or not it is determined (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario of the jackpot B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203ab is on (S1117).

If it is determined in the process of S1117 that the specific controlled flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed and the jackpot control process is terminated. The processing of this specific jackpot control processing (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG. 276.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario other than jackpot B is set in the processing of S1102 (S1102: No), or when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233ab is on in the processing of S1117 (S1117: Yes) adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and determines whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1 or not. Determine.

In the processing of S1104, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1104: Yes), the jackpot opening command is issued. Set (S1105) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the opening start (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the round start (if the jackpot scenario a). , It is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

If it is determined in the processing of S1106 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in the processing of S1107 (specific winning). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to be turned on so that the opening / closing door 65b of the opening 65a is opened), then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1108), and this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the present embodiment, 29 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening 65a was opened, or after the specific winning opening 65a was opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, when 10 pieces) are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to the counter value corresponding to the end of the currently executed round. It is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value (S1110), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process from the next time onward. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the specific winning opening 65a is closed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). It is configured as follows).

By doing so, the operation control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls win) becomes a jackpot scenario. It is possible to execute based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of facilitating the design and preventing the situation where both motion controls are mixed.

If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the round (whether it is the jackpot scenario a). For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750) (S1111).

If it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S1112 (specific winning). The specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is set to off so that the opening / closing door 65b of the opening 65a is closed), and this process is completed. The discrimination process from S1106 to S1111 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the round (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the interval start (big hit). In the scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: Yes), the interval command is set (S1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the interval start (S1113: No), the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is then executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the change of the special symbol. ..

The content of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277. After finishing the jackpot ending control process (S1115), the operation process based on other scenarios is executed (S1116), and this process is finished. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when the V distribution motor 620a for driving the rotary distribution member 621 is driven and controlled based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when the jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the hit scenario a (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is set (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1204). If it is determined in the process of S1204 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204: No), the process returns to the jackpot control process as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the end timing of the hit scenario a is reached (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the scenario counter 622b stays in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) that is playing (S1206).

In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the first retention member 622d has a retention ball, a hit scenario b is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to the process of S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first retention member 622d does not have a retention ball, the hit scenario c is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, the type of the hit scenario set thereafter can be changed depending on whether or not the second stay member 622b has a stay ball.

In the process of S1209, an operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210).

In the process of S1210, when it is determined that the end timing of the hit scenario b or c is reached (S1210: Yes), the jackpot scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233ab is set to ON (S1210). S1212), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210: No), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is not set (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit scenario b or c is set (S1213). If it is determined in the process of S1213 that the hit scenario b or c is set (S1213: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1209. As a result, when the hit scenario a is set, the processes of S1202 to S1208 are executed, and when the hit scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processes of S1202 to S1208 are skipped and the process of S1209 is performed. You can do the following:

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that neither the winning scenarios b and c are set (S1213: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 277. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (in the case of the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1301: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the ending start (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the ending end (if the jackpot scenario a). , It is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1303). If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1303: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1303: Yes), the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter. Reset 203aa to 0 (S1305). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated.

Next, the jackpot middle flag 203i is set to off (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to off (S1307). Then, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 278. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and the setting of a command for executing various effects according to the small hit on the voice lamp control device 113 and the V input ball. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V-winning solenoid for opening and closing the V-winning door 600 attached to the mouth 600a and the flow path solenoid 209b. In this embodiment, since the scenario set during the small hit game is the same as the specific big hit control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the hit scenario a is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is set (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the end timing of the hit scenario a is reached (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the scenario counter 622b stays in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) that is playing (S1406).

In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the second retention member 622b has a retention ball, a hit scenario b is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to the process of S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second retention member 622b does not have a retention ball, the hit scenario c is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, it is possible to set an effect according to whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

In the process of S1409, the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410).

If it is determined in the process of S1410 that it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410: Yes), the small hit ending control process is executed (S1411), and this process is terminated. The details of this small hit ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is not set (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit scenario b or c is set (S1412). If it is determined in the process of S1412 that the hit scenario b or c is set (S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1409. As a result, when the hit scenario a is set, the processes of S1402 to S1408 are executed, and when the hit scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processes of S1402 to S1408 are skipped and the process of S1409 is performed. You can do the following:

On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that neither of the hit scenarios b and c is set (S1412: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small hit ending control process (S1411). This small hit ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1501: Yes), the small hit end command is set (S1502), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the ending start (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the ending end (if the scenario counter 203aa). , It is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1503). If it is determined in the process of S1503 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1503: Yes), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505). If it is determined in the process of S1505 that the V flag 203n is not set to ON (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. 30 is performed. Set (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot middle flag 203i are set to on (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to off (S1508), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, since all the small hit games are set as one round game, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (rounds). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. A small hit scenario may be set for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until one second elapses after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set the period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the preset big hit type is executed corresponding to the small hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 624.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the A1 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2018 (see FIG. 281) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2018. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2018 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1514. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S2018, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2018 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1408 was started via the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached via the processing of S1404 to S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2001 this time was executed (S2001), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2001: No), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S2002 to S2012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2002). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S2005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, but it monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player to enhance the effect is pressed, and the frame button 22 It is a process to set to perform the corresponding effect when the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2009, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter update processes of S2011, the various counters used in the control process of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, the update process such as the effect is executed.

After the effect update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2013). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 282.

Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, the variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off process is executed (S2018). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2019), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: No), the process returns to the process of S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the variation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2104). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2107). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2107: Yes), the hold ball number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 hold ball is obtained. It is stored in the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively. When the process of S2108 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2107, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2107: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2109). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2110). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command related to a big hit, a small hit, or the like has been received (S2111). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S211: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2112). The hit-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but a process based on each command output from the main control device 110 is executed in the big hit or the small hit. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S2111, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S211: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2115), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 283. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this hit-related process (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, the jackpot start command for display is set (S2202). Although omitted, when the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the jackpot start command, the necessary processing for starting the jackpot of various lamps, voices, and the like is executed. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2203). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2203: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the received command (S2204). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), the jackpot end command for display indicating that it is the jackpot end timing is set (S2206). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2207). When it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S2207: Yes), a small hit start command for display indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game is set (S2208). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2209: Yes), a small hit end command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small hit game is set (S2210). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). When it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211: Yes), a display V entrance passage command indicating that the first retention sensor is on is set (S2212). After that, this process ends. The fact that the first retention sensor is on indicates that the game ball has entered the V entry port 600a.

When it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and the V effect (the effect of displaying a character such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81). A display V effect command indicating that it is time to execute is set (S2214). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the variation display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2014). This variation display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2221). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2221: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2226 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2223).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2224). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2225: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226), and then in the process of S2006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the process of S2229, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2229). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIGS. 285 and S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time (SW effective time counter 223g> 0) is set (S2301). .. As shown in FIG. 235, the SW effective time is automatically set to the SW effective time at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the fluctuation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. Set. When it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223 g is subtracted from the value corresponding to the passage and updated (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S2303). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2303; Yes), a display chance eye command is set based on the set fluctuation pattern and the pressing timing. By this display chance eye command, the third symbol display device 81 is re-variated (see FIG. 235), or the temporary stop display of the swaying fluctuation is executed again without re-variation. The SW effective time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is 0 in the processing of S2301 (S2301: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of S2303 (S2303: No). ), S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other processes related to the SW effect (background change, etc.) are executed.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 286, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S3001 in FIG. 286) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S3102 and S3102, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 286. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process (S3002), after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is set so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instructs the execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer to the RAM 235 is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. 2) is performed so that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image, which are images at power-on, are drawn. (See S3308 in 288 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3309 in FIG. 288 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display is via 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S3005, the interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288 (a). FIG. 288 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288 (b). FIG. 288 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 288 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S3302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

In the display setting process (S3303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the details of this display setting process are the same as the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 168) of the first control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, the task process is then executed (S3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3303) or the simple display setting process (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Since the details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3305), which are determined in the task process (S3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 261 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Since the details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process of the first control example (see FIG. 172), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process (S3302), the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete out of line). , The chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter and the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed to shift to the process of S3304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3405), the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406). If there is a stop type command for display (S3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3407), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (b). FIG. 290 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S3601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in is finally set (S3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3409), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (a). FIG. 291 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 171). S3701). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S3304), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3702 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3410), and there is an error command. If (S3410: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S3411), and the process returns to the processing of S3401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3411) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (b). FIG. 291 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3802), and the error command is performed. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S3412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the hit-related command processing (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing this hit-related command processing.

In this hit-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit-related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command, there is one. (S3901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S3902) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing. This jackpot start command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot start command processing, first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3921, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3925), the jackpot start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command process, in the display setting process, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3924. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the data, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by S3922. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set jackpot start display data table is normally used in advance from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

Further, when this jackpot start command process is executed, the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the jackpot start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (big hit start effect, round effect, jackpot end effect) is caused by the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the production to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the jackpot start effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, so that the first round is set. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command shown, it is often from the end of the jackpot start effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped due to the waiting time.

Further, the display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, so that the display jackpot ends. After receiving the end command, if the image data required for the jackpot end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the jackpot end effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display jackpot start command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. By then, the transfer of data required for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the jackpot start effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when all the round effects are completed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot end effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may be worried that the operation has not stopped. It does not make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot start effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes the jackpot. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the big hit start effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is asked whether the operation is stopped. It does not cause anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the hit related commands (S3903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (b). FIG. 293 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3932).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3935), the round number command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command among the hit related commands (S3905), and the display is performed. If there is a jackpot end command (S3905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (a). FIG. 294 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing. This jackpot end command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot end command processing, first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the jackpot end command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3941). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3942). The jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be discriminated. Specifically, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other jackpot end display data table is set to off. As a result, by referring to this data table determination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in processing such as display setting processing corresponds to which jackpot end effect display mode. Can be easily determined.

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3941, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3945), the jackpot end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit-related commands (S3907). If there is a small hit start command for display (S3907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S3908) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (b). FIG. 294 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command process. This small hit start command process executes the process corresponding to the display small hit start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit start command processing, first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received small hit start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3955), the small hit start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3954, the small hit start display set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951 is displayed. From the data table, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is transferred by the processing of S3952. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set small hit start display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, when this small hit start command process is executed, the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the small hit end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the small hit start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the small hit effect (small hit start effect, round effect, small hit) is caused by the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the effect to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small hit start effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends, so that the first round After receiving the display round number command indicating, the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, from the end of the small hit start effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that a lot of waiting time would occur, causing the player to feel uneasy and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation was stopped.

Further, the display small hit end command for instructing the start of the small hit end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, so that the display is displayed. After receiving the small hit end command, if the image data required for the small hit end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, from the end of the round effect to the start of the small hit end effect. There was a risk that a lot of waiting time would occur, causing the player to feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation was stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display small hit start command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect is started from there, and the small hit variation display is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled so that the transfer of data required for the round effect and the small hit end effect is completed by the end of. As a result, when the small hit start effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are completed in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the small hit end effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the big hit stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the small hit start effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes the big hit is completed. As a result, when the variation effect that becomes a small hit is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the small hit start effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not stop the operation. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3907, if it is determined that there is no display small hit start command (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command among the hit related commands (S3909). If there is a small hit end command for display (S3909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S3910) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (a). FIG. 295 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command process. This small hit end command process executes the process corresponding to the display small hit end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit end command processing, first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small hit end effect indicated by the small hit end command for display is determined, and the determined small hit end display data table is used as the data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3962). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small hit end effect, the data table discrimination corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the processing of S3961 is performed. Turn on the flag and set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other small hit end display data table to off. In the display setting process, the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which small hit end effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703. It can be easily determined whether it is a thing.

Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3961, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3965), the small hit end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3909, if it is determined that there is no display small hit end command (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command among the hit related commands (S3911). If there is a display V entrance passage command (S3911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S3912) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (b). FIG. 295 (b) is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. This V-entrance pass command process executes the process corresponding to the display V-entrance pass command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3972). In addition, it may be possible to determine the display mode of the V entrance passage effect. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the process of S3971 is turned on, and other Vs are turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table to off. As a result, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process such as the display setting process is the V entrance passage end effect. It can be easily determined whether or not it corresponds to the display mode of.

Next, based on the V inlet passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3971, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3973), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3975), the V entrance passage command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S3911: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the hit-related commands (S3913). If there is a display V effect command (S3913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3914), and then the hit-related command process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3914) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3981). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3981, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3983), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3985), the V effect command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S3412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display chance eye command (S3414), and if there is a display chance eye command (S3414). : Yes), the chance eye command process is executed (S3415), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the chance eye command processing (S3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (c). FIG. 291 (c) is a flowchart showing the chance eye command processing. This chance eye command process executes the process corresponding to the display chance eye command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the chance eye command processing, first, the chance eye display data table corresponding to the chance eye display mode indicated by the display chance eye command is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3851). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3852).

Next, based on the chance eye display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3851, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3855), the chance eye command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. When it is determined that there is no chance eye command in the process of S3414 (S3414: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3416), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

In the processing of S3401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes). ), The processing of S3402 to S3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 290 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

<A2 Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed region). It is different in that the composition of is different. Specifically, a distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed region, the game balls flowing down the first flow path B701a and flowing into the distribution device B700 are flown into two flow paths ( It has a configuration for distributing to the second flow path B701b and the third flow path B701c).

Next, the distribution device B700 provided in the right-handed region of the game board 13 of the A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

FIG. 298 is an enlarged schematic view of the right-handed area of the game board 13. The ball launched into the right-handed region and flowing down the first flow path B701a passes through the distribution device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c. The detailed configuration of the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 described later, but the spheres flowing down the first flow path B701a are divided into the second flow path B701b and the third flow path B701c 3: It is configured so that it can be distributed at a ratio of 1. With this configuration, it is necessary to launch a plurality of game balls in order to reliably enter the game balls into the V entry port 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. , The game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot can be suppressed, and the operation of the game can be improved. Further, since at least one of the balls flowing into the distribution device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, when a normal game of continuously launching a plurality of game balls is performed. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V entry port 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701b is configured so that the flowing ball flows down to a region where the flowing ball can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701c allows the flowing ball to enter the V entry port 600a. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the second flow path B701b passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V entry port 600a. Inflow (enter) into. On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, it is configured to flow down to an area where the through gate 67 can pass.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701c is configured to always enter the V entry port 600a, but other than that. A configuration may be used. For example, a distribution member (nails, distribution device, etc.) for distributing the flow direction of the sphere is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701c and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is provided. May be configured so that only a part of the balls flowing out from the third flow path B701c enters the V entry port 600a when is open.

With this configuration, among the game balls regularly distributed by the distribution device B700 (at a ratio of 3: 1), the game balls flowing into the V entry port 600a are irregularly generated. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be continuously launched more enthusiastically.

Next, the structure of the distribution device B700 that distributes the inflowing spheres into the two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (d). FIGS. 299 (a) and 299 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the configuration of the sorting device B700, and FIGS. 114 (c) and 114 (d) show ball flow and sorting of the first flow path B701a. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship with the apparatus B700 schematically.

As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the distribution device B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable around an axis, and is located in four directions (four directions at 90 degree intervals) of the rotating body. A blade member (first blade member B700a, second blade member B700b) that can come into contact with the ball is provided. The first blade member B700a has a flat shape so that the sphere that has flowed down into the distribution device B700 flows down into the third flow path B701c (so that it flows down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the distribution device B700). In the second blade member B700b, the sphere that has flowed down to the distribution device 700 flows down to the second flow path B701b (so that it flows down directly below the rotating body of the distribution device B700). It is configured in the shape of a flat plate.

In the present embodiment, as the sorting device B700, a rotating body having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used, so that the number of balls distributed to the second flow path B701b and the third flow The number of balls distributed to the road B701c is configured to be 3: 1. Further, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting device B700, and a detection sensor (not shown) can be used to determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating. As a result, the sorting device B700 is illegally modified so that the ball flowing into the flow path unit B720 is allowed to flow down to only one flow path (second flow path B701b or third flow path B701c). Can be easily determined.

Next, the arrangement relationship between the first flow path B701a and the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (c) and 299 (d). FIG. 299 (c) is a schematic view showing a state in which the second blade member B700b is located in the flow path. When a sphere flows down the first flow path B701a in this state, the sphere comes into contact with the second blade member B700b and is distributed to the third flow path B701c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the sphere rotates 90 degrees (rotates 90 degrees downward) along the flow direction of the sphere (downward in FIG. 299 (c)), and the first blade member B700a flows through the flow path. It will be located inside.

When two balls pass through the sorting device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299 (c), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299 (d) (the state in which the first blade member B700a is located in the flow path). To do.

By bringing the sphere flowing down the distribution device B700 into contact with the blade member provided on the rotating body in this way, the flowing direction of the sphere is changed and the sphere is used to rotate the rotating body. Since the blade member that can come into contact with the sphere can be changed by rotating the rotating body each time the ball passes through, the sphere can be reliably distributed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and the flow path (third flow path 701c) capable of entering the V entry port 600a and the V entry port 600a. Since the game ball is distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701b) where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball, the V entry port is open during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. Since it is necessary to launch a plurality of game balls in order to reliably insert the game balls into the 600a, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game balls are fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. ..

Further, since at least one of the balls flowing into the distribution device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, when a normal game of continuously launching a plurality of game balls is performed. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V entry port 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

In the second embodiment described above, the configuration having the distribution device B700 is used in order to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, but other configurations may be used, for example, the game ball. A delay means for making the flow period of the game ball irregular is provided in the right-handed area so that the period from the launch of the ball to the arrival at the V entrance 600a is irregular, and the game ball is fired. By making it difficult to easily grasp the period from when the ball reaches the V entry port 600a, a configuration may be used in which the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot is suppressed, or a plurality of game balls are continuously launched. When a retention means for retaining the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right-handed region so that the game ball does not reach the V entry port 600a unless it flows down, and the game ball is retained in the retention means. , The subsequent game ball may be configured to flow into the flow path where the ball can enter the V entry port 600a by colliding with the accumulated game ball.

In the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is configured to distribute to the third flow path 701 at a ratio of 1 in 4 balls, but the distribution is not limited to this, and other ratios may be used for distribution. The dividing device B700 may be configured by a wind turbine or the like so as to distribute at a random ratio.

<Third A3 embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 to 301. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed region). It differs in that the composition of is different. Specifically, the difference is that a crune member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed region, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, by providing the crune member 1700, the flow of the game ball is delayed by flowing down the inside of the crune member 1700 as a path of the game ball flowing down the right-handed region, and the flow of the game ball is delayed to the V winning door 600. It has a delay path that flows down and a normal path that flows down the outside (right side) of the crune member 1700 and flows down to the V winning door 600.

With this configuration, even after the player stops launching the game ball, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600.

Here, for example, when the player determines the small hit type and a small hit of the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, the player refrains from launching the game ball so as not to flow down to the V winning door 600. A game is conceivable. In this case, the damage to the game store becomes large because the V prize due to the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player, does not occur.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if the player stops launching the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crune member 1700 (delay path) is the V winning door 600. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a V prize is not generated due to a small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V entry port 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path), it is necessary to enter the game ball. It is necessary to launch the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Here, the details of the crune member 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 301. The crune member 1700 is formed in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710a at the upper part into which a game ball flowing down a right-handed region enters. The ball entry portion 1710a is an opening slightly larger than one game ball (in the present embodiment, a diameter of 12 mm).

Inside the crune member 1700, a spiral flow path 1710d is formed in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a flows down spirally along the inner wall of the crune member 1700, and is formed at the end of the spiral flow path 1710d. Is formed with a bottom surface portion 1710c that is gently inclined toward the center in a mortar shape. The spiral flow path 1710d is configured so that the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a flows down to the outer end portion of the bottom surface portion 1710c, and the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 1710c. There is. The bottom surface portion 1710c has the same shape as the bottom surface of the already known crune, and gradually guides the game ball to the central portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b slightly larger than one game ball (in the present embodiment, having a diameter of 12 mm) is formed so as to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 1710b, a flow path is spirally formed by a 0.5 mm protruding flow path wall, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710b to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. It is configured to be discharged.

In the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 1710d is formed inside the crune member 1710, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the spiral flow path 1710d may not be provided, or the bottom surface of the crune shape may be provided. May be formed only by the spiral flow path 1710d without forming the above. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 1710d, a deceleration portion made of a material having a high friction coefficient for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball may be formed. If it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be appropriately selected.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the crune member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the crune member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and is guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c. The game ball guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710b while making a circular motion on the bottom surface portion 1710c from the outer peripheral side to the center. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710b is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710b protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. While being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. With this configuration, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the crune member 1700 is configured to take about 6 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time from when the small hit type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if a new game ball is refrained from being launched after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball that is delayed and flows down inside the crune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player refrains from launching the game ball after determining the small hit type and prevents the V prize from being generated by the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that the variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path) is selected more frequently. There is. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion 1710a of the crune member 1700 before (or during the fluctuation effect) the small hit variation effect ends the small hit variation effect and the V winning door 600 is opened. At the timing, it becomes easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600a and suppresses illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a in a normal game. , The player's interest can be improved. Of course, it may be difficult to select a variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path).

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of the small hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and to allow the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entry port 600a changes greatly depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed region flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

The fluctuation time of the small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be only a fluctuation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700, or may be only a long fluctuation time. Naturally good.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing two routes, a delay route and a normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball arrives at the V entry port 600a, but routes having different flow velocities are used. Of course, it is also possible to provide three or more routes.

As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, by providing the crune member 1700 on the upper part of the V winning door 600 (V entrance 600a), the game ball flowing down the right-handed region is the V entrance 600a. As a route to enter the ball, a delayed route having a different flow time and a normal route are provided.

Due to this delay path, even after the player stops launching the game ball, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600. That is, even if the player stops launching the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crune member 1700 (delay path) enters the V entry port 600a. become. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which the player determines the small hit type and prevents the game ball from entering the V entrance 600a at the time of the small hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether the game ball flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V entry port 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path), it is necessary to enter the game ball. It is necessary to launch the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crune member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small hit type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened. doing. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball that is delayed and flows down inside the crune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player stops firing the game ball after determining the small hit type and prevents the player from generating a V prize due to the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that the variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path) is selected more frequently. There is. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion 1710a of the crune member 1700 before (or during the fluctuation effect) the small hit variation effect ends the small hit variation effect and the V winning door 600 is opened. At the timing, it becomes easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600a and suppresses illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a in a normal game. , The player's interest can be improved.

<A4th Embodiment>
Next, the A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. In the present A4 embodiment, with respect to the A1 embodiment, a distribution device 720 for distributing game balls is arranged in the right flow path of the variable display unit 80 so that the balls flowing down the right flow path are alternately distributed. After the change of the special symbol determined to be a small hit or a big hit is stopped and displayed in one of the passages to be distributed, a gate to start the small hit or a big hit game is arranged, and the ball is placed in the right passage. The difference is that by continuing to fire, the ball can be entered into the V winning device 620 at the start of a small hit or a big hit. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. In the A4th embodiment, the distribution device 720 is arranged in the right side region of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600. In the distribution device 720, a ball entry port 720c through which a ball flowing down the right flow path can enter is formed in a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and a ball that has passed through the ball entry port 720c is formed. When it flows down, the spheres that rotate left and right and flow down alternately are distributed to the left side flow path 720d and the right side flow path 720e. At the lower end of the right flow path 720e, a start gate 720a composed of a photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is set. As described above, in the second embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the small hit or the big hit is determined stops, the ball moves through the start gate 720a without shifting to the small hit game or the big hit game. The game is in a state of waiting for the execution of the small hit game or the big hit game until it passes.

The distribution rotation member 720b receives the entered game ball at the left accommodating portion or the right accommodating portion arranged on the left and right. When the game ball is received by the left accommodating portion, the distribution rotation member 720b rotates counterclockwise in the front view due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left flow path 720d. Here, the distribution rotating member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees to the left and right, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion.

On the base body provided on the back side of the distribution device 720, the magnet of the distribution rotation member 720b is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotating member 720b and the magnet on the base side are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion. The base side magnet is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution rotation member 720b side.

Like the base-side magnet, the magnet is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720b so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet side. The base is at a position where the distribution rotation member 720b rotates and the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion is directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passage port can enter about one ball). The side magnet and the magnet of the distribution rotating member are closest to each other (the tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets are repulsed and stopped at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotating member faces directly upward. It will be maintained in the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution rotating member repels the magnet and the base side magnet, so that the distribution rotating member 720b is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the left accommodating portion or the right accommodating portion faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the gaming ball entering the distribution device 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entered game ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet and the magnet on the base side repel each other, for example, the left accommodating portion receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the left flow path 720d, and then distributes the rotation. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating clockwise (the left accommodating portion faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the left flow path 720d, the right accommodating portion is in a state of facing upward, and then the game ball that enters the distribution device 720 is received by the right accommodating portion and the game ball. The distribution rotation member 720b rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the right flow path 720e. In this way, the distribution rotation member 720b can alternately guide the game ball entering the distribution device 720 to the left side flow path 720d and the right side flow path 720e. Therefore, the game ball can be evenly distributed and guided to the left side flow path 720d and the right side flow path 720e.

After being distributed to the right flow path 720e by the distribution rotation member 720b, the ball that has passed through the ball entry port 720c becomes the left flow path 720d by rotating the distribution rotation member 720b to the left. It is sorted. When the ball is distributed to the left flow path 720d, it is guided to a flow path capable of entering the V entry port 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, the small hit or big hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds 1 second after the start timing of the big hit game in the small hit or the big hit B (the timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720a). Here, since the ball is fired by the launching device at the same interval of 100 shots per minute, it is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds per shot. Therefore, when the balls are continuously fired in the right side region, the game balls are discharged from the left side flow path 720d about 0.6 seconds after passing through the start gate 720a (distribution device). The flow path is formed so that the time at which the spheres of the left side flow path 720d and the right side flow path 720e of 720 flow down is the same).

Since the flow time from the lower end of the left flow path 720d to the V entry port 600a is about 0.1 seconds, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 is opened, and then , The ball discharged from the left channel 720d (1.2 seconds after being ejected from the left channel 720d first) can win the V entry port 600a because the V winning door 600 is in the open state. Become. Then, up to the ball discharged from the left flow path 720d, the V entry port 600a can be won.

In this way, after passing the ball through the start gate 720a, the firing of the ball is stopped, the small hit type is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37, and the big hit type with a small number of time reductions is selected. Even if you try to avoid winning the V winning opening 624 in, the number of balls that can be won is limited to two even if they are fired continuously, and even if they are fired after confirmation, the V winning opening 600a should be won. It is difficult.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the left flow path 720d can enter the V entry port 600a, but the game ball that has passed through the right side flow path 720e can enter the ball. Alternatively, among the game balls flowing down the right flow path, the game balls that have not entered the distribution device 720 may be configured to be able to enter.

Further, although the distribution device 720 in the present embodiment is configured to alternately distribute the entered game balls, the distribution rotation member 720b may be configured to be configured by a wind turbine or the like and randomly distributed to the left and right. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the A4 embodiment>
The present A4 embodiment is different from the A1 embodiment in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the A4 control is different in that the condition device flag 203ac is added to the A1 embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device flag ac is a flag indicating that the start gate 720a has been passed. This is a flag for determining whether or not the power has passed through the start gate 720a with reference to the case where the power is restored when the power is cut off or the like. Set off based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be a small hit or a big hit B in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306 and 308 to 309.

FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the contents controlled by the main control device 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game and the timing chart of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is.

When the hit / fail judgment is executed from the state where the special symbol is stopped and the small hit is determined, the variation display of the third symbol (special symbol) is started on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. Will be done. At the start of fluctuation, the characters "start of roulette chance" are displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a). Three seconds later, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), the third symbol is reduced to the upper right and displayed, and the roulette display is started. In the roulette display, the arrow symbol is displayed on the left side, and the roulette symbol stopped at the arrow position indicates the winning / failing judgment result (big hit, miss, small hit) and the "V" symbol indicating that the V winning opening 624 has been won. Although the player did not win the V winning opening 624, a "BIG" symbol indicating that the jackpot game has started and a "skull" symbol indicating that the game is out of order are arranged. After that, during the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the roulette display is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 305 (a). After that, as shown in FIG. 305 (b), when the fluctuation period elapses and the fluctuation of the third symbol stops, the scroll (rotation display) of the roulette display is slowly displayed, and the right-handed notification symbol is displayed in the upper left. It is displayed and the player is notified that it is a right-handed period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624, the position of the “V” symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at a position corresponding to the arrow symbol. Further, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the hit / fail judgment result is not correct at the timing when the V valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 306 (b), the “skull” symbol is displayed. The stop is displayed at the position where the position matches the arrow symbol. Although not shown, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit (big hit B), the position of the "BIG" symbol stops at a position that matches the arrow symbol. It is displayed that the game that is actually being executed is notified that it is a jackpot game.

With this configuration, whether the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit or a small hit is composed of a series of effects until the period during which the ball can be entered in the V winning opening 624 elapses, and the period until the V winning. You can improve the fun of the game by using.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 311. In the first A1 embodiment, if the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit after the change period of the special symbol has elapsed, the big hit game is started 0.1 seconds later, but in the present embodiment, the game ball is at the start gate 720a. The difference is that the jackpot game is started by passing. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The special symbol variation processing 2 (S140) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes S217 to S220 are deleted and the condition device determination process (S250) is added to the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment. It differs in that it is. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device determination process (S250) in the present A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of this condition device determination process (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203j, the jackpot medium flag 203k, and the condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The time saving and medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, the jackpot game can be started by the player's intention.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the start of the big hit game is configured to start by passing through the start gate 720a, but the small hit game may also be configured to start by passing through the start gate 720a. .. With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720a can be easily won in the V entry port 600a, and the game ball is prevented from entering a specific small hit game type so that the game ball does not enter. It can be difficult to fire.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start gate 720a is provided in the left flow path 720e, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start gate 720a may be arranged in the right flow path 720d. In this configuration, the period from the passage of the game ball through the start gate 720a until the V winning door 600 is opened can be entered into the V entry port 600a from the passage of the start gate 720a. It may be configured to have a period of With this configuration, in the small hit game, the game ball can be inserted into the V entrance 600a, and the game method of avoiding winning the game ball in a specific small hit type can be suppressed.

<A5th Embodiment>
Next, the present A5 embodiment and a modified example thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314. In the first A1 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in the present embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot is B. It differs in that.

In FIG. 312 (a), the jackpot B in the A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V entry port 600a, and the game ball is guided to the rotation distribution member 621 by the movable guide member 622. It is a figure which showed the case. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotation distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (the position where the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 624).

Further, FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the A5 embodiment. The difference is that the processes of S1281 to S1282 are added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1203, the process of S1281 is executed after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether it is the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (solenoid that opens and closes the V winning door 600) (S1281). When it is determined that it is the timing when the V winning solenoid is turned off (S1281: Yes), the data for stopping the V distribution motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the winning scenario a (S1282). After that, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot B, the rotary distribution member is configured to stop at the center position in accordance with the V winning timing, so that the game is considered to be a small hit game. It is possible to produce a fresh effect for a person. Furthermore, since the V winning opening 624 can always be won by the jackpot B, it is possible to make it seem as if the 2nd round has been started by winning the V winning opening 624.

Next, a modified example of the A5 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). In the A5 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot is B, but the control is not limited to this, and the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is not changed and is changed when the jackpot is B. The fixed flow path 660 newly protrudes, the movable guide member 622 releases the staying 2 solenoid at an intermediate position, the game ball is dropped on the movable guide member 622, and the fixed flow path 660 moves to the V winning opening 624. The difference is that it is configured to guide the sphere. The fixed flow path 660 is configured to be projected by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 624 with a high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modified example of the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the hit scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guiding member 622 starts to rise, the fixed flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guiding member 622. The game ball is changed to a position where it can be received on the upper surface (S1283). After that, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the staying 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of the big hit B, it is possible to win a prize in the V winning opening 624 via a taxiway different from the case of the small hit. Thereby, the winning control to the V winning opening can be switched between the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit B, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The phrase "at the start (at the time of execution) of the jackpot (big hit game)" used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above means that the jackpot game is started by winning the jackpot lottery of the special symbol. Is used as a concept to indicate the timing when the special symbol is confirmed. Specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is a concept that includes the timing, the timing when the opening period of the jackpot starts, the timing when the round game of the jackpot starts, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (big hit game)" used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends, and is specifically used. Is a concept that includes the timing when the final round of the jackpot ends, the timing when the ending period of the jackpot ends, and the timing when the first special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot ends.

When a specific timing is not specified in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment for each wording used in such a concept, any of the above-mentioned timings is appropriately adopted. You may.

The configurations of the pachinko machines 10 described in the above-mentioned control examples and the respective embodiments may be combined as appropriate, and for example, a fall lottery means for executing the fall lottery used in the second control example described above may be used. The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a small hit lottery means for executing the small hit lottery used in the above-described third control example.

Further, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the contents set for the elements of, for example, shift (fall) the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) from the high probability state to the low probability state. A lottery for the purpose and a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state may be executed.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the frame button 22 that can be pressed and operated by the player is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. However, a configuration different from that of the frame button 22 may be provided as the operating means, for example. Shooting results of a lever-shaped operating means that the player can operate in the front-back direction, a touch sensor-type operating means that detects that the player has touched (or is close to), and a shooting means that captures the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like for determining the above may be provided. Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the above-described control examples, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, and a plurality of display means are provided. May be configured to execute the various effects described above, or in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in each of the control examples described above. , The player may be able to select the effect that is actually executed from the two or more feasible effects.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like different from the above embodiments and control examples. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as a setting) is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which the jackpot that is given a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot that is given a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times). The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) The rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to) is determined may be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly increased (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out is more likely to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a game machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means is provided and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmitting member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to see, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed by that amount.

The position of forming the reflection portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means is irradiated to the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected on the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member is correspondingly increased. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light irradiating means that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, when another device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and being incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and is emitted to the front side and the light that is emitted to the back side of the light transmitting member are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and are incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the game area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface side of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , The overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) can be reflected to facilitate the incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, so that the outer edge member is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indexes of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or totally reflected) at the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member also has a role of concentrating the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and a role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in a ring shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape. Since the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support rings that are recessed and guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably supported by a shaft, or may be fixed so as not to be rotatable. In this case, as a form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which the fixed support ring slides along the guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the front side or the back side, respectively. That is, since the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and can be incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the opposite space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are opposed to each other. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means is used to irradiate the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated by the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front or the back of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged with the irradiation surface facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (Ab.). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while applying a plurality of light emitting means to an irradiation surface on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member by arranging the light emitting means so as to surround the circumference of the target member (unknown at the time of filing the present application).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, it is newly found that there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each of them has a different orientation), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. By disposing one substrate member on the base member, at least two or more light emitting means can be arranged. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and is arranged on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , Warping and bending of the substrate member can be suppressed, and the posture of the substrate member can be easily defined. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the game machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be more easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw can be brought into contact with the member to prevent the movable member from being brought into contact with the light emitting means and damaged.

In the game machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because the light emitting means can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is provided on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the base body or the other side of the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the side surface disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess on the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the side surface on which the block body is disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess on the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member arranged on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where the base member is disposed in the form of being displaced in the direction and the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member. A gaming machine is known that provides an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes people visually recognize is performed. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member is centered on this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is formed in such a form that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion with one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means is rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the pushing and pulling direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is closer to the central side range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and is between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member. , When the displacement member is made to perform a reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since the range is set, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. Game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being arranged at the position, the rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed by the action of the dead center described above, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the members and the connecting members, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting positions of the displacement members and the base members with the connecting positions of the rotating members and the connecting members interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , When the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, since the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the first. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, the first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and the second driving means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine D2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the first member which is displaceably arranged on the base member and is driven by the first driving means and the first member which is slidably displaceable on the base member. The first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second driving means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation centers the same and different in the rotation directions, but forming them in different rotation directions and different rotation centers. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin protruding from the is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed according to whether or not the second member is linearly displaced. it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement on a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member which are displaced in a curved shape. The resulting), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so that the first driving means or the second In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one in which the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different. (That is, the rotation and the linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the unexpected effect of the player can be further facilitated.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linearly) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceable is provided on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement member is displaced. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaced on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceable between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a light transmitting portion made of a light transmitting material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the light transmitting portion thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and there is a problem that it is difficult to have an interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member to be irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. The gaming machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflection portion can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group different from the first group are openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible through the first position, by arranging the target member in the first position, the target member is placed through the opening of the shielding member by the first group. The first pattern or pattern to be formed is made visible to the player, while the target member is displaced from the first position to the second position so that the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern through the opening of the shielding member. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and is formed with a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating the light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in the rotated state. it can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are dispersedly arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the game machine E1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are brought into contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacement of the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displace the light irradiation means. it can.

<Characteristic F group> (Countdown notice can be set freely)
Among the different production periods, the effect period setting means for setting one effect period, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect execution means are described above. A second information different from the first information, in which a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed and a trigger for starting the notification effect are set based on a predetermined first information. A gaming machine F1 having a notification effect setting means for setting an end trigger of the notification effect based on information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, among the effects executed for a predetermined period, a game in which a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed can be executed. There is a machine. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-1985568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for a big hit. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set, so that the effect content becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production early. Further, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is changed (for example, a specific effect to be the target of the advance notification effect is changed while the advance notification effect is being executed. ), And there was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, a start trigger is set based on the first information by the notification effect setting means as an execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed, and based on the second information. The end opportunity is set. As a result, since the period for executing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different information, the period for executing the notification effect can be freely set, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has an execution information discriminating means for discriminating the execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information discriminating means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution information of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means is characterized in that at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed is determined.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution timing of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, there is a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects having different execution timings. The gaming machine F4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set a notification effect according to the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings. it can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing of setting the start trigger of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized in that the above is set.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. It has the effect of being able to enhance the effect of production.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. The featured gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to set the end trigger of the notification effect after the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect is executed after the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is not set at what timing the notification effect is targeted at the specific effect to be executed at the time when the notification effect is executed, the content of the notification effect may be predicted by the player in advance. It can be reliably prevented.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated during the effect, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means. The gaming machine F7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the production period of the notification effect is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect, so that the player participates in the effect. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means has a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, at least, the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information among the periods during which the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and there is an effect that the effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect that suggests a period until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the timekeeping effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that the player can be informed of the timing when the specific effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification effect period determining means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determining means. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by having a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the time-lapse effect is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period for which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing obtained by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect is determined as an opportunity to execute the time-lapse effect, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets an effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information, and the first effect mode is set. (1) The gaming machine F11 is characterized by having a first effect mode changing means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during the notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is variable when the possible effect variable condition is satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

The gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the end trigger of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the end trigger of the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is fixed, the effect mode of the first effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end trigger, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine F1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the end trigger of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect period of the notification effect can be changed by the operation of the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determination means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14, characterized in that the information for the purpose is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and the specific period is set. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be changed based on the effect, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F15, characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the specific period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that the specific effect different depending on the operation content of the operating means is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically participated.

In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has a means for varying the effect period to be made variable. The gaming machine F16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period. The length of the notification effect is changed by changing the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is changed, the period during which the operation effect is executed can be secured, so that there is an effect that the effect that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means can be executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Variation of HP display)
The variable effect is executed by the determination means that executes the determination based on the effect information, the variable effect execution means that executes the variable effect that changes the effect value based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. When the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for varying the effect value and the first effect value determining means, the effect value is determined. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot has been won. Then, as a variable effect, a game machine that executes an effect (battle effect) in which the own character and the enemy character play against each other and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won according to the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. is there. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle effect, and it is specified whether or not the reduced physical strength points are won by the player as a big hit. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the effect of the above is executed, it was possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the degree of expectation of the player for the jackpot. Further, by setting the physical strength points to be reduced during the battle production in detail, the production pattern of the battle production is increased, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points, so that the physical strength points are reduced. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. In addition, it is possible to simplify the management of reducing the physical strength points by reducing the pattern of reducing the physical strength points during the battle production, but in this case, the production pattern of the battle production is reduced, and the player is early. There was a problem of getting bored with.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by a plurality of determination means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value as compared with the case where the effect value is determined by one determination means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine G1, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed and the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. The effect value updating means includes a effect value updating means that continuously and variably updates the effect value, and a first effect value storage unit that can store the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining unit. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated, the effect value is not the sum of the effect values but the first effect value. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the actually displayed effect value (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the value (first effect value) that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect value setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by having an aspect display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect update means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the effect value are described. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by having an effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by adding it to the second effect value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value which is a part of the effect value and the second effect value different from the first effect value are added up by the effect value summing means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be made more diverse.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant when a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied and a privilege are given based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result. The gaming machine G5 includes a privilege giving means, and the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined and the effect value is variable when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed. The effect can be executed so as to be related to the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the variable situation of the effect value and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the determination of the first effect value by the first effect value determining means. The gaming machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so that the first effect value and the second effect are determined. The effect value, which is the sum of the values, is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that has been changed due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and it is possible to provide the fun of predicting.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the first effect value determining means is different from the determining means in a variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be made different based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be changed for the player. It has the effect of being able to gaze at and enhance the effect of the production.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determination of the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give a privilege. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means can be selected as a first range or a second range different from the first range. The second effect value determination means has a selection range storage means having the above, and a determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination unit is equal to or more than a predetermined value. The means shall determine the second effect value by selecting one of a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means. The gaming machine G9 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected differs depending on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the effect value can be easily increased.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means has a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second effect value, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. The second effect value determining means determines that the determination result of the determination value determining means is less than a predetermined value. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than a predetermined value, a second effect value for reducing the first effect value is selected, so that the first effect is selected. It is possible to prevent the effect value, which is the sum of the value and the second effect value, from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when the lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value larger than the lower limit value as the effect value, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect.

<Characteristic H group> (Notification of suggestion of advantageous period of fall lottery machine)
When the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means for executing the determination and the privilege game execution for executing the privilege game when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. The means, the high-probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means are predetermined rather than the high-probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means that can set the low probability state that is unlikely to be the first discrimination result and the probability setting means. The probability setting means has a second discrimination means for executing the discrimination, and sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined determination condition is easily satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having the period effect executing means for executing the period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state setting means is described as described above. In the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect including the first effect for showing and the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is repeatedly executed, and the first condition is determined by the probability setting means. It is established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is executed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it has a period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect in response to the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning. There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period in which the gaming state continues ends based on the result of the effect (for example, the battle effect). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-143197).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the winning pattern is won when the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning is won when the advantageous gaming state ends, the own character is displayed. The production result of the defeat pattern that is defeated is displayed, and if the winning is not won (when the advantageous game state is still set), the production result of the draw pattern that does not win or lose is displayed. Since it is executed, the content of the battle effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, when the game is executed without winning for a long period of time in the advantageous game state, the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed becomes easy to be executed as a result, and the player for the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of was lowered. Further, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a specific variable pattern is drawn without winning as a result of the lottery, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the effect mode of the second effect. As a result, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent early getting bored with the period production.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means includes a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the production mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is, in addition to the effect result of the second effect, the first requirement or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, it is necessary to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the production mode of the first effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on the presence or absence of the first requirement or the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. The featured gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, among a plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition, when any one of the requirements is satisfied, the effect mode of the period production is changed. It is variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means is a means for determining the remaining period when the first requirement is satisfied. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while giving the player a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the ease with which the effect switching condition is satisfied differs depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set are the first. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be made different, it is possible to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has a condition setting means for facilitating the establishment of the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. The gaming machine H8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the discriminating result of executing the privilege game. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while being aware of both whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance to be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is a number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect continuously executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect measured by the number of times measuring means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, when the effect period determining means for determining the effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect executing means and the predetermined effect switching condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned When the effect period determined by the effect period determination means is within a predetermined period, the effect control means for restricting the execution of the first effect by the period effect execution means is provided. The featured gaming machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within a predetermined period. If so, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the first effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not regulated by the effect regulating means. The featured gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the privileged game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effecting period determining means, so that the privileged game is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect when it is executed. Further, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target production is different depending on the notification timing of the expectation increase production)
An expectation display control means capable of displaying a plurality of expectation display modes capable of indicating an expectation for indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a stepwise manner on the display means, and the expectation display control means displayed by the expectation display control means. A display mode variable means for stepwisely changing the expectation display mode, a variable information setting means for setting variable information variable by the display mode variable means, and at least one expectation of the plurality of expectation display modes. It has a variable suggestion effect executing means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means has at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and the gaming machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the variable suggestion effect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot has been won. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the expected degree of the jackpot, and the expected degree of the jackpot of the current variable effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player depending on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248305).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to show the player the expectation of a big hit by the display mode of the character displayed during the variation effect, so that the player is interested in the effect content of the variation effect to be executed. Can be done, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among a plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes in which display modes corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot are displayed are provided, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a specific judgment, it is possible to make the player predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed is It was possible to make the player pay close attention to the content and enhance the effect of the production. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is displayed as the expectation degree display mode is suggested. There is also a gaming machine that executes a pre-suggestion effect of the expected degree display mode in which the player predicts in which display mode the expected degree display mode is displayed as a variable effect. There is also a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the expected degree display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation display modes, when the expectation display mode pre-suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation display mode is executed, the expectation is not subject to the expectation display mode pre-suggestion effect. There is a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced because it is implicitly denied that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is variable is generated by the variable suggestion effect execution means. Will be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be different. As a result, even if the same production mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, there is an effect that the expected degree display mode to be the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discrimination means that executes discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a privilege granting means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation degree display mode can easily show a high expectation degree, so that the player can display the expectation degree display mode. You will be watching the contents. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect is a gaming machine J3 that notifies variable information of an expectation degree display mode that is changed stepwise.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect can be notified to the player by the variable suggestion effect of the target expectation degree display mode. It has the effect of being able to gaze and enhance the effect of the production.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is characterized in that a plurality of variable quantities including at least a variable quantity for indicating the degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually varied are displayed. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable quantities are displayed as variable suggestion effects, so that the larger variable amount among the plurality of variable quantities displayed to the player is larger. It is possible to play the game with the expectation that the amount will be a real variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the machine having the target notification means for notifying the expected degree display mode to be the target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect execution means before the end of the variable suggestion effect. The gaming machine J5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable to be executed for the player is performed by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time. There is an effect that the suggestion production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the expectation type setting means for setting the expectation type based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the expectation type set by the expectation type setting means. , The expectation degree setting means for setting the expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes, and the expectation degree display control means is the plurality of expectation degree display modes set by the expectation degree setting means. The expectation degree display mode for showing at least a part of the expectation degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectation degree and the expectation degree setting means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect of suggesting the difference between the already displayed expectation degree and the preset expectation degree as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, the privilege is given if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation display mode in which the high expectation level is already displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility of Therefore, not only the effect content of the variable suggestion effect but also the display mode of the current expectation display mode is drawn by lottery, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine J2, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. The display mode variable means has an operation discriminating means for discriminating that the means has been operated, and the display mode variable means changes the expected degree display mode in response to the discriminating result by the operation discriminating means. The featured gaming machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the expected degree display mode is changed in response to the operation of the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the game machine J8, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. Possible storage means, a pre-determination means that executes pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entry information indicating the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. When a predetermined additional condition is satisfied in the game machine having the ball entry information number display means to be displayed, the ball entry information number display means is displayed in response to the determination result by the operation determination means. The gaming machine J9 is characterized by having an additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation to the operating means. , There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

The gaming machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expected degree display mode displayed by the expected degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and satisfies the effect condition by the effect condition determining means. The gaming machine J10, characterized in that the above additional conditions are satisfied when it is determined that the machines are not.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, when the expected degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition, an additional effect is executed, so that a plurality of effects can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to have relevance and enhancing the effect of production.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when a predetermined number of the expectation display modes are not displayed by the expectation display control means. Amusement machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J10, the number of the effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effect. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Big hit production at the time of holding consecutive times)
The discriminating means that executes the discriminant when a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, the privileged game executing means that executes the privileged game when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminating result, and the predetermined acquisition condition When it is established, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a pre-determination means for executing pre-determination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the pre-determination means satisfies at least the pre-determination condition during the privilege game. In this case, the pre-determination is executed, and it is characterized by having an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode during the privilege game in response to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding means that can acquire the ball entry information based on the ball entering the starting port and hold the ball entry information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery condition are established. It has a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry information, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is won. There is a game machine. Then, it has a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the entry information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the pre-determining means means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game when it is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when a hit is won again in the hold, a special effect can be executed during the second hit game, and the player can be satisfied. However, since it is configured to determine the winning information held at the end of the big hit and only the effect set at the time of winning is executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even if the winning information to be played is withheld, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

Further, although the effect is configured to be continuous for a plurality of hit games, the effect is such that the player can easily identify the break between the first hit game and the second hit game. However, there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how much the winning game will be executed during the production that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the production mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means executed during the privilege game, so that the production mode during the privilege game is set in advance as compared with the case where the production mode during the privilege game is set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the pre-determination result can be reduced.

In the game machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means executes a plurality of small privilege games, and the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed, and the production mode during the privilege game is set. It is possible to set the production mode of the privileged game according to the above. Therefore, even if the production mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The gaming machine K2 has a privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of the privilege games in which a different number of small privilege games are executed as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, as a privilege game, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. It has the effect of being able to change and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determination means includes the ball entry information in which the privilege game is executed in the storage means when the pre-determination result is a predetermined pre-determination result. The effect mode setting means determines in advance, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the privilege game according to the number of small privilege games executed in the privilege game predetermined by the pre-determination means. The gaming machine K4, which is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, the production mode during the privileged game is set according to the number of small privileged games determined by the pre-determining means, so that the player is in the privileged game. There is an effect that the production mode can be watched.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Of these, the small privilege game number notification means for notifying at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege notified by the small privilege game number notification means. Notification for setting the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means for determining the difference from the number of games and the first difference determination means. A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one privilege is provided by partially notifying the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the privilege game (big hit). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and while the privilege game is being executed, the game is performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The game machine K5 is characterized by having an addition means for adding the number of the small privilege games executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, if it is determined in advance that the privilege game will be executed by the pre-determination means during the privilege game (big hit), the pre-determined privilege game The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when a plurality of privilege games are executed at short intervals, the number of small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of small privilege games executed in the later privilege games. It can be set by adding the number of. Therefore, by looking at the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the game after playing.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determination means for determining whether to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means when the small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5 or K6, whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is determined by the update determination means, so that the number of notifications is determined. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated, the next time the small privilege game is executed, the small privilege game is executed. It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means will be updated, and it is possible to play games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, a compulsory updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is provided. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, it is notified by the forced update means and the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period for the player to execute the privilege games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notification means for notifying the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, and the number of the small privilege games. When the second difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference from the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means and the discrimination result by the second difference discriminating means satisfy the second condition. The gaming machine K9 is characterized by having a compulsory update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the discrimination result by the second difference discrimination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means is used to notify the small privilege game number notification means. Since the number of small privilege games that have been played is forcibly updated, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notification means preliminarily determines the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period during the period during which the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that when the result of the above is the predetermined pre-determined result, the notification of the specific number of small privilege games is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the privileged game is being executed, and as a result of the preliminary determination, the privileged game If the player is elected, a specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of acquiring the entry information during the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means. When the third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference and the first privilege game are completed and the discrimination result of the third difference discriminating means satisfies the third condition, the first privilege game is terminated. The gaming machine K11 is characterized by having a production continuation means for continuing the production executed during the privilege game from the time when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the discrimination result by the third difference discriminating means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the privilege game by the effect continuing means. The effect is continuously displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the pre-determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, it is possible to display an effect that is continuously executed during the privilege game after the first privilege game is completed. is there.

The gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K11, it is executed during the award game during the period from the end of the first award game to the execution of the second award game by the directing continuation means. It is possible to surely execute the effect to be performed. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to perform the games while expecting that more small privilege games are executed while the effects are being executed. effective.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, when the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result, the storage number discriminating means for discriminating the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means, and the storage number discriminating means. It has an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes executed during the privilege game, and is stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the ball entering means determined by the storage number determination means. The gaming machine K13 is characterized by having a privilege game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, when the determination result is a predetermined result, the effect mode during the privilege game is based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Is selected, it is possible to provide the player with various effects during the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means determines that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-determination means is the predetermined pre-determination result as the plurality of effect modes when the privilege game is started. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a person and a second effect mode that can be notified to a player after the privilege game is completed are stored.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K13, the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means notifies that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-determination means is a predetermined pre-determination result. Since the timing can be changed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Change the production frequency in the game history)
The determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, the effect execution means for executing the effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the effect for showing the specific determination result by the effect execution means. It is executed by the privilege giving means that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player when executed, the storage means that stores the corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied, and the effect executing means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect among the effects.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, as a variable effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player to the operating means, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. However, there is a problem that if the operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not enthusiastically operate the operation means, the player's motivation to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific effect can be changed according to the progress of the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables set so that the selection rates of the specific effects are different, and the determination means corresponds to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by easy control. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has an operation means operated by the player and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determining means, an operation effect for changing the effect mode is set, and the specific condition is that at least one that the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determining means. The gaming machine L3, which is characterized in that it is set to the conditions of.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operating means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed but also the specific condition is easily satisfied. There is an effect that can be changed and the execution ratio of a specific effect can be affected.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least the storage means capable of accumulating the history information, the setting means capable of setting the storage value up to a predetermined value based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means thereof. A selection means for selecting the accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulated value from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems, and an accumulated privilege giving means for granting the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selection means. When a new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one storage privilege system from a plurality of storage privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. As a result, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is executed and the granting of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulation privilege given by the accumulation privilege giving means is different for each of the accumulation privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L4, the accumulation benefits given by the accumulation privilege system can be different, so that it is fun to acquire various accumulation benefits while differently operating the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Further, by making the operation contents of the operating means different, it is possible to make the effect frequency different, so that there is an effect that new enjoyment can be provided to the player for the effect to be executed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means that enables the history information stored in the storage means to be erased to a state in which the storage privilege system different depending on the selection means can be selected. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted until a different accumulation privilege system can be selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, since the accumulated value set by the setting means is also variable (decreased) based on the fact that the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value is a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the effect is reduced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6 has a guiding means for guiding the game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, the game is performed based on the game content guided by the guiding means, so that a specific accumulated privilege system is selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various accumulated benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by changing the effect mode of the operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guiding means, so that a different accumulation privilege system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the guidance means has either a notification effect mode for notifying the operation means to perform the predetermined operation or a non-notification effect mode for not notifying the operation means. A gaming machine L9 characterized in that the game content is guided by using a machine.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easy to be performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is difficult to be performed. Just by operating, different accumulated privilege systems will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the player has a system selection means capable of selecting the specific storage privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guidance means from the plurality of storage privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game content can be notified so that the player can select the desired accumulated privilege system, so that the effect of the effect is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic M group> (Discrimination measures when small hits are confirmed)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. A determination means capable of executing a determination in a case, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. And the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special ball-entry means that enables the ball, a specific area where the game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. The privilege granting means to be granted, the privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. A notification means for notifying the notification information that allows the player to identify the type of the above, and the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the notification information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a means for making it difficult to enter the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the winning game. As for the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the winning game is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during the hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage on the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter the ball.

The present gaming machine M1 has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine M1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the game store side.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid being given a specific privilege type by checking the notification information indicating the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, another privilege type is used. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage on the amusement shop side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes that combine a pseudo stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific privilege game is executed, the gaming ball is sent to the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method for avoiding the entry of a ball.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 or M2 has a variable control means for varying the entry rate of a ball entering the specific area according to the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M1 or M2, the ball entry rate for entering a specific area can be changed depending on the type of privileged game to be executed, so that the probability of entering a specific area is changed. Has the effect of being able to be easily controlled.

<Characteristic N group> (Direct hit production part 2)
The ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be inserted during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the specific ball entering means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed, and the game ball enters the specific area, the game is played. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And the effect executing means capable of executing the effect over the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the time when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine N1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early getting bored with a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine N1, the effect executing means executes the effect of 1 based on the types of privileged games given by the plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machines N1 or N2, when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect executing means switches to the specific effect and executes the effect. The gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is provided above the V attacker to prevent choro hitting)
The ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has a mode determining means and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, the specific ball-entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the period during which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and the specific ball-entry means that the game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter. A region, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the notification means for notifying the information regarding the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means and the position where the game ball can be guided to the specific entry means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: an adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of a gaming ball guided to a specific ball entering means with respect to a predetermined period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the winning game. As for the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the winning game is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during the hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage on the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter the ball.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine P1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the game store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball-entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball-entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a third means in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball that flows down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a third means in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped launching the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the second flow path is sent to the second flow path. The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method in which the special game is not allowed to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic Q group> (Countermeasures against cholo hitting 2)
The ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has a mode determining means and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, the specific ball-entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the period during which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and the specific ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. A region, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The pachinko / pachinko ball is guided to the specific ball-entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball-entry means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the disadvantage on the gaming store side will increase because the gaming method is performed so that the gaming ball does not enter a specific entrance or a specific area. was there.

The present gaming machine Q1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine Q1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the game store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball-entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball-entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a third means in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball that flows down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path that allows the ball to enter the means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a third means capable of flowing down the gaming ball. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped launching the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the second flow path is sent to the second flow path. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method in which the special game is not allowed to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction until passing V in small hit and direct hit)
The ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be inserted during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the specific ball entering means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed, and the game ball enters the specific area, the game is played. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And the effect executing means capable of executing the effect over the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the time when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. The effect executing means executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the gaming ball is gradually switched before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine N1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early getting bored with a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means executes the effect of 1 based on the types of privileged games given by the plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machines R1 or R2, when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect executing means switches to the specific effect and executes the effect. The gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify.

<Characteristic S group> (Switching between two types of control for small hits and symbol hits)
There are an entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are different. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the specific ball entering means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed, and the game ball enters the specific area, the game is played. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. The first state in which the taxiway for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the switching means is described. The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having a setting means for setting a second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required.

The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine P1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that it can be switched to the first state by switching the taxiway according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the taxiway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the gaming ball can be easily entered into a specific area. Even if it is a second privilege game, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is given by entering the specific area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information is set with a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types for small hits and symbol hits 2)
The ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are different. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the specific ball entering means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed, and the game ball enters the specific area, the game is played. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state, the taxiway for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and the second state, which is difficult to guide to the specific area. The switching means for switching and the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means are set when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the switching means is described. The gaming machine T1 having a setting means for setting a second switching information for switching the taxiway to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start port provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required.

The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present gaming machine P1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming ball reaches the specific area by different taxiways depending on whether the second switching information is used to switch to the first state or the first switching information is used to switch to the first state. The gaming machine T2, which is characterized by being guided by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored at an early stage because he / she is guided to a specific region by different guidance.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information is set with a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a start port provided on the game board, and the lottery result is displayed as a symbol or the like to be notified in advance. It is known that the game is notified in a notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
In such gaming machines, it is required to improve the interest of gaming.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball and a determination capable of executing a determination when the game ball enters the ball-entry means. The means, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. It is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a first privilege game and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is performed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period during which the privilege game is being executed, a specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed. When the game ball enters the specific area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is given, and when the second privilege game is executed, the ball is involved in entering the specific area. During the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means, and the privilege granting means for granting the second benefit that is advantageous to the player. It has an effect executing means capable of executing a straddling effect, and the effect executing means stepwisely before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. This is to perform a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the game ball is switched.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the effect executing means executes the effect of 1 based on the types of privileged games given by the plurality of effects.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, when the effect executing means does not allow the gaming ball to enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed. , It is to switch to a specific effect and execute it.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball-entry means, and a determination means thereof. A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the information and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The specific ball-entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the period, the specific area where the game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and the first privilege game are executed, and the specific When a game ball enters the area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is given, and when the second privilege game is executed, the player is given the first privilege regardless of the entry into the specific area. It spanned the privilege granting means for granting an advantageous second privilege and the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. The effect executing means has an effect executing means capable of executing the effect, and the effect executing means fires a game ball step by step before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. It is intended to perform a suggestion effect that suggests switching the method.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the types of privilege games given by the plurality of effects.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, when the game ball does not enter the specific area even after the preset period has elapsed, the effect executing means switches to the specific effect and executes the effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 First prize opening (example of ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
600a V entrance (specific area)
620 V winning device (specific ball winning means)
S104 Part of the dynamic display mode determining means
S222, S1118 setting means
S233, S237 determination means
S1004, S1005 privilege game execution means

Claims (2)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
A judgment means capable of executing a judgment when a game ball enters the ball entry means,
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and
When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed. In a gaming machine that has possible privilege game execution means
A specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball entry means.
A retention means capable of retaining a game ball that has entered the specific entry means,
A specific area where a game ball whose retention has been released by the retention means can enter, and
When the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the first privilege advantageous to the player is given, and when the second privilege game is executed, the specific A privilege granting means for granting a second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of entering the area,
When the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, the first setting set based on the retention means for the game ball and the retention means for the game ball to be retained. It has a setting means capable of setting a second setting different from the first setting which is set by not being set.
When the second privilege game in which the first setting is set is executed, the gaming machine is granted the second privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area. When the second privilege game in which the first effect for indicating the above is executed and the second setting is executed is executed, the game ball does not enter the specific area and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is established, and a second effect different from the first effect for showing that the second privilege is granted is feasibly configured.
The second effect is executed after the specific effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has not entered the specific area is executed.
The gaming machine
It is possible to set a valid period for determining that the game ball has entered the specific area during the period in which the first privilege game is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify an abnormality based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered a ball outside the valid period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is composed of a liquid crystal display.

Images